Roland Electronic Keyboard KR 17 User Guide

Owner’s Manual

Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT SAFETY

INSTRUCTIONS” (p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (p. 3, 4, 5), and “IMPORTANT NOTES”

(p. 6, 7, 8). These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation

of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of

every feature provided by your new unit, Owner’s Manual should be read in its entirety.

The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference

the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USING THE UNIT SAFELY

The

symbol alerts the user to important instructions

Used for instructions intended to alert

the user to the risk of death or severe

injury should the unit be used

improperly.

or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is

determined by the design contained within the

triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for

general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.

Used for instructions intended to alert

the user to the risk of injury or material

damage should the unit be used

improperly.

The

symbol alerts the user to items that must never

be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that

must not be done is indicated by the design contained

within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it

means that the unit must never be disassembled.

* Material damage refers to damage or

other adverse effects caused with

respect to the home and all its

furnishings, as well to domestic

animals or pets.

The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be

carried out. The specific thing that must be done is

indicated by the design contained within the circle. In

the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-

cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.

001

009

•

Before using this unit, make sure to read the

instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual.

•

Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord,

nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can

damage the cord, producing severed elements and

short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and shock

hazards!

..........................................................................................................

•

^002aDo not open or perform any internal modifica-

tions on the unit.

..........................................................................................................

010

•

This unit, either alone or in combination with an

amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be

capable of producing sound levels that could

cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for

a long period of time at a high volume level, or at

a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience

any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should

immediately stop using the unit, and consult an

audiologist.

..........................................................................................................

003

•

Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts

within it (except when this manual provides

specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer

all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland

Service Center, or an authorized Roland

distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.

..........................................................................................................

004

..........................................................................................................

•

Never use or store the unit in places that are:

• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct

sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating

duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or

are

011

•

Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material,

coins, pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft

drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.

• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors);

or are

• Humid; or are

• Exposed to rain; or are

• Dusty; or are

..........................................................................................................

012a:***

•

Immediately turn the power off, remove the

power cord from the outlet, and request servicing

by your retailer, the nearest Roland Service

Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as

listed on the “Information” page when:

• Subject to high levels of vibration.

..........................................................................................................

Add

•

When installing the piano, be sure to fasten the

caster using the supplied caster cup.

• The power-supply cord, or the plug has been

damaged; or

• If smoke or unusual odor occurs

• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been

spilled onto the unit; or

• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise

has become wet); or

• The unit does not appear to operate normally or

exhibits a marked change in performance.

• If abnormal sound are produced.

• If error messages (Error.61, Error.62) have

appeared.

..........................................................................................................

007

•

Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is

level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on

stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.

..........................................................................................................

•

^008aThe unit should be connected to a power supply

only of the type described in the operating instruc-

tions, or as marked on the bottom of unit.

..........................................................................................................

•

^008eUse only the attached power-supply cord.

..........................................................................................................

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

013

•

In households with small children, an adult

should provide supervision until the child is

capable of following all the rules essential for the

safe operation of the unit.

•

^101aThe unit should be located so that its location or

position does not interfere with its proper venti-

lation.

..........................................................................................................

•

^102bAlways grasp only the plug on the power-supply

..........................................................................................................

014

•

Protect the unit from strong impact.

(Do not drop it!)

cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an

outlet or this unit.

..........................................................................................................

103a:

015

•

At regular intervals, you should unplug the power

plug and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all

dust and other accumulations away from its

prongs. Also, disconnect the power plug from the

power outlet whenever the unit is to remain

unused for an extended period of time. Any

accumulation of dust between the power plug and

the power outlet can result in poor insulation and

lead to fire.

•

Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to share

an outlet with an unreasonable number of other

devices. Be especially careful when using

extension cords—the total power used by all

devices you have connected to the extension

cord’s outlet must never exceed the power rating

(watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive

loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat

up and eventually melt through.

..........................................................................................................

104

016

•

Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming

entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be

placed so they are out of the reach of children.

•

Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult

with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service

Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as

listed on the “Information” page.

..........................................................................................................

106

•

Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on

the unit.

..........................................................................................................

019

•

Batteries must never be recharged, heated, taken

apart, or thrown into fire or water.

..........................................................................................................

•

^107bNever handle the power cord or its plugs with wet

hands when plugging into, or unplugging from,

an outlet or this unit.

..........................................................................................................

023

..........................................................................................................

•

DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conventional

audio CD player. The resulting sound may be of a

level that could cause permanent hearing loss.

Damage to speakers or other system components

may result.

•

^108aBefore moving the unit, disconnect the power

plug from the outlet, and pull out all cords from

external devices.

..........................................................................................................

•

^108cDisconnect all cords coming from external devices

Add

before moving the unit.

•

Be careful not to touch the keys while the

automatic keyboard is functioning, as this may

sprain your fingers or damage the keyboard.

..........................................................................................................

•

^109aBefore cleaning the unit, turn off the power and

..........................................................................................................

026

unplug the power cord from the outlet (p. 20).

•

Do not put anything that contains water (e.g.,

flower vases) on this unit. Also, avoid the use of

insecticides, perfumes, alcohol, nail polish, spray

cans, etc., near the unit. Swiftly wipe away any

liquid that spills on the unit using a dry, soft cloth.

..........................................................................................................

•

^110aWhenever you suspect the possibility of lightning

in your area, pull the plug on the power cord out

of the outlet.

..........................................................................................................

001-50

•

Connect mains plug of this model to a mains

socket outlet with a protective earthing

connection.

..........................................................................................................

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

111: Selection

•

If used improperly, batteries may explode or leak

and cause damage or injury. In the interest of

safety, please read and observe the following

precautions.

• Carefully follow the installation instructions for

batteries, and make sure you observe the correct

polarity.

• Avoid using new batteries together with used

ones. In addition, avoid mixing different types

of batteries.

• Remove the batteries whenever the unit is to

remain unused for an extended period of time.

• If a battery has leaked, use a soft piece of cloth

or paper towel to wipe all remnants of the

discharge from the battery compartment. Then

install new batteries. To avoid inflammation of

the skin, make sure that none of the battery

discharge gets onto your hands or skin. Exercise

the utmost caution so that none of the discharge

gets near your eyes. Immediately rinse the

affected area with running water if any of the

discharge has entered the eyes.

• Never keep batteries together with metallic

objects such as ballpoint pens, necklaces,

hairpins, etc.

..........................................................................................................

112

•

Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance

with whatever regulations for their safe disposal

that may be observed in the region in which you

live.

..........................................................................................................

116

•

Be careful when opening/closing the lid so you do

not get your fingers pinched (p. 20). Adult super-

vision is recommended whenever small children

use the unit.

..........................................................................................................

118

•

Should you remove screws and cord cramp, make

sure to put them in a safe place out of children’s

reach, so there is no chance of them being

swallowed accidentally.

..........................................................................................................

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IMPORTANT NOTES

291b

In addition to the items listed under “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” and “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on pages 2,

3, 4 and 5, please read and observe the following:

355b

Power Supply

• Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any

• When moved from one location to another where the

temperature and/or humidity is very different, water

301

droplets (condensation) may form inside the unit. Damage

or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in

this condition. Therefore, before using the unit, you must

allow it to stand for several hours, until the condensation

has completely evaporated.

device that will generate line noise (such as an electric

motor or variable lighting system).

306b

• A batteries are supplied with the unit. The life of this

battery may be limited, however, since its primary

356

purpose was to enable testing.

• Do not allow rubber, vinyl, or similar materials to remain

on the unit for long periods of time. Such objects can

discolor or otherwise harmfully affect the finish.

• Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard.

This can be the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing

307

• Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the

power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions

and/or damage to speakers or other devices.

308

• Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the

to produce sound.

359

POWER switch is switched off, this does not mean that the

unit has been completely disconnected from the source of

power. If you need to turn off the power completely, first

turn off the POWER switch, then unplug the power cord

from the power outlet. For this reason, the outlet into

which you choose to connect the power cord’s plug

should be one that is within easy reach and readily acces-

sible.

• Do not paste stickers, decals, or the like to this instrument.

Peeling such matter off the instrument may damage the

exterior finish.

Maintenance

401b

• Since your piano has a polished finish that is as delicate as

that found on finely crafted wooden furniture, it needs

careful, periodic care. A few important suggestions

concerning the proper care of the unit follow.

Placement

• For dusting, using a soft, clean cloth and/or piano-use

feather duster. Be sure to wipe gently. Even the tiniest

grains of sand or grit can leave scratches on the surface

if too much force is applied while wiping.

Do not use any cleaners or detergents, since they might

deteriorate the surface of the cabinet, and produce

cracks.

351

• Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment

containing large power transformers) may induce hum.

To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this

unit; or move it farther away from the source of inter-

ference.

352a

• This device may interfere with radio and television

• If the cabinet’s surface loses its luster, wipe it

thoroughly with a soft cloth dampened with a little of

the polishing liquid.

Do not use any cleaners or detergents, since they might

deteriorate the surface of the cabinet, and produce

cracks. Do not use dusting cloths that contain

reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such

receivers.

352b

• Noise may be produced if wireless communications

devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of

this unit. Such noise could occur when receiving or initi-

ating a call, or while conversing. Should you experience

such problems, you should relocate such wireless devices

so they are at a greater distance from this unit, or switch

chemicals.

402

• Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any

kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or

deformation.

them off.

353

• Observe the following when using the unit’s floppy disk

drive. For further details, refer to “Before Using Floppy

Disks” (p. 7).

Repairs and Data

452

• Please be aware that all data contained in the unit’s

• Do not place the unit near devices that produce a

strong magnetic field (e.g., loudspeakers).

memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs.

Important data should always be backed up on a floppy

disk, or written down on paper (when possible). During

repairs, due care is taken to avoid the loss of data.

However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry related

to memory itself is out of order), we regret that it may not

be possible to restore the data, and Roland assumes no

liability concerning such loss of data.

• Install the unit on a solid, level surface.

• Do not move the unit or subject it to vibration while

the drive is operating.

354b

• Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near

devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed

vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes.

Also, do not allow lighting devices that normally are used

while their light source is very close to the unit (such as a

piano light), or powerful spotlights to shine upon the

same area of the unit for extended periods of time.

Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IMPORTANT NOTES

565

Automatic Keyboard

• Before opening or closing the keyboard lid, always make sure

that no pets or other small animals are located on top of the

instrument (in particular, they should be kept away from the

keyboard and its lid). Otherwise, due to the structural design of

this instrument, small pets or other animals could end up getting

trapped inside it. If such a situation is encountered, you must

immediately switch off the power and disconnect the power cord

from the outlet. You should then consult with the retailer from

whom the instrument was purchased, or contact the nearest

Roland Service Center.

Add

• While the automatic keyboard is in operation, avoid doing

anything that could hamper the action of the keys, such as

using undue force to press a key, or forcing up a

depressed key. By doing so, you risk causing malfunction.

Additional Precautions

• Please be aware that the contents of memory can be

551

irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the

improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself against

the risk of loosing important data, we recommend that

you periodically save a backup copy of important data

Before Using Floppy Disks

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive

602

• Install the unit on a solid, level surface in an area free from

you have stored in the unit’s memory on a floppy disk.

vibration. If the unit must be installed at an angle, be sure

the installation does not exceed the permissible range:

552

• Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents

of data that was stored on a floppy disk and the unit

memory once it has been lost. Roland Corporation

assumes no liability concerning such loss of data.

upward, 0°; downward, 0°.

603

• Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved

to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly

different than its former location. Rapid changes in the

environment can cause condensation to form inside the

drive, which will adversely affect the operation of the

drive and/or damage floppy disks. When the unit has

been moved, allow it to become accustomed to the new

553

• Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s

buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks

and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.

554

• Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.

556

• When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the

environment (allow a few hours) before operating it.

604

connector itself—never pull on the cable. This way you

will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable’s

• To insert a disk, push it gently but firmly into the drive—

it will click into place. To remove a disk, press the EJECT

button firmly. Do not use excessive force to remove a disk

internal elements.

557

• A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during

which is lodged in the drive.

605b***

normal operation.

• Never eject a disk while reading or writing is in progress,

558a

• To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s

since that can damage the magnetic surface of the disk,

rendering it unusable. (The disk drive’s indicator will

light up at full brightness when the drive is busy reading

or writing data. Ordinarily, the indicator will be less

volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use

headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about

those around you (especially when it is late at night).

558d

brightly lighted, or be extinguished.)

• This instrument is designed to minimize the extraneous

606

sounds produced when it’s played. However, since sound

vibrations can be transmitted through floors and walls to

a greater degree than expected, take care not to allow

these sounds to become a nuisance to neighbors,

especially when performing at night and when using

headphones.

• Remove any disk from the drive before powering up or

down.

607

• To prevent damage to the disk drive’s heads, always try to

hold the floppy disk in a level position (not tilted in any

direction) while inserting it into the drive. Push it in

firmly, but gently. Never use excessive force.

559b

608

• When you need to transport the unit, pack it in shock-

• To avoid the risk of malfunction and/or damage, insert

absorbent material. Transporting the unit without doing

so can cause it to become scratched or damaged, and

could lead to malfunction.

only floppy disks into the disk drive. Never insert any

other type of disk. Avoid getting paper clips, coins, or any

other foreign objects inside the drive.

560

• Do not apply undue force to the music stand while it is in

use.

Handling Floppy Disks

561

651

• Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-5; sold

• Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of

separately). By connecting any other expression pedals,

you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to the unit.

magnetic storage medium. Microscopic precision is

required to enable storage of large amounts of data on

such a small surface area. To preserve their integrity,

please observe the following when handling floppy disks:

• Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk.

• Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas.

• Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes

(e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle). Recom-

mended temperature range: 10 to 50° C (50 to 122° F).

• Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields,

such as those generated by loudspeakers.

562

• Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using

some other make of connection cable, please note the

following precautions.

• Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use

cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this

unit. The use of such cables can cause the sound level

to be extremely low, or impossible to hear. For infor-

mation on cable specifications, contact the manufac-

turer of the cable.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IMPORTANT NOTES

652

Handling the CDs

• Floppy disks have a “write protect” tab which can protect

Add

the disk from accidental erasure. It is recommended that

the tab be kept in the PROTECT position, and moved to

the WRITE position only when you wish to write new

data onto the disk.

• When handling the discs, please observe the following.

• Do not touch the recorded surface of the disc.

• Do not use in dusty areas.

• Do not leave the disc in direct sunlight or an enclosed

vehicle.

Rear side of the disk

801

• Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside

(encoded surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM

discs may not be read properly. Keep your discs clean

Write

(can write new data onto disk)

using a commercially available CD cleaner.

Add

• Keep the disc in the case.

Protect

Write Protect Tab

(prevents writing to disk)

Add

653

• Do not keep the disc in the CD drive for a long time.

• The identification label should be firmly affixed to the

disk. Should the label come loose while the disk is in the

Add

• Do not put a sticker on the label of the disc.

Add

drive, it may be difficult to remove the disk.

• Wipe the disc with a soft and dry cloth radially from

654

inside to outside. Do not wipe along circumference.

• Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them, and

Add

to protect them from dust, dirt, and other hazards. By

using a dirty or dust-ridden disk, you risk damaging the

• Do not use benzine, record cleaner spray or solvents of

any kind.

disk, as well as causing the disk drive to malfunction.

Add

655

• Do not bend the disc. Bending discs may prevent proper

• Disks containing performance data for this unit should

reading and writing of data, and may further result in

malfunction.

always be locked (have their write protect tab slid to the

“Protect” position) before you insert them into the drive

on some other unit (except the PR-300, or a product in the

HP-G, MT, KR, or Atelier families), or into a computer’s

drive. Otherwise (if the write protect tab remains in the

“Write” position), when you perform any disk operations

using the other device’s disk drive (such as checking the

contents of the disk, or loading data), you risk rendering

the disk unreadable by this unit’s disk drive.

203

GS (

) is a registered trademark of Roland Corpo-

) is a registered trademark of Yamaha Corpo-

ration.

XG lite (

ration.

²⁰⁷Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple

Computer, Inc.

²¹⁰IBM and IBM PC are registered trademark of International

Before Using CDs

Business Machines Corporation.

²²⁰All product names mentioned in this document are trade-

Handling the CD Drive

Add

• Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved

marks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly

different than its former location. Rapid changes in the

environment can cause condensation to form inside the

drive, which will adversely affect the operation of the

drive and/or damage discs. When the unit has been

moved, allow it to become accustomed to the new

environment (allow a few hours) before operating it.

Add

• Remove any disc from the drive before powering up or

down.

Add

• To avoid the risk of malfunction and/or damage, insert

only discs with into the CD drive. Never insert any other

type of disc. Avoid getting paper clips, coins, or any other

foreign objects inside the drive.

Add

• Do not subject to vibrations or physical shock during use,

and do not move the unit while the power is turned on.

Add

• The pickup is of dust-resistant construction. Do not use

pickup cleaners or other such materials, as they may

damage the pickup.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the Roland KR Intelligent Piano.

While the KR Intelligent Piano certainly allows you to achieve authentic piano

performances, it also features easy-to-use Automatic Accompaniment and numerous

other useful functions. In order to enjoy reliable performance of your new keyboard for

many years to come, please take the time to read through this manual in its entirety.

Main Features

❍ Piano Sounds with Rich Resonance and Wide-Ranging

Expressiveness

The stereo sampling piano sound generator realistically reproduces even the sound of

the hammers striking the strings, producing the tones of a high-quality concert grand

piano.

Maximum polyphony of 128 notes ensures that you can use the pedal freely without

running out of notes.

The KR features a new speaker system, “grand piano presence system,” to provide

sounds with depth and spatial realism.

❍ Pursuing the Playing Feel of a Grand Piano

These instruments feature a progressive hammer action keyboard, which duplicates the

touch of a grand piano, with a heavier touch in the lower register, and a lighter touch in

the upper register. In addition, even the distinctive “click” that you feel when pressing

a key on a grand piano has been faithfully simulated (escapement mechanism).

The pedal is designed for good-feeling response, and allows subtle performance nuances

to be expressed.

❍ Get Easy Results with the Main Buttons

You can play songs, display scores, play the Automatic Accompaniment, select Tones,

and perform other main KR functions easily by pressing the main buttons found on both

sides of the screen.

With the [Select/Listen to a Song] button, you can select over 150 internal songs, from

songs for piano practice to the latest hits. Pressing the [Score Display] button lets you

display not only the score for any of the internal songs, but for your own recorded songs

and songs on floppy disks.

With the [Music Assistant] button you can select a song you want to play, call up

Automatic Accompaniment settings that match that song, and while looking at the

chord score, perform with accompaniment added.

Thanks to the [Select Various Tones] button, which is used to select suggested Tones

from the more than 600 internal Tones; the [Song Stylist] button, which allows you to

listen to a variety of arrangements of the internal popular songs, and transform them

into rock, jazz, or other forms of music; and the [Session Partner] button, which lets

you leave the chords and rhythm to the backing band, and give your performances the

feel of a group session, you can enjoy playing the KR in a great variety of creative ways.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

❍ A Variety of Support Functions for Fostering Rich Musical

Abilities

You can use the “DigiScore” feature, which lets you specify the information to be shown

in the score display, including notes, fingerings, and even a “bouncing ball” that keeps

the rhythm for the current performance. You can have specified segments be repeated,

allowing you to practice the part over as you like, easily play back and record each hand

separately, and enjoy a number of other handy practice features available only with

digital pianos.

Other useful practice features include a “Replay” pedal that you can press to stop the

performance and go back when you have trouble with what you’re playing, and “Touch

the Note,” a function that lets you confirm how a note sounds by touching the note on

the screen.

Features geared specifically for young children include “Wonderland,” where kids can

enjoy touching a variety of instruments; and the “Game,” an ear-training feature which

helps build their listening abilities with all the fun of a game.

❍ Connector for External Display of Enlarged Scores and Lyrics

The KR features a built-in connector for external displays.

By displaying scores and lyrics on a bigger screen, everyone playing in your group

should be able to get a clear view.

❍ Superior Player Piano Function (Only Instrument Equipped

with Moving Key)

The KR includes an automatic “Moving Key” function that actually moves the keys

while playing songs. Use the CD drive to play the enclosed CD and CDs for automatic

player pianos, as well as audio CDs. You can also connect an external display for a more

expanded view of your work, and use the remote control to select, start and stop songs.

❍ Connect to External Speakers for Concert Hall Presence

Connect external speakers, amps or other devices to the KR. Then play the reverb or

accompaniment sounds through the external speaker and experience the sensation of

being surrounded by an orchestra.

❍ Color Screen Makes Operation Easier

The KR’s color screen makes viewing easier. It also functions as a touch panel, so you can

carry out tasks simply by touching the panel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

How To Use This Manual

The KR Owner’s Manual consists of two volumes, Quick Start and the Owner’s

Manual.

Please start out by reading “Before You Start Playing” (p. 18) in the Owner’s Manual

(this volume). This explains how to connect the KR’s power cord and how to turn on the

instrument’s power.

After turning on the KR’s power, please continue by reading Quick Start.

By trying out the various procedures while reading the Quick Start, you can easily learn

how to play the KR and make use of its major functions (especially procedures that

involve use of the “main buttons”).

The Owner’s Manual describes procedures, from basic operation to procedures for

special applications (for example, using the KR as an accompanist and creating songs),

that will help you master the KR’s many performance functions.

■ Conventions Used in This Manual

This manual uses the following conventions in the interest of simpler, more concise

instructions.

• Button names are enclosed in square brackets “[ ]”, as in One Touch Program [Piano]

button.

• The text incorporates KR-17 screen shots and panel diagrams. Thus, there will be some

portions where the information differs from that for the KR-15.

• For easier readability, some screens and colors used here may differ in part from actual

screens and colors.

• On screen text is enclosed in angled brackets “< >”, as in <Exit>.

• The act of lightly contacting the Touch Screen with your finger is called “touching.”

NOTE

• An asterisk (*) or a

at the beginning of a paragraph indicates a note or

precaution. These should not be ignored.

• (p. **) refers to pages within the manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Panel Descriptions

The panel diagrams shown in this owner’s manual are those of the KR-17.

8 9

10 111213

19 20 21

Power

17 18

1. [Power] switch

13.[User Function] Button

Pressed to switch the power on and off (p. 21).

This is used to assign a variety of functions to the Performance

Pads (p. 157).

The KR-15’s [Power] switch is positioned to the left of the keyboard.

Performance Pads

14.[1]–[4] buttons

2. [Volume] knob

Adjusts the overall volume (p. 22).

The operation of each is changed depending on the buttons

3. [Brilliance] knob

numbered 11–13.

Adjusts the brightness of the sound (p. 22).

4. [Wonderland/Game] button

15.Music Style buttons

Here you can learn about instruments while having fun.

Selects a Music Style for automatic accompaniment (p. 62).

Pressing the [User] button selects a User Style that you’ve made

yourself or a Music Style on floppy disk (p. 63).

→ See the Quick Start

Balance

16.Fill In buttons

Inserts a fill-in in an automatic accompaniment and changes the

5. [Part Balance] button

accompaniment pattern (p. 69).

This adjusts the relative volume levels of each of the

[To Variation] button

[To Original] button

performance parts (p. 75).

6. [Balance] knob

Changes the volume balance for sounds played with the

17.[Intro/Ending] button

keyboard and for songs and accompaniments (p. 75).

Play an intro or ending during automatic accompaniment (p. 66).

18.[Start/Stop] button

7. [User Program] button

Starts and stops automatic accompaniment (p. 66).

Stores the selected functions and states of the buttons (p. 122).

DSP

Rhythm Partner

8. [Reverb] button

19.[Metronome] button

Adds reverberation to the sound (p. 33).

Activates the built-in metronome (p. 52).

You can change the count sound settings (p. 160).

9. [Surround] button

Adds three-dimensional breadth to the accompaniment sounds

20.Beat Indicator

(p. 38).

This lights up in correspondence with the beat of the selected

song or accompaniment.

10.[Equalizer] button

Allows you to adjust the tone quality with the equalizer (p. 40).

21.[Rhythm] button

Plays the Rhythm pattern (p. 56).

11.[Style Orchestrator] button

22.Tempo [-] [+] buttons

Adjusts the tempo.

This is used to change the arrangement type for automatic

accompaniment with the Performance Pads (p. 70).

Press the [-] and [+] buttons at the same time to return to the

original tempo.

12.[Phrase] Button

This is used to play a short phrase with the Performance Pads

(p. 71).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Panel Descriptions

40 41

26 27 28

3334353637 39

23. Main Buttons

Record/Playback

→ See the Quick Start

31.[Menu] button

You can select functions for playing back, recording or editing a

[Select/Listen to a Song], [Disk] button

song (p. 127, p. 144).

Use this button to select internal songs or songs from floppy

disk (p. 77).

32.Track buttons

Used to play back or record each track of a song (p. 99, p. 111).

[Song Stylist] button

[Music Assistant] button

33.[

(Reset)] button

Resets the song playback-start location to the beginning of the

[Score Display] button

song.

Displays scores (p. 88).

You can use the practice function (p. 92).

34.[

(Play/Stop)] button

[Session Partner] button

Starts and stops playback or recording a song.

[Select Various Tones] button

35.[

(Rec)] button

When pressed, this button places the instrument in recording

24.Touch Screen

standby (p. 106, p. 127).

This lets you perform a variety of operations just by touching

36.[

(Bwd)] button

the screen (p. 24).

Rewinds the song.

25.Contrast knob

37.[

(Fwd)] button

Adjusts the contrast of the screen (p. 24).

Fast-forwards the song.

26.Dial

Use this to change on-screen values.

38.[Transpose] button

27.[-] [+] buttons

Transposes the pitch of the keyboard or the song being played

Allow you to change on-screen values.

(p. 103).

39.[Vocal Effect] Button

28.One Touch Program button

Applies a variety of effects to vocals from the microphone

[Piano] button

(p. 43).

Makes the optimal settings for a piano performance (p. 26).

40 .D isk Drive

[Arranger] button

You can insert a floppy disk for playing back or saving songs

Makes the optimal settings for playing with automatic

accompaniment (p. 59).

(p. 77, p. 116).

41.Eject Button

29.[Melody Intelligence] Button

Ejects a floppy disk from the disk drive (p. 114).

Adds harmony to the sounds played with the keyboard (p. 72).

30.[Tone] buttons

Select the Tones that will be played from the keyboard (p. 27).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Panel Descriptions

Bottom Panel

1. AC Inlet

6. Pedal connector

Connect the included power cable to this inlet (p. 20).

Connect the pedal cable of the stand to this connector (p. 20).

2. Input jacks

7. MIDI Out/In connectors

These jacks can be connected to another sound generating

These can be connected to an external MIDI device to exchange

device or an audio device, so that the sound of that device will

be output from the KR’s speakers (p. 176).

performance data (p. 172).

8. Computer connector

3. Output jacks (Main)

You can connect a computer to this connector to exchange

These jacks can be connected to your audio system to enjoy

more powerful sound. They can also be connected to a tape

recorder or similar device in order to record your performance

on a cassette tape (p. 176).

performance data (p. 178).

9. Computer switch

The setting for this switch made depending on the computer

connected – Mac/PC-1/PC-2.

Switches the connections for the MIDI connectors and the

computer port (p. 178).

4. Output jacks (Aux)

You can connect an amp or external speaker to the Aux jack and

play the accompaniment and reverb sounds through it

(p. 35).

You can’t use the MIDI Out/In connector and the Computer

connector at the same time.

5. Expression Pedal jack

10.Ext Display connector

You can connect an expression pedal to the KR.

Connect an external display. You can put scores on the screen

and display lyrics (p. 23).

Bottom Panel (Front Left)

Bottom Panel (Front Right)

Right Side of Bottom Panel (Instrument with Moving Key)

14.Access Indicator

This indicator will light when the inserted CD is being read.

11.Phones jacks

A set of headphones can be connected here (p. 22).

15.Disc Tray

Place the CD to be loaded on this tray.

12.Mic In jack

Used for connecting microphones (p. 22).

16.Emergency eject hole

This hole allows the disc tray to be opened in case of an

emergency.

13.Mic Volume knob

Adjusts the volume level for the microphone (p. 22).

17.Eject Button

Press this button to eject the CD.

You cannot eject the CD unless the power is on.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

USING THE UNIT SAFELY...............................................................3

IMPORTANT NOTES.........................................................................6

Enjoying Karaoke Performances with Music Files .................51

Using the Metronome and Rhythm (Rhythm Partner )................52

Using the Metronome..................................................................52

Changing the Metronome Settings............................................53

Playing Rhythm............................................................................56

Changing the Rhythm settings ..................................................56

Introduction ...............................................................9

Main Features.......................................................................................9

How To Use This Manual ................................................................11

Conventions Used in This Manual............................................11

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompanimen t ................. 58

Panel Descriptions..................................................12

Before You Start Playing........................................18

Music Styles and Automatic Accompanimen t ..............................58

Performing Using Automatic Accompaniment

(One-Touch Arranger) ......................................................................59

About Chords ...............................................................................60

Playing Chords with Simple Fingering (Chord Intelligence)60

Viewing Chord Fingerings (Chord Finder)..............................61

Selecting Music Styles (Music Style Buttons) ................................62

Selecting Music Styles on Floppy Disks ...................................63

Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles (Style Search )...64

Playing Only Music Style Rhythm Patterns ..................................65

Adjusting the Accompaniment Temp o ..........................................65

Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment ..................................66

Opening and Closing the Top (KR-17 )...........................................18

Opening and Closing the Top (KR-15 )...........................................19

Raising the Music Stand ...................................................................19

Using the Music Holders (KR-15)..............................................19

Opening and Closing the Lid...........................................................20

Connecting the Power Cord.............................................................20

Connect the Pedal Cable...................................................................21

Turning the Power On and Off........................................................21

About the Pedals................................................................................21

Adjusting the Sound’s Volume and Brillianc e ..............................22

Connecting Headphone s ..................................................................22

Connecting a Microphon e ................................................................22

Connecting an External Display......................................................23

Making the Connections.............................................................23

About the Touch Screen ...................................................................24

Adjusting the Contrast of the Screen ........................................24

Main Screens ......................................................................................24

Piano Screen..................................................................................24

Basic Screen...................................................................................24

Using the Main Icons...................................................................25

Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously

When You Play the Keyboard (Sync)........................................66

Stopping Automatic Accompaniment ......................................67

Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro

(Countdown) ................................................................................68

Modifying an Accompaniment ........................................................69

Changing the Accompaniment Pattern (Fill In Buttons)........69

Changing the Instrumental Makeup of Music Styles

(Style Orchestrator)......................................................................70

Playing Phrases (Phrase).............................................................71

Adding Harmony to the Right-Hand Part

(Melody Intelligence) ........................................................................72

Playing Sounds in the Left Hand During a Performance

(Lower Tone )......................................................................................73

Chapter 1 Performance...........................................26

Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano (One-Touch Piano )..............26

Performing with a Variety of Tones (Tone Buttons) ....................27

Playing Percussion Instruments or Sound Effects ..................28

Using Keywords to Search for Tones (Tone Search) ..............29

Performing with Two Sounds Layered Together (Layer) ...........30

Playing Different Tones with the Left and Right Hands (Split) .31

Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps (Octave Shift)..32

Adding Reverberation to the Sound (Reverb)...............................33

Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added

(Piano Style Arranger) ......................................................................74

Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Part (Balance )...............75

Changing the Volume Balance between the

Accompaniment and the Keyboard (Balance Knob) ..............75

Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance Part

(Part Balance)................................................................................75

Chapter 3 Song Playbac k ...................................... 77

Adding a Surround Sound to the Accompaniment and Reverb

(Surround) ..........................................................................................35

Playing a Song....................................................................................77

Using Keywords to Search for Songs (Song Search)...............79

Registering the Songs You Like (Favorites)...................................80

Removing Songs from Favorites ................................................81

Giving More Breadth to the Accompaniment Sound.............35

Changing the Amount of Surround Accomp ..........................36

Broadening the Reverb Sound ...................................................37

Changing the Amount of Surround Reverb ............................37

Playing Back Songs on CDs (Only for Instrument Equipped

with CD Drive)...................................................................................82

Adding Three-Dimensional Breadth to the Sounds You Play

(Advanced 3D)...................................................................................38

Cautions ........................................................................................82

Playing Back Songs on CDs........................................................83

Adjusting the Sound to Achieve the Preferred Tone Quality

(Equalizer) ..........................................................................................40

Using the Remote Control

(Only for Instrument Equipped with CD Drive) ..........................85

Applying Effects to the Sound (Effects) .........................................42

Adding Effects to Mic Vocals (Vocal Effect)..................................43

Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ...............................85

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

How to Use the Remote Control................................................85

Using the Pedal to Switch User Program s ...................................126

About the Remote Control .........................................................86

Simultaneously Switching User Program and Transmitting

PC Numbers .....................................................................................126

Chapter 4 Practice Functions ................................88

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs .............. 127

Displaying the Score .........................................................................88

Touching Notes to Confirm the Sounds (Touch the Notes) ..89

Making Detailed Settings for the Score Display......................90

Saving Scores as Image Dat a ......................................................91

Practicing Songs with the Practice Function ................................92

Adjusting the Tempo ........................................................................95

Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)........127

The 16-Track Sequencer Screen................................................127

Modifying the Settings of Each Part ........................................128

Getting the Most Suitable Part Tones for the Musical Genre

(Tone Set).....................................................................................129

Recording a Performance..........................................................129

Changing the Recording Method (Rec Mode).............................130

Setting the Tempo by Pressing the Button in Time

(Tap Tempo) .................................................................................96

Recording While Erasing the Previous Recording

(Replace Recording)...................................................................131

Use Your Voice to Select the Tempo (Vocal Tap Tempo) ......97

Playing Back at a Fixed Tempo (Tempo Mute) .......................97

Match the Tempo Before You Begin Playing (Count In) .............98

Muting Some Parts Before Playing (Track Buttons).....................99

Setting Markers for Repeated Practice (Marker).........................100

Placing a Marker within a Song...............................................100

Playback from a Marker Location ...........................................101

Erasing a Marker........................................................................101

Moving a Marker .......................................................................101

Playing Back the Same Passage Over and Over....................102

Layering a Recording Over Previously Recorded Sounds

(Mix Recording) .........................................................................131

Repeated Recording at the Same Location

(Loop Recording) .......................................................................132

Re-Recording Part of Your Performance

(Punch-in Recording) ................................................................133

Composing an Accompaniment By Entering Chords

(Chord Sequencer )...........................................................................134

Inputting Chords without Playing the Keyboar d .................135

Editing Songs ...................................................................................135

Basic Operation of the Editing Functions...............................135

Undoing Edits (Undo)...............................................................136

Copying Measures (Copy)........................................................136

Copying Rhythm Patterns to Create Rhythm Parts..............137

Correcting Timing Discrepancies (Quantize) ........................137

Deleting Measures (Delete) ......................................................138

Inserting Blank Measures (Insert)............................................138

Transposing Individual Parts (Transpose).............................139

Making Measures Blank (Erase) ..............................................139

Exchanging Parts (Part Exchange)...........................................140

Correcting Notes One by One (Note Edit) .............................140

Modifying the Tone Changes in a Song (PC Edit) ................141

Changing the Beat in the Middle of a Song (Beat Map).............141

Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs.....................................142

Changing the Tempo Within the Song.........................................142

Adjusting the Tempo While Listening to a Song ..................142

Adjusting the Tempo at a Particular Measure.......................143

Transposing Keyboard Sounds and Songs Played Back

(Transpose) .......................................................................................103

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance.....105

Recording a New Song (New Song) .............................................106

Recording With Accompaniment..................................................108

Recording Along with a Song........................................................110

Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons

(Redoing Recordings) .....................................................................111

Erasing Recorded Performances ...................................................112

Erasing the Performance on Specific Track s ..........................112

Changing How Recording Stops...................................................112

Recording Songs Starting with Pickup s .......................................113

Using Floppy Disks.........................................................................114

Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk......................................114

Formatting Floppy Disks (Format)..........................................114

Saving Songs ....................................................................................116

Deleting Saved Songs......................................................................119

Copying Songs on Floppy Disks to Favorites .............................120

Copying Songs Saved in Favorites to Floppy Disk s .............121

Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles ........................ 144

Chapter 6 User Program Registratio n .................122

Creating Original Styles (User Styles) ..........................................144

Creating New Styles by Combining Internal Music Styles

(Style Composer)........................................................................144

Saving Performance Settings (User Program).............................122

Calling Up Saved User Programs .................................................123

Changing the Way User Programs Are Called Up...............123

Saving the User Program Sets........................................................123

Loading Saved User Program Sets..........................................124

Deleting Saved User Program Sets ...............................................125

Creating a Style from a Song You Composed Yourself

(Style Converter) ........................................................................146

Saving a User Style..........................................................................149

Deleting Saved User Styles.......................................................150

Copying Styles on Floppy Disks to the User Memory...............151

Copying Sets of User Programs on Floppy Disks to

the User Memory.............................................................................125

Copying Styles Saved in the User Memory to

Floppy Disks...............................................................................151

Coping Sets of User Programs Stored in the User Memory

to Floppy Disks ..........................................................................126

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

Changing the CD Settings ..............................................................171

Chapter 9 Various Settings ..................................152

Synchronizing the Timing of the Piano and

Accompaniment.........................................................................171

Changing the Settings for One-Touch Pian o ...............................152

Procedure ....................................................................................152

Adjusting Resonance (Resonance) ..........................................152

Changing the Tuning (Tuning )................................................153

Setting the Type of CD To Be Played Back.............................171

Chapter 10 Connecting External Device s .......... 172

Changing How Rapidly Sounds Are Expressed According

to the Force Used to Play the Keys (Hammer Response).....154

Connecting MIDI Devices ..............................................................172

Connectors ..................................................................................172

Making the Connections ...........................................................173

Adjusting the Resonant Sounds (String Resonance) ............154

Adjusting the Keyboard Touch (Key Touch).........................155

Changing the Settings for One-Touch Arranger.........................155

Procedure ....................................................................................155

Changing the Keyboard’s Split Point (Split Point) ...............156

Performing in Ensemble with MIDI Instruments

(MIDI Ensemble)..............................................................................173

MIDI Settings ...................................................................................174

Selecting the Transmit Channel (Tx Channel).......................174

Changing Music Styles Without Changing the Tone or

Tempo (One Touch Setting) .....................................................156

Disconnecting the Internal Sound Generator and Keyboard

(Local Control)............................................................................174

Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads

(Pedal Setting/User Functions) ...............................................157

Sending Tone Change Messages (Program Change/

Bank Select MSB/Bank Select LSB ).........................................175

Changing the Bend Range (Pedal Setting) .............................159

Sending Recorded Performance Data to a MIDI Device

Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified

(Composer MIDI Out )...............................................................175

(Arranger Config) ......................................................................159

Connecting to Audio Equipment ..................................................176

Connectors ..................................................................................176

Making the Connections ...........................................................176

Changing the Aux Jack Settings (Aux Out) ...........................177

Setup Examples With Aux Set to “Surround”.......................177

Connecting a Computer..................................................................178

Connect to the MIDI Connector s .............................................178

Connect to the Computer Connector ......................................178

Connectors ..................................................................................178

Making the Connections ...........................................................178

Placing a Marker in the Middle of a Measure .......................160

Changing the Settings for the Count-In and Countdown .........160

Settings for the Count-In...........................................................160

Settings for the Countdown .....................................................161

Other Settings...................................................................................161

Procedure ....................................................................................161

Changing Standard Pitch (Master Tune)................................162

Changing the Language (Language).......................................162

Changing the Screen Message When the Power Is Turned

On (Opening Message) .............................................................162

Appendice s ........................................................... 180

Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the

External Display (External Display)........................................163

Troubleshooting ...............................................................................180

Error Messages .................................................................................183

Tone List............................................................................................184

Drum Set List ....................................................................................186

SFX Set List .......................................................................................190

Effects List .........................................................................................191

Music Style List (KR-17) .................................................................192

Music Style List (KR-15) .................................................................193

Chord List .........................................................................................194

Internal Song List.............................................................................196

Rhythm Pattern List ........................................................................199

Parameters Stored to Internal Memor y........................................200

Music Files That the KR Can Use..................................................201

The KR allows you to use the following music files.............201

About the KR Sound Generator...............................................201

MIDI Implementation Chart..........................................................202

Main Specifications..........................................................................203

Selecting Images To Be Shown on the KR and External

Displays (User Image Display) ................................................163

Turning Off the Beat Indicator (Beat Indicator) ....................164

Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is

Turned Off (Memory Backup) .................................................164

Restoring the Factory Settings (Factory Reset )......................165

Calibrating the Touch Screen (Touch Screen)........................165

Formatting the User Memory ........................................................165

Automatically Starting the Quick Tour........................................166

Disabling Functions Other Than Piano Performance

(Panel Lock)......................................................................................166

Changing the Functions of the Remote Control’s Button s ........167

Enabling the Moving Key...............................................................168

Changing the Moving Key Settings ........................................168

Changing the Part That Makes the Keys Move.....................168

Detailed Song Playback Settings ...................................................169

Changing the Tone Settings When Playing Back Songs

(Play Mode).................................................................................169

Index...................................................................... 205

Hiding the Lyrics (Lyrics).........................................................170

Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track Buttons During

SMF Playback (Track Assign) ..................................................170

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Before You Start Playing

3. ^{While holding up the top with one hand, lift up the top}

Opening and Closing the Top

(KR-17)

stick and insert its end into the appropriate top slip.

fig.

Opening only the front top

Children must not be permitted to open or close the top on their

own—adult supervision is required. Because the top is very heavy,

always use two or more people when opening and closing the top,

and be sure to handle it carefully.

1. ^{Lift the right front (the upper note side: A in the figure)}

of the board with both hands, fold it back, and then lay

it down slowly on the top.

fig.

Do not move the piano with the top in the open position. The top

stick may disengage from the socket, causing the top to fall.

When opening the top, be careful not to open it too far. Opening the

top at an angle in excess of 30 degrees may damage the unit, or cause

the top to drop. Also, before opening the top, make sure that no one

is in the path of the top as it is opened.

About the Topsticks and Topslip

The KR-17 has two topsticks, each a different length.

Opening both the front top and the top

You can use the different topsticks to change the amount the

top is left open.

fig.

2. ^{Follow Step 1 to open the front top. Then lift the right}

front (the upper note side B: in the figure) of the board

Long top stick

Short top stick

with both hands.

fig.

The topsticks and topslip work together as illustrated below.

The long top stick: for inner top slip (C)

The short top stick: for outer top slip (D)

If you use the wrong top slip, the top stick could slip out of the top

slip, causing the top to fall. Make sure that the end of the top stick is

inserted securely into the top slip.

To close the top, reverse the opening procedure.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Before You Start Playing

Opening and Closing the Top

(KR-15)

Do not move the piano with the top in the open position. The top

stick may disengage from the socket, causing the top to fall.

Raising the Music Stand

To close the top, reverse the opening procedure.

1. ^{Gently raise the music stand, then secure it in place.}

Raising the Music Stand

KR-17

fig.

2. ^{To collapse the stand, fold in the metal fittings while}

supporting the stand with both hands and gently fold

down the stand.

Always be sure to put the music stand in the upright position before

opening and raising the piano top. Be sure to leave the music stand

in the upright position before closing the piano top.

Open the Top board

Children must not be permitted to open or close the top on their

own—adult supervision is required.

1. ^{Open the front top.}

2. Hold the music stand with both hands, then raise it

forward.

3. ^{Lift the right front (the upper note side: A in the figure)}

of the board with both hands, fold it up.

fig.

3. ^{Place the music stand prop, at the rear of the music}

stand, into a slot.

KR-15

fig.

(1)

(2)

4. ^{While holding up the top with one hand, lift up the top}

1. ^{Gently raise the music stand, then secure it in place as}

stick and insert its end into the appropriate top slip.

shown in the figure.

fig.

2. ^{To collapse the stand, fold in the metal fittings while}

supporting the stand with both hands and gently fold

down the stand.

■ Using the Music Holders (KR-15)

You can use the holders to hold pages in place.

When not using the holders, leave them folded down.

fig.mu_stand4

When opening the top, be careful not to open it too far. Opening the

top at an angle in excess of 20 degrees may damage the unit, or cause

the top to drop. Also, before opening the top, make sure that no one

is in the path of the top as it is opened.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Before You Start Playing

Opening and Closing the Lid

Connecting the Power Cord

1. When opening the lid, use both hands to gently lift the

Screw

→

lid and slide it inward.

Screw

2. ^{When closing the lid, be sure to use both hands to}

grasp the lid, slowly pulling it down towards you, and

gently lower it until it stops (fully closed).

Cord Cramp

KR-17

When opening and closing the lid, be careful not to let your fingers

get caught. Small children should use it only under the supervision

of an adult.

When moving the piano, for safety’s sake be sure to close the lid first.

NOTE

Make sure you don’t have anything (such as sheet music) on the

keyboard when you close the lid.

1. ^{Connect the supplied power cord to the AC inlet jack.}

2. ^{Connect the pedal cord to the Pedal jack.}

KR-17

fig.

3. ^{Cramp the power cord and pedal cord with Cord}

Cramp

and screw ^bat A and B (see the picture

above).

4. ^{Cramp the power cord and pedal cord with Cord}

Cramp

and screw

at C, D and E (see the picture

above).

5. ^{Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.}

KR-15

Although the KR-17’s cover is designed to close slowly when you let

go of it, it will close immediately if it has been opened only slightly.

Take care not to catch or pinch your fingers in the cover.

1. ^{Connect the supplied power cord to the AC inlet jack.}

2. ^{Connect the pedal cord to the Pedal jack.}

KR-15

fig.

3. ^{Cramp the power cord and pedal cord with Cord}

Cramp

and screw ^bat A (see the picture above).

4. ^{Cramp the power cord and pedal cord with Cord}

Cramp

and screw

at B, C and D (see the picture

above).

5. ^{Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.}

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Before You Start Playing

Connect the Pedal Cable

About the Pedals

The pedals have the following functions, and are used

Insert the pedal cable into the Pedal connector on the

mainly for piano performance.

fig.00-08.e

rear panel of the KR.

fig.00-01

Soft Pedal

Damper Pedal

Sostenuto Pedal

Turning the Power On and Off

Damper pedal (right pedal)

While this pedal is pressed, notes will be sustained even after

you take your fingers off the keys.

NOTE

Turn on power to your various devices in the order specified. By

turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction

and/or damage to speakers and other devices.

On an acoustic piano, holding down the damper pedal will

allow the remaining strings to resonate in sympathy with the

sounds that you played from the keyboard, adding a rich

resonance.

To turn the power on, turn the [Volume] knob all the

way down, and then press the [Power] switch.

The KR simulates this sympathetic resonance.

The power will turn on, and the Power indicator at the

left front of the KR will light.

After a few seconds, you will be able to play the

keyboard to produce sound.

You can change the amount of resonance applied with the damper

pedal. Please refer to “Adjusting Resonance (Resonance)” (p. 152).

Use the [Volume] knob to adjust the volume.

Sostenuto pedal (center pedal)

NOTE

This pedal sustains only the sounds of the keys that were

already played when you pressed the pedal.

This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few

seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate

normally.

fig.00-06.e

Soft pedal (left pedal)

When you hold down this pedal and play the keyboard, the

sound will have a softer tone.

You can assign functions to the pedal. Refer to “Assigning Functions

to the Pedal and Performance Pads (Pedal Functions/User

Functions)” (p. 157).

Power

Power Indicator

To turn the power off, turn the [Volume] knob all the

way to the left, and press the [Power] switch.

The Power indicator at the left front of the KR will go

dark, and the power will be turned off.

If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the

POWER switch, then unplug the power cord from the power

outlet. Refer to “Power Supply” (p. 6).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Before You Start Playing

Adjusting the Sound’s

Volume and Brilliance

NOTE

Use Stereo headphones.

Some Notes on Using Headphones

• To prevent damage to the cord, handle the headphones

Turn the [Volume] knob to adjust the overall volume.

only by the headset or the plug.

Turn the [Brilliance] knob to adjust the brightness of

• Connecting the headphones when the volume of

connected equipment is turned up may result in damage

to the headphones. Lower the volume on the KR before

plugging in the headphones.

the sound.

fig.00-07.e

• Listening at excessively high volume levels will not only

damage the headphones, but may also cause hearing

loss. Use the headphones at a moderate volume level.

Min

Max

Mellow

Bright

The mark at the top of the Volume knob indicates the volume level

typically produced by an acoustic piano. This is usually the most

appropriate volume for your piano performances.

Connecting a Microphone

You can connect a microphone into the Mic In jack, and enjoy

Devices Equipped with CD Drives

karaoke with the KR.

If your device is equipped with a CD drive, you can use the

remote control to change the volume.

fig.00-10

Turning up the [Volume] knob will not increase the volume if

the remote control for the CD drive-equipped device is set to 0.

If the volume level for either unit is set to 0 (minimum), no

sounds will be played even when the volume setting on the

other unit is increased.

Connecting Headphones

The KR has two jacks for plugging in headphones. This

allows two people to listen through headphones

simultaneously, making it very useful for lessons and

performing piano pieces for four hands. Additionally, this

allows you to play without bothering others around you,

even at night.

1. ^{Connect a microphone (sold separately) to the Mic In}

jack on the lower-right area of the instrument.

2. ^{Rotate the [Mic Volume] knob in front of the Mic In}

jack to adjust the volume level for the microphone.

3. ^{Adjust the mic echo (p. 44).}

Plug the headphones into the Phones jack located at the

bottom left of the piano.

Some Notes on Using a Microphone

• Be careful of high volume levels when using mikes late

at night or early in the morning.

Connecting headphones will automatically mute the

sound from the internal speakers.

• When connecting a microphone to the KR, be sure to

lower the volume. If the volume control is too high when

the microphone is plugged in, noise may be produced by

the speakers.

The headphone volume is adjusted by the [Volume]

knob of the KR.

fig.00-04.e

• Howling could be produced depending on the location

of microphones relative to speakers. This can be

remedied by:

Changing the orientation of the microphone.

Relocating microphone at a greater distance from

speakers.

Lowering volume levels.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Before You Start Playing

■ Making the Connections

Connecting an External

Display

NOTE

To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices,

always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices

before making any connections.

You can connect a computer monitor or other such external

display to the instrument, and display scores and lyrics on

the larger screen, and display whatever images as you like.

For more about the external display settings, refer to

“Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the

External Display (External Display)” (p. 163). For more on

displaying images, refer to “Selecting Images To Be Shown

on the KR and External Displays (User Image Display)” (p.

163)

D-sub 15 pin

(Mini)

D-sub 15 pin

(Mini)

Display Cable

(Sold separately)

KR Bottom

Ext Display Connector

External Display

1. ^{Turn off the power to the KR and the display to be}

connected.

If your instrument came with a CD drive, you can use the remote

control to switch screens.

2. ^{Use display cable (sold separately) to connect the}

display to the Ext Display connector on the KR.

Displays That Can Be Connected to This Instrument

3. ^{Switch on the KR.}

In general, a great many of the VGA monitors and multiscan

monitors that are available on the market are compatible

with this instrument. However, before you connect any

monitor, make sure it meets the following specifications:

4. Switch on the connected display.

• Resolution

640 x 480 pixels

31.5 kHz

For more on handling the external display, refer to your display’s

owner’s manual.

• Horizontal scan frequency

• Vertical scan frequency

• Connector

60 Hz

3-row, 15-pin D-Sub type

Analog

Turning the Power Off

• Signal

After use, turn off the power using the following procedure.

NOTE

1. ^{Turn the volume all the way down on the KR.}

2. ^{Turn off the KR.}

Confirm that the display to be used is compatible with the

frequencies mentioned above. Using a display that is not compatible

with the above frequencies may result in incorrect image output

when images move, and in certain cases may even damage the

display.

3. ^{Turn off the connected display.}

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Before You Start Playing

About the Touch Screen

Main Screens

The KR makes use of a touch screen.

■ Piano Screen

This lets you carry out a wide variety of actions just by

touching the screen lightly.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the Piano screen

like the one below is displayed. For details, refer to p. 26.

NOTE

The touch screen is operated by touching it lightly with your finger.

Pressing hard, or using a hard object can damage the touch screen.

Be careful not to press too hard, and be sure to use only your fingers

to operate the touch screen.

NOTE

The positioning of the touch screen may become displaced due to

changes in the surrounding environment and over time. If this

happens, follow the steps in “Calibrating the Touch Screen (Touch

Screen)” (p. 165) to correct the pointer position.

■ Basic Screen

The following screen is called Basic screen.

NOTE

Song name or

Music Style name

Do not place items on the touch screen.

Tempo

Beat Measure

The Tone names are

selected appear.

■ Adjusting the Contrast of the

Screen

These information are

displayed, when you use the

automatic accompaniment.

To adjust the contrast of the screen, turn the Contrast

knob located at the right side of the screen.

You can usually display this screen by touching <Exit>

several times.

Follow either of the procedures described below to display it.

• Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.

The Basic screen appears and the settings are made for

automatic accompaniment.

• Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button, then press

one of the Tone buttons, then touch <Exit>.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Before You Start Playing

■ Using the Main Icons

You can many other screens besides the Basic screen to do

things. The on-screen graphics that appear three dimensional

work like buttons. These are called “Icons.”

The main icons you can use on these screens are as follows.

Some screens consist on two or more pages.

You can display the next page or the

previous page of the screen by touching

these icons.

Touch this to cancel the currently editing

setting or exit the screen that is currently

displayed. You can usually display the

Basic screen by touching <Exit> several

times.

When you select an internal song or music

files that includes the lyrics data, this icon

appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen.

Touch this to display the lyrics.

NOTE

The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict

what should typically be shown by the display. Note, however, that

your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system

(e.g., includes newer sounds), so what you actually see in the display

may not always match what appears in the manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano

(One-Touch Piano)

You can create the optimal settings for a piano performance with the press of a single

button.

fig.panel1-1

Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.

A “Piano screen” like the one shown below will appear.

fig.d-piano.eps_60

Since this instrument faithfully

reproduces real acoustic piano

action and response, keys

played in the top one-and-one-

half-octave range continue to

resonate, regardless of the

damper pedal action, and the

tone in this range is audibly

different. The Key Transpose

setting (p. 103) can also be

used to change the range that

is unaffected by the damper

pedal.

When you press the One Touch Program [Piano] button, the KR will switch to the

following settings, regardless of the current panel settings.

• If the keyboard has been split into upper and lower sections (p. 31), the

keyboard returns to a single section.

You can change the piano

performance settings by

touching <Functions> on the

screen. For more information,

take a look at “Changing the

Settings for One-Touch Piano”

(p. 152).

• The pedals return to their usual functions (p. 21).

• The Grand Piano sound is automatically selected.

• The effect is automatically set to “Sympathetic Resonance” (p. 42).

Changing the Piano Sound

Touch the piano lid on the screen, and listen to the tone change as you slide your

finger or touch

to open and close the lid.

This simulates the actual changes in sound that occur when the lid of a grand piano

is set at different heights.

When you select an internal

song or music file that includes

the lyrics data, <

appears in the Piano screen or

Basic screen. Touch this to

display the lyrics.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

Performing with a Variety of Tones

(Tone Buttons)

The KR comes with a many built-in instrument sounds and effects. This lets you

For more about the names of

Tones, take a look at the “Tone

List” (p. 184).

enjoy perform in a wide range of musical styles.

The built-in sounds are called “Tones.” The sounds are organized into six tone

groups, which are assigned to the [Tone] buttons.

fig.panel1-2

Press any one of the Tone buttons to select a tone group.

You’ll see that button’s indicator light up.

The screen displays the tone names included in the tone group you’ve selected.

fig.d-tonesel.eps_60

This screen is called the “Tone selection screen.”

You can touch <Audition> for an audio demonstration of a particular tone.

Touch

to switch the screen and display the next selection.

You can touch <Effects> to add effect sounds to a variety of tones (p. 42).

You can touch <Search> to find tones according to the search criteria you specify

(p. 29).

Touch a tone name to select the tone.

You’ll hear the tone you’ve selected when you play the keyboard.

You can use the [-] [+] buttons and the dial to automatically switch pages and select

tones.

Touch <Exit>.

This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

■ Playing Percussion Instruments or Sound Effects

You can use the keyboard to play percussion sounds or effects like sirens and animal

sounds.

fig.panel1-2

Press the [Select Various Tones] button and watch the indicator light up.

Touch <Drums> or <SFX>.

fig.d-drum.eps_60

The combination of sounds

assigned to the keyboard

varies according to the drum

set. Take a look at the “Drum

Set List” (p. 186) and “SFX Set

List” (p. 190).

Each note of the keyboard will play a different sound.

You can also have play sounds by touching the screen.

Touch <Exit> several times.

This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

■ Using Keywords to Search for Tones (Tone Search)

You can search for tones that match the conditions you set for instrument or musical

style. You can also search the tones using the first character of the tone name.

Press any Tone button.

The tone selection screen appears.

Touch <Search>.

The following “Tone search screen” appears.

fig.d-tonesrch1.eps_60

Condition Search screen

Name Search screen

Touch here to switch these screens.

Searching by Conditions

Touch <Category> or <Genre>, then use the [-] [+] buttons and the dial to

select the search conditions.

In condition search, tones

satisfying all of the selected

search criteria are sought.

Touch <Search>.

The search results appear in the display.

Touch the tone name to select the tone.

Touch <Exit> to return to the tone search screen.

Searching by Tone Name

Touch <By Name>.

Touch <By Key> to go to the condition search screen.

Decide which character is to be used for the search.

The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.

Enter the character you’re searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in succession

cycles you through the available choices in that character group (“A”→”B”→”C”...).

Touching <A-0> selects the type of character. Each time you touch <A-0>, the

character switches between alphabets and numerals.

Touch <Search>.

The search results appear in the display.

Touch the tone name to select the Tone.

Touch <Exit> several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

Performing with Two Sounds Layered

Together (Layer)

Two tones sounding together when you press a single key is referred to as a “layer

performance.”

For instance, it’s possible to play the Tones for both Piano and Strings simultaneously.

fig.layer.e

Grand Piano 1

Strings

Touch <Layer> at the bottom of the Basic screen.

fig.d-layer.eps_60

When you select an internal

song or music file that includes

the lyrics data, <

appears in the Basic screen.

Touch this to display the lyrics.

The tone that was sounding before you switched to layer performance, plus the tone

indicated in the lower part of the display, are now played together.

When you touch Octave

<-><+> on the tone selection

screen, the pitch of the

Here, the tone appearing in the upper part of the display is called the “right-hand

tone,” and the tone appearing in the lower part of the display is called the “layer

tone.”

keyboard’s sound is changed

in octave units. To learn more,

see “Shifting the Keyboard

Pitch in Octave Steps (Octave

Shift)” (p. 32).

Changing the tones

Touch the name of the tone to be changed.

The tone name will be highlighted in orange.

Press a Tone button to select the new tone (p. 27).

When you have selected the tone, touch <Exit>.

You can vary the volume-level

balance of the two tones. For

instructions, see “Adjusting

the Volume Balance for Each

Performance Part (Part

The display returns to the Basic screen.

Cancelling the Layer

Touch <Layer>.

Balance)” (p. 75).

The <Layer> icon returns to the original color, and the layer performance is

cancelled.

Now when you play the keys, only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

Playing Different Tones with the Left

and Right Hands (Split)

Dividing the keyboard into right-hand and left-hand areas, then playing different

sounds in each section is called “split performance.” The boundary key is called the

“split point.”

The split point key is included in the left-hand keyboard area. Each time power to

the keyboard is turned on, the split point is reset to “F#3.”

fig.split.e

Split Point

You can change the split point;

refer to “Changing the

Keyboard’s Split Point (Split

Point)” (p. 156).

Acoustic Bass

Grand Piano 1

At the Basic screen, touch <Split>.

fig.d-split.eps_60

When you select an internal

song or music file that includes

the lyrics data, <

appears in the Basic screen.

Touch this to display the lyrics.

The tone sounding prior to the split performance is played in the right-hand section

of the keyboard, and the tone indicated at the left of the screen is played in the left-

hand section of the keyboard.

Here, the tone appearing at the right part of the display is called the “right-hand

tone,” and the tone appearing at the left part of the display is called the “left-hand

tone.”

When you touch Octave

<-><+> in the tone selection

screen, the pitch of the

Changing the Tones

keyboard’s sound is changed

in octave units. To learn more,

see “Shifting the Keyboard

Pitch in Octave Steps (Octave

Shift)” (p. 32).

Touch the name of the tone to be changed.

The tone name will be highlighted in orange.

Press a Tone button to select the tone (p. 27).

When you have selected the tone, touch <Exit>.

The display returns to the Basic screen.

You can change the volume

balance between the left- and

right-hand parts of the

Cancelling the Split

keyboard; refer to “Adjusting

the Volume Balance for Each

Performance Part (Part

Touch <Split>.

The <Split> icon returns to the original color, and the split performance is cancelled.

When you play the keys, only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded.

Balance)” (p. 75).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

Turning On Layer and Split Performance Simultaneously

Turning on both layer performance and split performance allows you to split the

When the keyboard has been

divided into upper and lower

sections, the damper pedal is

applied to only the upper

section. If you want to add

lingering reverberations to the

notes of the lower section, see

“Assigning Functions to

keyboard into two sections while playing two layered Tones in the right-hand part.

fig.d-layersplit.eps_60

Pedals and Performance Pads

(Pedal Setting/User

Functions)” (p. 157).

■ Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps

(Octave Shift)

When using layer performance (p. 30) or split performance (p. 31), you can change

the pitch of the keyboard’s sound in octave units. This function is called “Octave

Shift.”

You cannot use Octave Shift

when using a single tone for

the entire keyboard or in the

right-hand Tone during layer

performances.

For example, when using a layer performance, you can change the pitch of each

sound and layer the sounds. You can make the pitch of the keyboard’s left-hand part

match the pitch of the right-hand part during split performance.

On the Basic screen, touch <Layer> or <Split>.

The KR switches to layer performance or split performance.

To apply Octave Shift, touch the name of the tone you’ve selected.

Press the Tone button to display the Tone selection screen.

fig.d-octshift.eps_60

Touch Octave <-> or <+> in the lower part of the screen to adjust the

pitch of the sound.

Each time you touch <+>, the pitch is raised one octave.

Each time you touch <->, the pitch is lowered one octave.

The sound can be changed from two octaves lower than the original sound (-2) to

two octaves above the original (+2).

Touch <Exit> to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

Adding Reverberation to the Sound (Reverb)

Apply a reverb effect to the notes you play with the KR.

Reverb makes it sound as if you are playing in a concert hall.

fig.panel1-3

Press the [Reverb] button and watch the its indicator light up.

A “Reverb screen” like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-reverb.eps_60

Connecting an external

speaker to the Aux jack

provides an effect in which the

listener seems to be enveloped

by sound (p. 35).

Touch an icon to select the performance space.

;

Display

Ground

Explanation

Wide open space with no reverberations.

Small room

Room

Lounge

Studio

Larger room

A recording studio

Gymnasium

Hall

In a gymnasium

Large concert hall reverberation

A domed ballpark

Dome

Cave

Adds the extended reverberations found inside a cave

GS Room 1

GS Room 2

GS Room 3

GS Hall 1

GS Hall 2

Reproduces an indoor-type reverb.

Provides a clear, expansive reverberation.

Reproduces the reverberation found in a hall. Gives

reverberation with a greater sense of depth than GS Room.

Reproduces a plate echo (reverberation created using the

vibrations of a metal plate).

GS Plate

GS Delay

A delayed sound that is added to the original, similar to the

reflected sounds of mountain echoes.

GS Pan Delay The reflected sounds are panned (shifted) laterally.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

Touch the slider beneath the icons to adjust the effect selected.

No effect is applied when the

slider is moved all the way to

the left. In this case, the

button’s indicator won’t light

up when you press the

Touch and slide the knob on the screen to the right for a deeper reverb, and to the

left for less.

You can also move the slider with the [-] [+] buttons and the dial.

Pressing the [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the slider to the initial value.

When you touch <Exit>, the reverb effect is activated, and you return to the previous

screen.

[Reverb] button.

Cancelling the Effect

Press the [Reverb] button, and watch the indicator light go out.

The reverb effect is eliminated.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

Adding a Surround Sound to the

NOTE

Accompaniment and Reverb (Surround)

You cannot use both

“Surround Reverb” and

“Advanced 3D”

You can connect an amp or external speaker to the Aux jack and play

accompaniment and reverb sounds through it. By using an external speaker this

way, it will seem that you are surrounded by the accompaniment or reverb. This is

simultaneously with

“Surround Accomp.”

called the “surround effect.”

fig.panel1-4

■ Giving More Breadth to the Accompaniment Sound

When using the Surround

function, sounds are output

from the external speaker even

when headphones are

connected.

Connect amp or external speaker to the Aux jack.

Press the [Surround] button and watch the indicator light up.

Touch <Surround Accomp>.

When using headphones,

touch <Advanced 3D> to have

the Advanced 3D effect

applied.

The “Surround Accomp Screen” appears.

Touch

to switch the screen.

NOTE

You cannot use the Surround

function when Aux Out is set

to “Concert Mode” (p. 177).

OFF

For more on the speaker

settings when the Surround

function is used, refer to

“Setup Examples With Aux Set

to Surround” (p. 177).

Touch a part’s icon to switch the surround on and off.

The sounds of parts set to ON are played from the external speaker and the KR’s

internal speaker. Parts set to OFF are played only from the KR’s speaker.

When you touch <Exit>, the Surround effect is activated, and you return to the

previous screen.

Cancelling the Effect

Press the [Surround] button and watch the light go out.

You can adjust the volume of

the external and built-in

speakers (p. 37).

The Surround effect is eliminated, and the effect is no longer applied to any of the

parts.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

■ Changing the Amount of Surround Accomp

You can use the Memory

Backup function to store these

settings to the KR (p. 164).

Press the [Surround] button and watch the indicator light up.

Touch <Surround Accomp> to display the Surround Accomp screen.

Touch <Options>.

Touch the “External” and “Internal” sliders to adjust the volume levels

of the external speaker and the KR’s speaker.

The Surround Accomp (Accompaniment) volume is adjusted.

When you touch <Exit>, you return to the Surround screen.

❍ Selecting the tone to which the effect is applied

With “Keyboard” in Surround set to On, you can select the parts to which the

surround effect is to be applied.

Press the [Surround] button and watch the indicator light up.

Touch <Surround Accomp> to display the Surround Accomp screen.

On the Surround Accomp Screen, touch <Option>.

Touch

to switch the screen.

fig.d-adv3dopt.eps_60

Touch <All Parts> or <Layer Part>.

Display

Explanation

The effect is applied to all tones played with the keyboard (the left-

hand tone, right-hand tone, and layer tone).

All Parts

The effect is applied only to the layer part.

When not using a layer performance (p. 30), the Surround effect is not

applied to the keyboard performance, even if <Keyboard> on the

Surround Accomp Screen is set to On.

Layer Part

When you touch <Exit>, you return to the Surround Accomp Screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

■ Broadening the Reverb Sound

NOTE

You cannot use both

“Surround Accomp” and

“Advanced 3D”

Connect amp or external speaker to the Aux jack.

Press the [Surround] button and watch the indicator light up (p. 35).

simultaneously with

“Surround Reverb.” When

“Surround Accomp” is on, the

reverb sound is broadened as

well.

Touch <Surround Reverb>.

The following “Surround Reverb screen” appears.

The reverb sounds from the external speaker and the KR’s internal speaker.

When you touch <Exit>, the Surround effect is activated, and you return to the

previous screen.

Cancelling the Effect

Press the [Surround] button and watch the light go out.

The Surround effect is eliminated, and the effect is no longer applied to any of the

parts.

■ Changing the Amount of Surround Reverb

You can use the Memory

Backup function to store these

settings to the KR (p. 164).

Press the [Surround] button and watch the indicator light up.

Touch <Surround Reverb> to display the Surround Reverb screen.

Touch <Options>.

Touch the “External” and “Internal” sliders to adjust the volume levels

of the external speaker and the KR’s speaker.

The Surround Reverb volume is adjusted.

When you touch <Exit>, you return to the Surround screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

Adding Three-Dimensional Breadth to

the Sounds You Play (Advanced 3D)

NOTE

You cannot use both

“Surround Accomp” and

“Surround Reverb”

simultaneously with

“Advanced 3D.”

You can add three-dimensional breadth to the sounds you play with automatic

accompaniment (p. 58), or to internal songs or music files. With this effect, called

“Advanced 3D,” you seem to be surrounded by the sound of the performance.

fig.panel1-4

Press the [Surround] button and watch the indicator light up.

Touch <Advanced 3D>.

The following “Advanced 3D screen” appears.

fig.d-adv3d.eps_60

OFF

Touch the icon to switch the effect on or off for each individual part.

If all of the parts are switched

off, the [Surround] button’s

indicator won’t light up when

you press the button.

Three-dimensional breadth is added to the performance part you’ve selected.

When you touch <Exit>, the Advanced 3D effect is activated, and you return to the

previous screen.

Cancelling the Effect

Press the [Surround] button and watch the indicator goes out.

The Advanced 3D effect is eliminated, and the effect is no longer applied to any of

the parts.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

❍ Selecting the tone to which the effect is applied

With “Keyboard” in Advanced 3D set to On, you can select the parts to which the 3D

effect is to be applied when the keyboard is played.

Press the [Surround] button and watch the indicator light up.

Touch <Advanced 3D>.

On the Advanced 3D screen, touch <Option>.

fig.d-adv3dopt.eps_60

Touch <All Parts> or <Layer Part>.

Display

Explanation

The effect is applied to all tones played with the keyboard (the left-

hand tone, right-hand tone, and layer tone).

All Parts

The effect is applied only to the layer part.

When not using a layer performance (p. 30), the Advanced 3D effect

is not applied to the keyboard performance, even if <Keyboard> on

the Advance 3D screen is set to On.

Layer Part

When you touch <Exit>, you return to the Advanced 3D screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

Adjusting the Sound to Achieve the

Preferred Tone Quality (Equalizer)

NOTE

Raising the overall volume

with the Master Level slider

and the [Volume] knob when

the frequency sliders are

The KR features a built-in, five-band digital equalizer.

An equalizer boosts or cuts specific sound pitches (frequency ranges) to adjust the

sound balance for the overall performance. For example, you can boost the highs to

get a crisper sound, or boost the low end for a more powerful sound.

already at high levels not only

may distort the sound and

cause ear pain, it can also place

unreasonable strain on the

built-in speakers and internal

circuitry. Use the KR at a

moderate volume level.

You can also adjust the sound to compensate for the acoustical characteristics of the

performance space.

If raising the slider for each frequency ends up distorting the sound, you can correct

the distortion with the Master Level slider.

Press the [Equalizer] button.

The “Equalizer screen” appears.

fig.d-eq.eps_60

When <Flat> is selected (when

all sliders are at “0”), then even

when [Equalizer] is pressed,

the indicator does not light up.

Touch the Type icon to make your selection.

Display

Piano

Power

Mild

Explanation

The optimal settings for piano performance are selected.

Boosts both the low- and high-frequency ranges.

Lows and highs are restrained for a pleasant-sounding tone.

This setting slightly boosts the midrange for a simple pop feeling.

This setting boosts the high frequencies for a brilliant, sparkling sound.

All slider values are set to “0.”

Clear

Bright

Flat

User

Store your own preferred settings (p. 41).

Touch the slider to make adjustment.

Settings

Displayed

Explanation

Value

Low-frequency range. This is the range of

frequencies for instruments like drums, bass,

organ, guitar and strings.

Low

–

-60–0–+60

Mid-low-frequency range. This is the range of

frequencies for lower brass and woodwind

instruments.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

Settings

Value

Displayed

Mid

Explanation

Midrange. This is the range of frequencies where

most instrument sounds are concentrated.

-60–0–+60

Mid-high-frequency range. The ear is most

sensitive to this frequency range.

–

High-frequency range. These frequencies add

brilliance to the sound.

High

You can temper the distortion in the sound by

lowering the level. Raising the level too much may

cause the sound to become distorted.

Master Level

-60–0–+60

You can also move the slider with the [-] [+] buttons and the dial.

Pressing the [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the slider to “0.”

When you touch <Exit>, the equalization is placed in effect, and you return to the

previous screen.

Cancelling the effect

Press the [Equalizer] button and watch the indicator light go out.

The equalizer effect is cancelled.

❍ Storing the settings

You can store adjusted equalizer settings to <User>.

Even after editing the settings, you can touch <User> to call up your preferred

settings.

Press the [Equalizer] button and watch the indicator light up.

The Equalizer screen appears.

Adjust the equalizer.

Touch <Write>.

The settings are stored.

Even after editing the settings, you can touch <User> to select the stored settings.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

Applying Effects to the Sound (Effects)

You can apply a wide range of different effects to the notes you play on the

For more on the effect types,

refer to the “Effects List” (p.

191).

keyboard.

First, press the Tone button to select a Tone (p. 27).

The “Tone selection screen” appears.

Then, touch <Effects>.

The “Effect screen” appears.

NOTE

fig.d-effects.eps_60

Selecting a different effect for

the left-hand Tone than the

one applied to the right-hand

Tone and Layer Tone may not

result in the effect you want.

Select the same effect as that

used for the right-hand Tone.

Applying effects to the sound

NOTE

When you select an effect type

that starts with “GS,” that type

of effect is also applied for the

chorus effect for the song or

Music Style (p. 58) selected at

that time.

Touch <ON>.

The effect selected with <Type> will be applied.

Setting the Effect

Touch <Type>

to select the type of effect.

Touch <Depth>

to adjust the amount of effect applied.

The amount increases as the value is raised.

You can also move the slider with the [-] [+] buttons and the dial.

Pressing the [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the slider to the initial value.

Touch <Exit> to return to the Tone selection screen.

Cancelling the Effect

On the Effects screen, touch <Off>.

All [Voice] button tones with a

“GS” or “ ” logo appearing

after the tone name have the

same effect applied to them. If

the effect for one of the tones

About the Effect Settings

When the effects is set to ON, the appropriate effect is applied for the currently

selected sound. You can also apply different effect types to each tone (except GS

with the “GS” or “ ” logo is

changed, then the effects for

the other tones with the “GS”

tones and tones with the “ ” logo). Although turning off the power returns effects

to their initial settings, carrying out Memory Backup (p. 165) allows you to save and

store the settings even after the power is turned off.

or “ ” logo are also changed

automatically.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

Adding Effects to Mic Vocals

(Vocal Effect)

For details on connecting a

microphone, refer to

“Connecting a Microphone”

(p. 22).

With a microphone connected, you can add effects to the microphone vocals.

Adding effects to the vocals is referred to as “Vocal Effect.”

❍ How to select Vocal Effect

fig.panel1-5

Press the [Vocal Effect] button.

The “Vocal Effects screen” appears.

Models Featuring Moving Key

Models Without Moving Key

fig.d-vocalsfx.eps_60

Touch any one of the icons.

Icon

Explanation

Page

Echo

Adjusts the microphone echo.

Alters the microphone vocals.

Adds harmonies to the original voice.

p. 44

p. 45

p. 47

Transformer

Harmonist

Allows you to start songs and Automatic

Accompaniment using your own tempo.

Vocal Count In

Vocal Keyboard

Music Files

p. 48

p. 49

Allows you to produce sounds conforming to the

vocal scale.

You can play a specific part as harmony while

playing back a song.

When you touch <Exit>, the effect is applied and you return to the

previous screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

Cancelling the Vocal Effect

Press the [Vocal Effect] button and watch the indicator light go out.

The Vocal Effect function is cancelled.

❍ Adjusting the Echo (Echo)

Touch <Echo> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 43).

fig.d-vo-echo.eps_60

Touch the bar graph to adjust the amount of echo applied to the vocal.

Touch the Echo Type <1> or <2> to change the echo type.

Displayed

Explanation

Adds basic reverberations.

Adds reverberations for a karaoke-type echo.

Touch <Exit> to return to the Vocal Effects screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

❍ Altering Vocals (Transformer)

When you use the Voice

Transformer function, the

resonance setting for the piano

(see p. 152) may sometimes be

reset.

You can modify the way your voice sounds through the microphone. This is called

the “Voice Transformer” function.

Touch <Transformer> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 43).

fig.d-vo-trans.eps_60

Touch any one of the icons.

Here’s what the different icons do.

Display

Kids

Explanation

Transforms the input into the sound of a child’s voice.

Transforms the input sound into the voice of a large animal.

Transforms the input into the sound of a robot’s voice.

Transforms the input into a duck’s quacking sound.

Transforms the input into an alien voice.

Bear

Robot

Duck

Alien

Computer

Female

Male

Transforms the input into a voice like that from a computer.

Transforms male voices into female voices.

Transforms female voices into male voices.

Sing through the microphone.

Your voice is transformed according to the item you selected.

Cancelling the Effect

Once again, touch the icon you selected in Step 2.

The Voice Transformer effect is eliminated.

Touch <Exit> to return to the Vocal Effects screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

❍ Adding Harmonies (Harmonist)—Models Equipped With Moving Key

When you use the Harmonist

function, the resonance setting

for the piano (see p. 152) may

sometimes be reset. And the

effects applied to the keyboard

(p. 42) may be canceled.

You can sing with a harmony accompaniment, even when you’re playing solo. This

is called the “Harmonist” function.

Touch <Harmonist> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 43).

Touch

to switch the screen.

fig.d-vo-harmo.eps_60

Touch any one of the icons.

Here’s what the different icons do.

NOTE

Display

Explanation

With some Harmonist types,

you may not be able to play

harmony with some of the

vocals on the enclosed CD.

The melody played on the keyboard is played as the harmony.

The harmony is added to your voice regardless of the pitch.

My Voice

Duo1

Duo2

The added harmony matches the chords specified on the

keyboard. Adding harmony to a single voice gives the effect of

two people singing together.

The melody played on the keyboard is played as the harmony.

The harmony added is matched to the pitch; for example, higher

pitches are used for female voices, lower pitches for male voices.

Variety

Trio

The added harmony matches the chords specified on the

keyboard. This adds a two-voice harmony that makes it seem that

a trio is singing.

The added harmony matches the chords specified on the

keyboard.

You can change the way harmonies are added with the Melody

Intelligence type (p. 72).

Chord

Unison

Oct-Up

Sounds like two people singing the same melody.

Adds another voice one octave higher than the original.

Adds another voice one octave lower than the original.

Adds harmony a fifth above the original.

Oct-Down

5th Up

3rd Up

Adds harmony a third above the original.

4th Down

Adds harmony a major fourth below the original.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

Cancelling the Effect

Touch the Harmonist type you selected in Step 2 again.

When you use the Harmonist

function, the resonance setting

for the piano (see p. 152) may

sometimes be reset, and the

effects applied to the keyboard

(p. 42) may be canceled.

The Harmonist function is cancelled.

Touch <Exit> to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.

❍ Adding Harmonies (Harmonist)—Models Without Moving Key

You can sing with a harmony accompaniment even when you’re playing solo. This

is called the “Harmonist” function.

Touch <Harmonist> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 43).

fig.d-vo-harmo.eps_60

Touch any one of the icons.

Here’s what the different icons do.

Display

Duet

Explanation

Sounds like two people singing the same melody.

Adds another voice one octave higher than the original.

Adds another voice one octave lower than the original.

The melody being played on the keyboard becomes the harmony.

Adds harmony a fifth above the original.

Oct-Up

Oct-Down

Keyboard

5th Up

3rd Up

Adds harmony a third above the original.

4th Down

Adds harmony a major fourth below the original.

Adds harmonies matching the chords designated with the keys.

You can change the way harmonies are added with the Melody

Intelligence type (p. 72).

Chords

Cancelling the Effect

Touch the Harmonist type you selected in Step 2 again.

The Harmonist function is cancelled.

Touch <Exit> to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

❍ Enabling the start of songs and automatic accompaniment with the

sound of your voice (Vocal Count-In)

You can start songs and the Automatic Accompaniment by counting into the

microphone.

Touch <Vocal Count In> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 43).

fig.d-vo-coin.eps_60

Touch <Arranger> or <Song>.

Display

Arranger

Song

Explanation

Automatic Accompaniment starts at the tempo used for the count.

The song starts at the tempo used for the count.

Count to four (“One, two, three, four”) into the mic.

Count out the number of beats per measure in the time signature of the selected song

or Music Style.

For example, if you select a time signature of 4/4, then count to four; count to three

when 3/4 time is selected.

The tempo is automatically set according to the interval between the counts as you

speak into the microphone, and the song or Arranger begins.

Touch <Exit> to return to the Vocal Effects screen.

❍ Playing instrument sounds at vocal pitches (Vocal Keyboard)

You can have melodies sung into the microphone played with the KR’s internal

Tones.

Touch <Vocal Keyboard> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 43).

fig.d-vo-key.eps_60

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

If the <OFF> icon is selected, touch the <ON> icon.

Touch any of the icons to select a Tone.

When you play the keys while

using Vocal Keyboard, the

tone selected for Vocal

You can also select the Tone by pressing the Tone button.

Keyboard is played.

When you sing into the microphone, the sung pitches are played using the selected

Tone.

Cancelling the effect

Touch <OFF>.

The Vocal Keyboard function is cancelled.

Touch <Exit> to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.

❍ Adding harmonies to a specified part (Music Files)

—Models Equipped With Moving Key

When you sing while playing back a specified part from song data, harmony is

added based on pitches of the specified part.

The harmony data on Part 5 is

contained on the included CD.

Select the song to which you want to add harmony.

If selecting a song on a floppy disk, insert the floppy disk in the disk drive. For more

on how to select songs, refer to “Playing a Song” (p. 77).

Touch <Music Files> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 43).

fig.d-vo-music.eps_60

Touch the icon for the part to which you want to add harmony.

When you sing into the microphone, harmony is added using the pitches of the

specified part.

Touch <Variety>.

When <Variety> is ON, the melody played on the keyboard is played as the

harmony. The harmony added is matched to the pitch.

Cancelling the effect

Touch the icon you selected in Step 3 again.

The Music Files function is cancelled.

Touch <Exit> to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

❍ Adding harmonies to a specified part (Music Files)

—Models Without Moving Key

When you sing while playing back a specified part from song data, harmony is

added based on pitches of the specified part.

Select the song to which you want to add harmony.

If selecting a song on a floppy disk, insert the floppy disk in the disk drive. For more

on how to select songs, refer to “Playing a Song” (p. 77).

Touch <Music Files> in Step 2 of “How to select Vocal Effect” (p. 43).

fig.d-vo-music.eps_60

Touch the icon for the part to which you want to add harmony.

When you sing into the microphone, harmony is added using the pitches of the

specified part.

Cancelling the effect

Touch the icon you selected in Step 3 again.

The Music Files function is cancelled.

Touch <Exit> to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

■ Enjoying Karaoke Performances with Music Files

Commercial music files

designed for “karaoke” sing-

along are also available.

Consult your KR dealer when

purchasing music files. Refer

to “Music Files That the KR

Can Use” (p. 201).

Connect a microphone.

Adjust the volume level and the amount of echo applied.

On the KR, use the Vocal Effect function to adjust the echo (p. 44).

You can also enjoy this effect with the Voice Transformer function (p. 45) and

Harmonist function (p. 46, 47).

Select a song.

If selecting a song on a floppy disk, insert the floppy disk in the disk drive. For

instructions on how to select songs, refer to “Playing a Song” (p. 77).

On the KR, lyrics can also be

shown on an external display.

Refer to “Connecting an

External Display” (p. 23) and

“Selecting Images To Be

Shown on the KR and External

Displays (User Image

Adjust the tempo as required with the Tempo [-] [+] buttons.

If necessary, change the key of the song (p. 103).

When you press the [

(Play/Stop)] button, the accompaniment starts playing.

Sing along with the accompaniment.

Display)” (p. 163).

When you play back a Music File with lyrics, the lyrics appear on screen.

You can stop lyrics from being

displayed. Refer to “Hiding

the Lyrics (Lyrics)” (p. 170).

Press the [

(Play/Stop)] button to stop the accompaniment.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

Using the Metronome and Rhythm

(Rhythm Partner)

During playback of a song, or

when performing with

automatic accompaniment, the

sound of the metronome keeps

time with the beat of the song

or accompaniment.

The KR features a built-in metronome. Additionally, you can have Rhythm patterns

play, in the same manner as the metronome, just by pressing the [Rhythm] button.

The combination of the internal metronome and rhythm functions is called “Rhythm

Partner.”

fig.panel1-6

■ Using the Metronome

Press the [Metronome] button and watch the indicator light up.

It is not possible to use the

metronome and rhythm (p. 56)

simultaneously.

You will hear the metronome.

The following “Metronome screen” appears.

fig.d-metro.eps_60

You can touch <Exit> to have the metronome continue to play while you return to

the previous screen.

Stopping the metronome

Press the [Metronome] button once more, and the indicator light goes

out.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

■ Changing the Metronome Settings

❍ Adjusting the tempo

You can adjust the tempo of the metronome. The tempo of the metronome changes

automatically if you use an Automatic Accompaniment or play back a song.

Press the Tempo [-] or [+] buttons to adjust a tempo.

You can also use the dial to

adjust the tempo. Turn it

clockwise for a faster tempo, or

counterclockwise for a slower

tempo.

You can adjust the metronome tempo over a range of

= 20–250.

The metronome is automatically set to =108 when the power is turned on.

Pressing the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected song

accompaniment to the basic tempo.

❍ Determining the tempo with tempo marks

You can set the tempo by choosing a tempo indicator, such as “Allegro,” indicated

on the score.

On the Metronome screen, touch the tempo indicator bar graph.

The tempo is set to match the tempo mark.

fig.d-metro.eps_60

❍ Changing the beat of the metronome

On the Metronome screen, touch <Beat>.

The available choices for the beat appear at the bottom of the screen.

Choose the beat from among the selections by touching your choice.

You can scroll the display to one side or the other and show other choices for the beat

When

is selected,

by touching

only the upbeat will sound.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

❍ Changing the volume

The volume of the metronome can be adjusted to ten different levels.

On the Metronome screen, touch <Volume>.

The available choices for the volume level appear at the bottom of the screen.

Touch the volume icon you’ve selected.

When you touch

, the selection moves to the side, allowing you to access

other volume levels.

Choosing

sets the volume to the lowest level, and choosing

sets

it to the highest level.

Choose

to silence the metronome sound.

❍ Changing the Type of Sound

You can change the sound the metronome makes.

The setting is at “normal metronome sound” when the KR is powered up.

On the Metronome screen, touch <Sound>.

The available choices for the type of sound appear at the bottom of the screen.

Touch one of the items in the group to select a metronome sound.

Displayed

Explanation

Displayed

Explanation

Normal metronome

sound

Electronic metronome

sound

“1, 2, 3” in Japanese

Dog and cat sounds

Triangle and castanet

“1, 2, 3” in English

Wood block

Hand clap

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

❍ Changing the Animation

A metronome that moves along with the tempo is usually displayed at the center of

the Metronome screen. You can change that picture to an animated bouncing ball, or

other animation.

On the Metronome screen, touch the <Type>.

The animation type will change.

Each time you touch the icon, the animation switches between “Metronome,” “Dr.

KR,” and “Bouncing Ball.”

❍ Changing how the metronome beat (pattern) sounds

You can set the Metronome to play at even smaller intervals.

On the Metronome screen, touch <Pattern>.

The available choices for the metronome pattern appear at the bottom of the screen.

Choose a pattern by touching your choice.

You can scroll the display to one side or the other and show other pattern choices by

touching

Displayed

Explanation

Displayed

Explanation

Usual sound

Dotted half-note intervals

Dotted quarter-note

intervals

Half-note intervals

Quarter-note intervals

Eighth-note intervals

Single back beat added

Shuffle rhythm added

Dotted eighth-note

intervals

Sixteenth-note intervals

Triplet rhythm added

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

■ Playing Rhythm

The KR features numerous internal rhythm patterns, which, like the metronome, can

You cannot have the

metronome or automatic

accompaniment play

be played and stopped with the press of a single button.

Playing rhythm patterns instead of the metronome lets you enjoy performances that

feel like live sessions.

simultaneously with the

Rhythm. When you start

playing the metronome or

automatic accompaniment

while a Rhythm is playing, the

Rhythm stops.

Press the [Rhythm] button and watch the indicator light up.

The Rhythm will sound.

The following “Rhythm screen” appears.

fig.d-rhythm.eps_60

When you touch <Exit>, the Rhythm sound continues to play, as you return to the

previous screen.

Stopping the Rhythm

Press the [Rhythm] button once more and the indicator light goes out.

■ Changing the Rhythm settings

Depending on the beat, there

may be only one Rhythm to

choose form.

❍ Changing the Rhythm

Touch a Rhythm name on the Rhythm screen.

The selected Rhythm plays.

The Rhythms available for selection will depend on the beat.

Touch

to switch the screens and show other choices.

For more on the Rhythm types,

refer to the “Rhythm Pattern

List” (p. 199).

❍ Changing the beat of Rhythm

In the Rhythm screen, touch <Beat>.

The available choices for the beat appear at the bottom of the screen.

Choose the beat by touching your choice.

You can scroll the display to one side or the other and show other choices by

touching

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Performance

❍ Changing the volume

The rhythm volume can be adjusted to ten different levels.

On the Rhythm screen, touch <Volume>.

The available choices for volume level appear at the bottom of the screen.

Select a volume icon.

When you touch

, the selection moves to the side, allowing you to access

other volume levels.

Choosing

sets the volume to the lowest level, and choosing

sets

it to the highest level.

Choose

to silence the Rhythm sound.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Music Styles and Automatic Accompaniment

What is Automatic Accompaniment?

For instructions on playing the

Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button for Automatic Accompaniment’s

optimum settings. Automatic Accompaniment is a function that provides you with

accompaniment in a variety of musical genres, just by specifying chords in the left

hand. Automatic Accompaniment lets you play with an orchestra, even when

performing alone!

Automatic Accompaniment,

refer to “Selecting Music Styles

(Music Style Buttons)” (p. 62).

What Are Music Styles?

Accompaniment patterns in various musical genres are called “Music Styles.”

There are many different kinds of music around the world, and each has its own

unique features. What gives jazz or classical music their unmistakable sounds are a

unique combination of elements like instrumentation, melody, and phrasing, which

interact to create the musical character.

Elements of Music Styles

A Music Style consists of a set of six sections called “divisions.”

Division

Intro

Explanation

Played at the start of a song.

Original

The basic accompaniment pattern.

Variation

This is a variation on the Original accompaniment pattern.

This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a point where the

mood changes and the accompaniment returns to the original.

Fill In To Original

This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a point where the

mood changes and the accompaniment moves ahead to the

variation.

Fill In To

Variation

Ending

The conclusion of a song.

In addition, Music Styles are built from: “Rhythm,” “Bass,” “Accompaniment 1,”

“Accompaniment 2,” and “Accompaniment 3.”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Performing Using Automatic Accompaniment

(One-Touch Arranger)

Here’s how to create the settings for Automatic Accompaniment.

fig.panel2-1

Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.

When you select an internal

The Basic screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60

song or music file that includes

the lyrics data, <

appears in the Piano screen or

Basic screen. Touch this to

display the lyrics.

Normally, when you change a

Music Style, the tempo and

tone change to selections that

go well with the selected

Music Style. If you do not want

to change the tempo and tone,

refer to “Changing Music

Styles Without Changing the

Tone or Tempo (One Touch

Setting)” (p. 156).

Observe the settings:

• The keyboard is split into left- and right-hand parts, with accompaniment

chords specified for the left-hand side of the keyboard.

• A tone appropriate for the selected Music Style is chosen.

• The tempo and beat for the selected Music Style is set.

For instructions on selecting

Music Styles, refer to

Play a chord on the lower-part of keyboard.

The accompaniment begins, starting from the intro.

“Selecting Music Styles (Music

Style Buttons)” (p. 62).

Play chords with the left hand, and the melody with the right.

When you change chords in the left hand, the accompaniment also changes.

fig.arr-split.e

Split Point (

)

For instructions on starting

and stopping the

accompaniment, refer to

“Starting and Stopping the

Accompaniment” (p. 66).

The range specifyed a chord

Press the [Intro/Ending] button.

You can change the range in

which chords are played.

Please refer to “Changing the

Keyboard’s Split Point (Split

Point)” (p. 156).

After the ending plays, the accompaniment stops.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

■ About Chords

A chord is produced when several notes are played simultaneously. Chords are

indicated by the pitch of the fundamental note of the chord (the root) and the chord

type, which is determined by the other notes of the chord.

For example, the C m chord is expressed in terms of the root note “C” and the chord

type “m” (minor). C m is made up of the three notes “C,” “E ” and “G.”

“C m” is indicated as the chord name on the Basic screen.

fig.chord.e

C_m

Chord Type

Root Note

All chord roots are indicated as a letter, sometimes with

correspond to the notes shown below.

added, and

fig.chord-root.e

■ Playing Chords with Simple Fingering

(Chord Intelligence)

“Chord Intelligence” is a feature that chooses the accompaniment chords the

moment you play a key.

You can cancel the Chord

Intelligence function. For more

information, see “Changing

How Chords Are Played and

Specified (Arranger Config)”

(p. 159).

To play a “C” chord, for example, you normally have to play the three keys C, E, and

G. But with Chord Intelligence, you only have to press the C key to start a “C” chord

accompaniment.

fig.chord-intel.e

• How to play chords in the Chord Intelligence mode:

Major

Minor

Ex: C m

Ex:

Play the root and

the third key above it.

Play the chord root.

For more information about

chord fingering, refer to the

“Chord List” (p. 194).

Minor Seventh

Seventh

Ex: C 7

Ex: C m7

Play the root,

the third key above it, and

the second key below it.

Play the root and

the second key above it.

Major Seventh

Ex: C maj 7

Diminished

Ex:

C dim

Play the root and

the first key below it.

Play the root and

the sixth key above it.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

■ Viewing Chord Fingerings (Chord Finder)

Whenever you are not sure how a certain chord is fingered, you can display the notes

of the chord on the screen.

On the Basic screen, touch <

fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60

Touch the root of the chord you want to learn about.

The chord fingering appears on screen.

fig.d-crdfind.eps_60

For example, if you wanted to see the fingering for a C# chord, you would touch

<C>, then touch <#>.

Touch <Exit> to go back to the Basic screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Selecting Music Styles (Music Style Buttons)

You can select a variety of different Music Styles by pressing the Music Style buttons.

Music Styles are divided into six groups, with each assigned to one of the Music Style

buttons.

fig.panel2-2

Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.

For more on the Music Style

names, refer to the “Music

Style List” (p. 192, p. 193).

Press one of the Music Style buttons to select the Music Style group.

Watch the indicator button light up.

Six of the Music Styles included in that group are displayed on the screen.

fig.d-stylesel.eps_60

This screen is called the “Style Selection screen”.

You can listen to the Music Style by touching <Audition>.

Touch

to switch the screen and display the next selections.

You can touch <Search> to find Styles that match the selected criteria (p. 64).

Touch a Music Style name to select the Music Style.

You can use the [-] [+] buttons and the dial to automatically switch pages and select

Styles.

By changing the tempo and

Tone, you can enjoy

Touch Preset <A>, <B>, <C>, or <D> in the lower part of the screen.

performing with a different

ambience, even in the same

Music Style.

When the Music Style is selected, Preset A is selected.

When any of the Presets from <A> through <D> are selected, the Music Style tempo,

right-hand Tone, Style Orchestrator settings (p. 70) and other settings change.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Touch <Exit>.

The display returns to the Basic screen.

When you play a chord in the left-hand part of the keyboard, the selected Music Style

is automatic.

■ Selecting Music Styles on Floppy Disks

You can play other User Styles saved to floppy disks or User memory (p. 149).

fig.panel2-3

Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive (p. 114).

If you’re using the disk drive

for the first time, be sure to

read the important notes on

p. 6.

Press the Music Style [User] button.

fig.d-styldisk.eps_60

When you touch <User/Disk> on the lower part of the screen, the screen for

selecting user memory or disk Styles appears.

When you touch <Preset>, the screen for selecting “Trad/Kids” Music Styles

appears.

Touch

The Music Styles saved on the floppy disk are displayed.

When you touch <

>, the Music Styles stored in User memory are displayed.

Select a Music Style, and touch the Music Style name.

Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.

You can save multiple user

Styles to user memory. Take a

look at “Saving a User Style”

(p. 149).

You can now perform in the selected Music Style.

Music Styles selected from floppy disks are stored until the power is turned off. Even

after ejecting the floppy disk, by pressing the Music Style [User] button, you can

perform using the most recently selected Music Style.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

■ Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles

(Style Search)

You can search for Music Styles that match the tempo of the song, musical genre, or

other criteria you set.

Only the KR’s internal Music

Styles are searchable.

You can also search Music Styles using the first character of the Style names.

Press one of the Music Style buttons.

Touch <Search>.

The following “Style Search screen” appears.

fig.d-stylsrch1.eps_60

Condition Search screen

Name Search screen

Touch here to switch these screens.

In a condition search, the KR

looks for Music Styles

satisfying all of the selected

search criteria.

❍ Searching by Conditions

Touch the parameter you want to set, then use the [-] [+] buttons and the

dial to select the search conditions.

Touch <Search>.

The search results appear in the display.

Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style.

Touch <Exit> to return to the Style Search screen.

❍ Searching by Music Style name

Touch <By Name>.

Touch <By Key> to return to the Condition Search screen.

Decide which character you’ll use for the search.

The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.

Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in

succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group

(“A”→”B”→”C”...).

Touch <A-0> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.

Touch <Search>.

The search results appear on the display.

Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style.

Touch <Exit> several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Playing Only Music Style Rhythm Patterns

You can also play only the rhythm patterns of Music Styles.

fig.panel2-4

NOTE

Select a Music Style (p. 62).

Some Music Styles do not

include rhythm patterns.

When you select these Style

patterns, no rhythm patterns

are played, even when you

play on the left side of the

keyboard.

Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.

The performance is set so that only the rhythm patterns are played.

Press the [Intro/Ending] button.

The Rhythm part of accompaniment begins, starting from the Intro.

Just as with regular Automatic Accompaniment, you can add intros and endings by

pressing the [Intro/Ending] button, and make changes to the rhythm patterns with

the Fill In button (p. 69).

Adjusting the Accompaniment Tempo

fig.panel2-5

When the Basic screen is displayed, you can use the Tempo [-] [+] buttons or the [-]

[+] buttons and the dial to change the tempo.

The tempo is indicated on the upper left of the screen.

fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60

Pressing the [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style or song

to the basic tempo.

You can change the tempo of Automatic Accompaniment even while the

accompaniment is playing.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment

Pressing the One Touch Program [Arranger] button activates Sync Start for the

accompaniment (which starts the accompaniment simultaneously when you play on

the lower section of the keyboard), and automatically sets an appropriate intro for

the accompaniment. You can also change the way the accompaniment starts and

stops.

fig.panel2-6

■ Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously

When You Play the Keyboard (Sync)

Press the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button simultaneously,

causing the indicators of both buttons to flash.

The Sync Start settings go into effect.

Sync Start is set immediately

after the One Touch Program

[Arranger] button is pressed.

Play a chord on the lower-part of keyboard.

As you play the keys, the intro and accompaniment begins simultaneously.

❍ Changing the intro

When set for Sync Start (the indicators of both the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/

Stop] button are flashing), you can use the following procedure to change the intro,

or prevent the intro from playing.

Starting without an intro

Press the [Intro/Ending] button and watch the indicator go out.

Now when you play a chord with the keyboard, the accompaniment starts without

the intro.

To start with a short intro added

On the Basic screen, touch the Intro/Ending Type <2>.

fig.d-intro2.eps_60

Now when you specify a chord with the keyboard, a short intro is played, and the

accompaniment starts.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

❍ Starting at the press of a button

Press the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button simultaneously,

and the indicators lights go out.

The Sync Start function is cancelled.

Play a chord on the lower part of keyboard.

Choose the chord to be played when the accompaniment begins playing.

Press the [Intro/Ending] button or the [Start/Stop] button.

When you press the [Intro/Ending] button, the intro plays, and the accompaniment

starts. When you press the [Start/Stop] button, the accompaniment starts without

the intro.

When you press the [Intro/Ending] button after touching Intro/Ending Type <2> on

the Basic screen, a short intro plays.

You can change the sound of

the chord tone and bass tone.

Take a look at “Changing How

Chords Are Played and

Specified (Arranger Config)”

(p. 159).

Chord Tones and Bass Tones

When you play the keys in the left-hand side of the keyboard while the [Start/Stop]

button’s indicator is not lit, chords play. This note is called the “Chord Tone,” and

the root of the chord being played at the same time is called the “Bass Tone.”

■ Stopping Automatic Accompaniment

❍ Stopping with an added ending

Press the [Intro/Ending] button.

An ending plays and the Automatic Accompaniment stops.

When you press the [Intro/Ending] button after touching Intro/Ending Type <2> on

the Basic screen, a short ending plays.

❍ Stopping at the same time the button is pressed

Press the [Start/Stop] button.

The Automatic Accompaniment stops as soon as you press the button.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

■ Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the

Intro (Countdown)

If an intro plays before your performance, you can have a count-in sound played to

the end of the intro, helping you hear when to start playing.

fig.countdown.e

When the Intro has finished playing,

the accompaniment plays.

Ex: 4/4

Intro

Count Sound

Press the [Metronome] button and watch the indicator light up.

The Metronome screen (p. 52) appears.

If you don’t want the metronome to play, press the [Metronome] button and

indicator light goes out.

Touch <Countdown>.

The following “Countdown settings screen” appears.

fig.d-cntdwn.eps_60

Touch <Switch>

to set this to “ON.”

When you press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button, the performance starts,

and the countdown sound plays at the end of the intro.

❍ Cancelling the countdown

In the Metronome screen, touch <Countdown>.

For more about settings on the

Countdown screen, refer to

“Settings for the Countdown”

(p. 161).

Touch <Switch>

to set this to “OFF.”

This sets the KR so that the countdown does not play.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Modifying an Accompaniment

You can add variation to the

Automatic Accompaniment by

assigning different functions to

the Performance Pads and

pedals. For more information,

see “Assigning Functions to

Pedals and Performance Pads

(Pedal Setting/User

When you use Automatic Accompaniment, you can easily add Fill Ins to the

accompaniment patterns, change arrangements, and make other changes.

■ Changing the Accompaniment Pattern

(Fill In Buttons)

There are two accompaniment patterns: the Original, and a Variation. In addition, a

fill-in (or short phrase) is added at the points where the accompaniment patterns

change, which adds more interest to the song. It can be effective to use the simpler

original pattern for the first half of the song, and the variation pattern for the second

half.

Functions)” (p. 157).

What’s a “Fill In”?

A short improvisational phrase inserted at the bar line is called a “Fill In.”

The KR automatically plays the appropriate phrase for the selected Music Style.

fig.panel2-7

Press the Fill In [Variation] button and watch the indicator light up.

The instrument is set so that the variation performance pattern is played.

Press the Fill In [Original] button and watch the indicator light up.

The instrument is set so that the original performance pattern is played.

Pressing these buttons during a performance inserts a one-bar fill-in at the

appropriate place and time.

Adding a fill-in without changing the accompaniment pattern

You can play only the fill-in, without changing the accompaniment pattern.

Press the lit [Original] or [Variation] Fill In button during the performance.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

■ Changing the Instrumental Makeup of Music Styles

(Style Orchestrator)

You can change the arrangement of an accompaniment. This function is called “Style

Orchestrator.” Each Music Style has four different accompaniment arrangements.

fig.panel2-8

Press the [Style Orchestrator] button and watch the indicator light up.

When you press the [Phrase]

button or [User Function]

buttons, the [Style

The instrument is set to allow you to change the arrangement with the Performance Pads.

Press Performance Pad [1]–[4] to change the arrangement for the

accompaniment.

Orchestrator] button’s

indicator goes out, and the

function of the Performance

Pads changes. For details refer

to p. 71 and p. 157.

Watch the indicator of the button you pressed light up.

Display

Basic

Explanation

This is the simplest arrangement.

NOTE

Advanced 1

Advanced 2

Full

This is a more involved arrangement.

This is the most elavorate arrangement.

When simple Music Styles are

selected, there may be no

change in the arrangement

even when you use the Style

Orchestrator function.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

■ Playing Phrases (Phrase)

You can play sound effects and other short phrases.

fig.panel2-9

Press the [Phrase] button and watch the indicator light up.

The instrument is set so that phrases play with the Performance Pads.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-phrase.eps_60

When you switch Music Styles,

the phrases assigned to the

Performance Pads are

switched. If you do not want to

have the phrase settings

change when you change

Music Styles, refer to

“Changing Music Styles

Without Changing the Tone or

Tempo (One Touch Setting)”

(p. 156).

Touch

to choose the type of phrase.

Press one of the Pads.

The selected phrase plays.

When the phrase continues playing, press the Pad once more to stop it.

With certain phrases, the accompaniment stops while the phrase is playing.

When you touch <Exit>, you’re returned to the previous screen, while the same

function remains assigned to the Pads.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Adding Harmony to the Right-Hand

Part (Melody Intelligence)

You can add harmony to the notes you play on the keyboard.

While an Automatic Accompaniment is playing, the matching harmony is

automatically added to the notes you are playing with the right hand. This function

is called “Melody Intelligence.”

fig.panel2-10

Press the [Melody Intelligence] button and watch the indicator light up.

When you play something on the right-hand section of the keyboard, harmony is

added.

The following “Melody Intelligence screen” appears.

fig.d-melointel.eps_60

Select and touch a harmony type.

Then when you play a melody on the keyboard, a harmony style is automatically

added.

With some harmonies, Tones

may change automatically.

Also, when you play several

keys at the same time, in some

cases harmony may be added

to one note.

When you touch <Exit>, you’re returned to the previous screen, while the Melody

Intelligence function remains selected.

Press the [Melody Intelligence] button once more and the indicator light

goes out.

The Melody Intelligence function is cancelled.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Playing Sounds in the Left Hand During a

Performance (Lower Tone)

Normally, when using Automatic Accompaniment in a performance, sounds are not

produced by playing the left-hand part of the keyboard. When you touch the

<Lower> icon, you can have Tones from the left side of the keyboard play

simultaneously with the Automatic Accompaniment.

Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.

This sets the Automatic Accompaniment.

On the Basic screen, touch <Lower>.

Now when you play a chord in the left-hand keyboard area, the notes you play will

sound, and the accompaniment chord changes.

fig.d-lower.eps_60

Stopping the sound in the left-hand

Touch <Lower>.

The <Lower> icon returns to the original color, and the left-hand Tones stop playing.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added

(Piano Style Arranger)

Usually with Automatic Accompaniment, you play chords on the left-hand side of

the keyboard and the melody on the right-hand side. Chords can also be recognized

over the entire keyboard, allowing you to perform using Automatic Accompaniment

without splitting the keyboard. This function is called “Piano Style Arranger.”

This makes it possible to add an accompaniment automatically as you play a song

by playing chords in the ordinary way, without giving any thought to the location

of a keyboard split.

Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.

Touch <Split> to turn the Split function off.

fig.d-pianist.eps_60

Select a Music Style (p. 62).

Play the keyboard.

The accompaniment starts when you play a chord anywhere on the keyboard.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each

Part (Balance)

You can adjust the volume balance between the accompaniment and the keyboard,

and the volume balance for each of the parts in a Music Style.

■ Changing the Volume Balance between the

NOTE

Accompaniment and the Keyboard (Balance Knob)

When this knob is turned

completely to the

You can change the volume balance between a song and accompaniment and the

Accompaniment side, no

sounds from the keyboard are

audible, even when the keys

are pressed. You can usually

leave the knob at the center

position.

notes you play on the keyboard.

Adjust the volume balance with the Balance knob.

fig.volbal.e

■ Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each

Performance Part (Part Balance)

You can adjust the volume of each performance part in a Music Style, and the

balance between parts when playing multiple Tones on the keyboard.

fig.panel2-11

Press the [Part Balance] button and watch the indicator light up.

The following “Part Balance screen” appears.

Touch

to switch the screens.

fig.d-partbal1.eps_60

Screen for models featuring

the Moving Key

Switch the screens

The volume balance between the performance parts in the Music Style is indicated.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment

Display

Rhythm

Performance part

Music Style Rhythm Part

Bass, Bass Tone (p. 67)

Bass

Accompaniment 1, Accompaniment 2,

Accompaniment 3, Chord Tone (p. 67)

Accomp

Short phrases sounded when the Performance Pads

are pressed (p. 71).

Phrase

fig.d-partbal2.eps_60

Screen for models featuring

the Moving Key

Switch the screens

This shows the volume balance between the keyboard’s Tones when either layer

performance (p. 30) or split performance (p. 31) are used, or the volume balance

when using the keyboard to play percussion instruments or sound effects (p. 28).

Displayed

Drums

Tone Part

Percussion instruments or sound effects played with the keys

Lower

Layer

Upper

Left-hand Tone

Layer Tone

Right-hand Tone

Only with models featuring Moving Key

fig.d-partbal2.eps_60

Only with models featuring Moving Key

Switch the screens

Displayed

Tone Part

Sounds other than the keyboard parts when a CD is playing

Overall sound (this is the same as the volume set with the

remote control VOL [-] [+] buttons)

Master

Touch each slider

to adjust the volume balance.

You can also make these adjustments by touching sliders and then using [-] [+]

buttons or the dial.

Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Song Playback

Playing a Song

Now, let’s try practicing while playing back internal songs, commercial music files,

and songs saved to floppy disks.

You can use rewind or fast-forward to go to any desired measure, and play back

from that point.

fig.panel3-1

Record/Playback buttons

Selecting the song

When playing back songs on floppy disks, first insert the floppy disk in the disk

drive.

If the floppy disk is being used

for the first time, refer to p. 6.

Press the [Select/Listen to a Song] button.

The following “Genre Selection screen” appears.

fig.d-genre.eps_60

When you touch the genre for the song you want to play, the screen changes.

When selecting a song from a floppy disk, touch, <Disk>.

The following “Song Selection screen” appears.

fig.d-songsel.eps_60

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Song Playback

When you touch <

random order.

>, songs selected from all of the internal songs are played in

If there is recorded song data,

the “Delete song” screen

appears.

When you touch <

>, all of the songs in the genre you have selected are played

in order, starting from the selected song. When the last song is finished, playback

resumes from the initial song.

>: Information for the selected song is displayed.

>: The selected song is played back. This changes to <

> while the song

is played back; playback stops when you touch <

>< >: The song genre changes.

If it’s okay to delete the song,

touch <OK>. If you do not

want to delete the song, touch

<Cancel>, and either save the

song to a floppy disk (p. 116)

or register the song to the

Favorites (p. 80).

Touch the name of the song to be played back.

The selected song name appears at “0:.”

You use the [-] [+] buttons and the dial to select songs.

Playing back

Press the [

NOTE

When you start playback of

songs, the measure number on

the Basic screen appears in

reverse video. The

(Play/Stop)] button.

The button indicator lights up, and playback of the song begins.

Stopping the Song

Press the [

performance data is being

loaded while the indication is

highlighted; please wait a few

moments for this to be

(Play/Stop)] button once again.

The button indicator light goes out, and the song stops.

When the song is finished, playback stops automatically.

completed.

Press the [

(Reset)] button to return to the beginning of the song.

Song Number <0:>

Record/Playback Buttons

In the Song Selection screen,

the title of the currently

selected song appears at “0.”

Song Number “0” is used by

all genres. Recorded

fig.composer.e

performances are also stored to

“0.” The song in Song Number

“0” is erased when the power

is turned off.

Track buttons:

Each performance part of the song being played back is assigned to a track button. Use these

buttons to select the performance parts that are muted or played. For more detailed

information, refer to p. 99.

[

(Reset)] button: Returns to the beginning of the song.

NOTE

[

(Play/Stop)] button:

Plays back the song, or if the song is currently being played, it stops the song.

When using markers to specify

a section to be repeated (p.

102), you can rewind and fast

forward only within the range

between Marker A and

Marker B.

[

(Rec)] button: Records the performance. For more detailed information, refer to p. 105.

(Bwd)] button: Moves back the playback position of the song one measure each time

the button is pressed. When held down, the song “rewinds” continuously.

(Fwd)] button: Advances the playback position of the song one measure each time the

button is pressed. When held down, the song is forwarded continuously.

[

Holding down the [

(Play/Stop)] button and pressing the [

(Fwd)] button moves

you to the end of the song.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Song Playback

■ Using Keywords to Search for Songs (Song Search)

You can search for songs that match the conditions you set regarding the song tempo

or genre.

Only the KR’s internal songs

are searchable.

You can also search the songs using the first character of the song name.

Press the [Select/Listen to a Song] button.

Touch <Search>.

The following “Song Search screen” appears.

fig.d-songsrch1.eps_60

Condition Search screen

Name Search screen

Touch here to switch these screens.

❍ Searching by conditions

Touch the parameter you want to set, then use the [-] [+] buttons and the

dial to select the search conditions.

With <Data>, songs are searched according to data included in the internal songs.

You can use four different criteria in searches: “Chords,” “Lyrics,” “Fingering”

(fingering numbers), and “Any.” By selecting a song containing any of this data, then

displaying it in the KR’s score, you can display information about the selected data.

Touch <Search>.

The search results appear in the display.

Touch the song name to select the song.

Touch <Exit> to return to the Song Search screen.

❍ Searching by song name

Touch <By Name>.

Touch <By Key> to return to the Condition Search screen.

Decide which character you will use for the search.

The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.

Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in

succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group

(“A”→”B”→”C”...).

Touch <A-0> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.

Touch <Search>.

The search results appear in the display.

Touch the song name to select the song.

Touch <Exit> several times to return to the previous screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Song Playback

Registering the Songs You Like (Favorites)

You can register songs you are currently practicing or enjoy playing to “Favorites,”

allowing you to select these songs easily.

Selecting the Song

You can also register songs on

floppy disks to the Favorites.

For details, refer to “Copying

Songs on Floppy Disks to

Favorites” (p. 120).

Press the [Select/Listen to a Song] button.

The Genre Selection screen or the Song Selection screen appears (p. 77).

Touch the song name to select the song to be registered.

Registering to Favorites

Touch <Add>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.m-fvrtadd.eps_60

NOTE

You cannot register songs on

CDs to the Favorites.

Touch <OK>.

The selected song is registered to Favorites.

Now you can select the registered song by selecting Favorites for the genre in the

Song Selection screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Song Playback

■ Removing Songs from Favorites

This deletes registered songs for Favorites.

In the Song Selection screen, select Favorites for the genre.

fig.d-song-fvrt.eps_60

Touch the name of the song to be deleted.

Touch <Del>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.m-fvrtdel.eps_60

Touch <OK>.

The song is deleted.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Song Playback

Playing Back Songs on CDs (Only for Instrument Equipped with CD Drive)

■ Cautions

Handling CDs

• Do not leave discs exposed to direct sunlight for extended

periods.

Insert the CD in the CD Drive

1. ^{Press the eject button and open a disc tray.}

2. ^{Put a CD on a disc tray.}

3. ^{Press the eject button again to close the disc tray.}

• Handle CDs with your finger and thumb, holding the disc

by the center hole and outer rim. Do not touch or scratch

the disc’s recording surface (the green side).

Removing a CD

• Do not drop or stack discs.

1. ^{Press the eject button and open a disc tray.}

• Do not place heavy objects on discs or subject them to

strong impact.

2. Remove the CD from the disc tray.

• Do not affix stickers or other such materials on the label

side. Placing stickers on the disc may result in errors when

data writing and scratch the disc.

If a disc tray does not open

If the power is turned off with the disc still in the drive

(such as due to a power failure), the disc tray cannot be

opened by pressing the eject button. In this case, you can

insert a piece of wire to force the tray open.

• Use a felt-tip marker or other soft-tipped implement to

write titles and other information on the label side of

discs.

• Store discs in their original cases or other suitable cases for

protection.

• Before using the CD, please read the warning on the CD

cover.

Emergency eject hole

Cleaning Discs

• If a disc becomes dusty or soiled, gently wipe the disc

with a soft cloth. Always wipe outwards from the center

using light, gentle strokes. Do not wipe the disk in a

circular pattern.

NOTE

Make sure the KR’s power has been turned OFF before

attempting to engage the emergency eject hole. If you insert

something while the power is on, the disc could be damaged, or

unexpected problems may occur.

Precautions Concerning Use of the CD

• CD-R/RW discs to which audio tracks have been added,

and CDs with mixed audio tracks and data will not play

back properly.

• The KR is capable of playing back only commercial CDs

that conform the official standards—those that carry the

“COMPACT DISC DIGITAL AUDIO” logo. The usability

and sound quality of audio discs that incorporate

CDs cannot be guaranteed.

• For more detailed information on audio discs featuring

CDs, please consult the disc vendor.

• You cannot save songs and styles to CDs, and you cannot

delete songs or styles recorded to CDs. Furthermore, you

cannot format CDs.

• The prescribed format for CD-R/RW discs is “ISO9660

Level 1 Mode 1.” You may be unable to read using other

formats.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Song Playback

■ Playing Back Songs on CDs

You can play back the enclosed CD and CDs for player piano as well as audio CDs.

fig.panel3-1

Record/Playback buttons

Selecting the song

Insert the CD you want to play back in the CD drive.

Wait a few moments after

placing the CD in the CD drive

for the display to change to the

Song Selection (CD) screen.

Press the [Select/Listen to a Song] button.

The following “Song Selection screen (CD)” appears.

If using the CD drive for the

first time, refer to p. 82.

Icon

Explanation

Songs are played back in random order.

All songs are played back in the regular order, starting from

the selected song.

The selected song is played back. This changes to <

while the song is playing back; playback stops when you

touch <

By touching an item with the <

will be displayed.

>, the songs in that folder

>, you can close the

By touching an item with the <

folder.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Song Playback

Press the remote control’s [

play back.

] button or [

] button to select a song to

If there is recorded song data,

the “Delete song” screen

appears.

Use the [-] [+] buttons and the dial to select songs.

When Selecting Songs in Folders

1. Touch the folder name, then touch <

If it’s okay to delete the song,

touch <OK>. If you do not

want to delete the song, touch

<Cancel>, and either save the

song to a floppy disk (p. 116)

or register the song to the

Favorites (p. 80).

You can also use the remote control’s [

dial to select songs.

] [

] buttons, [-] [+] buttons, and

After a moment, a list of songs in the folder is displayed.

2. Touch a song from the list that appears to select the song you want to

play back.

The selected song name appears at “0:.”

Depending on the number of songs contained in a folder, this may take some

time.

Playing back

Press the [

(Play/Stop)] button.

The button indicator lights up, and playback begins.

Stopping the Song

Press the [

Song Number <0:>

(Play/Stop)] button once again.

In the Song Selection screen,

the title of the currently

selected song appears at “0.”

Song Number “0” is used by

all genres. Recorded

The button indicator light goes out, and the song stops.

When the song is finished, playback stops automatically.

Press the [

(Reset)] button to return to the beginning of the song.

performances are also stored to

“0.” The song in Song Number

“0” is erased when the power

is turned off.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Song Playback

Using the Remote Control

(Only for Instrument Equipped with CD Drive)

NOTE

No remote control is included

with models that are not

You can use the included remote control to easily start and stop performances and

switch songs.

equipped with a CD drive.

■ Installing Batteries in the Remote Control

Install the batteries provided in the remote control.

Open the battery cover on the back of the remote control.

NOTE

Insert the supplied AA batteries, as shown in the figure of remote

control.

Be careful to observe

the correct polarity (+, -

direction) when installing

the batteries.

Close the battery cover.

■ How to Use the Remote Control

When using the remote control, aim the remote control at the infrared receiver,

keeping in mind the range of operation (below).

Infrared Receiver

Range of operation

CD Drive

Distance:

4 m (approximately 13 feet)

Angle:

30 degrees to the left and right

of the receiver.

Remote Control

Precautions Concerning Use of the Remote Control

• The remote control is able to transmit only one operation at a time.

• The remote control may not operate even within the range of operation if there

is an obstacle between it and the main unit.

• Using the remote control near other equipment that uses remote control systems

may result in operational errors.

• The life of the battery depends on the amount and conditions of use. If the

operational range of the remote control decreases, change the batteries.

• If you will not be using the remote control for a long period of time, remove the

batteries.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Song Playback

■ About the Remote Control

Infrared Emitter

Restoring the Original

“TONE,” “HARMONY,”

and “TRANSFORM”

Settings

Adding Effects to Mic

Vocals

Selecting the Tone of

7 the Part Activated by

the Keys

Turning the Advanced

2 3D Function or Surround

Function On and Off

Switching the Screen of

the External Display

Selecting the Song Genre

Starting and Stopping

Songs, Selecting

Previous and

Following Songs

Changing the Volume

Muting the Sound

Changing the Tempo of

the Song and Automatic

Accompaniment

Using the Function

Assigned to the [FUNC]

Button

You can also switch the functions for the [

] (Play/Stop) button, the [FUNC] button, and the TEMPO [-] [+] button.

Please refer to “Changing the Functions of the Remote Control’s Buttons” (p. 167).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Song Playback

Button

Explanation

This changes the vocals from the mic. You can also use this to change vocals on the

CD included with the instrument. The setting switches each time you press the

button, cycling through male, female, child, and normal voice settings.

TRANSFORM

This adds harmonies to the mic vocals. You can also add harmonies to vocals on the

included CD.

The harmony setting switches each time you press the button, cycling through

Music Files (p. 49), Oct-Up (p. 46), Oct-Down (p. 46), and normal voice settings.

HARMONY

This adds greater breadth to the sound. When the [Surround] button is set to

“Advanced 3D,” pressing this button toggles the Advanced 3D effect on and off.

When the [Surround] button is set to “Surround,” each press of this button takes

you to the next choice among the available selections, which are: Surround Effect

off, Surround Accompaniment, and Surround Reverb.

INTERNAL

This switches the genres of the internal songs.

If a CD is inserted when you press the button, the CD is selected.

If a floppy disk is inserted when you press the button, the floppy is selected.

This mutes all of the sounds. The Moving Key function stops at this time.

MUTE

You can use the function assigned to this button. You can also change the function

assigned to the button (p. 167).

FUNC

This restores the [HARMONY] and [TRANSFORM] button settings to their original

condition. The [TONE] button is set to piano tone.

CANCEL

TONE

This changes the part that is currently active when the keyboard is played. The tone

is switched each time you press the button.

Each press of the button takes you to the next selection among the available choices,

which are, in order: song list, lyrics, score, score + keyboard, and user screen image.

You can press the [DISPLAY] button while the Tempo screen or Volume screen is

displayed to clear the Tempo screen or Volume screen.

DISPLAY

* Some songs may not feature screens with lyrics or scores.

When you press the [

selected. Pressing the [

beginning of that song.

] button while the song is stopped, the previous song is

] button while a song is playing returns you to the

This starts and stops playback of the song.

Playback alternately starts and stops each time you press the [

You can also assign functions to the button (p. 167).

] button.

When you press the [

] button, the next song is selected.

You can adjust the volume.

* If the volume is set to 0 with the VOL [-] [+] buttons, then no sounds will be

played, even if you try to raise the volume with the KR’s [Volume] knob. To raise

the volume, use the VOL [-] [+] buttons as well.

➝You can use the Memory Backup function to store these settings to the KR

(p. 164).

VOL - +

(Volume)

This adjusts the tempo.

You can also assign functions to the button (p. 167).

* You cannot change the tempos for CDs.

TEMPO - +

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

Displaying the Score

NOTE

The KR can display scores not only for the internal songs, but for music files and

performances recorded with the KR. This is very convenient for performing while

reading the music and for checking songs that have been recorded. When you play

back a music file with lyrics, the lyrics appear on screen.

The functions described in

“Chapter 4 Practice Functions”

cannot be used during

playback of songs on CDs.

Selecting the song

When playing back songs on floppy disks, first insert the floppy disk in the disk

drive.

Press the [Select/Listen to a Song] button to select a song.

For details refer to “Playing a Song” (p. 77).

Press the [Score Display] button.

The “Score screen” appears.

fig.d-score.eps_60

In some internal songs, the

fingering is displayed.

The fingering numbers shown

in the screen indicate one

possible fingering.

Icon

Explanation

Displays an enlarged score.

You can also display the note names.

Chord names can be displayed

in some of the internal songs

and recorded performances

using the KR’s Chord

The score and keyboard are displayed. This allows you to

check the keys that are pressed for the sounds played back.

Selects the part for which the score is displayed.

* You can specify the track or part to be displayed with

<Option> (p. 90).

Sequencer (p. 134).

Makes detailed settings for the score display (p. 90).

This allows you to practice the song repeatedly while reading

the music (p. 92).

<Tutor>

The left pedal functions as the “Replay.” When you press the

pedal during the playback of the song, playback stops, and

when you release the pedal, playback resumes starting at the

beginning of that measure. When the pedal is pressed in rapid

succession, playback is returned the same number of

measures as the number of times the pedal is pressed.

In situations such as when you want to hear a difficult phrase

repeated a number of times, you can press the pedal to go to

an earlier point in the song.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

NOTE

Press the [

(Play/Stop)] button.

No notes are shown in the

Playback of the song begins, and the score advances along with the progression of

the performance.

score if the selected part

contains no data. To change

the part being displayed, refer

to “Making Detailed Settings

for the Score Display” (p. 90).

Notes Regarding the Score Display

• When playback of a song begins,

appears in the Score screen. While this

symbol is displayed, performance data is being loaded from floppy disk or

internal memory. It may take thirty seconds to a minute or more to read the

data. Please wait.

• The displayed scores are based on music files. Priority is placed on the

readability of the displayed music, not on the accurate rendition of difficult,

high-level performances. Thus, there may be discrepancies seen when compared

with commercially available printed music. The display is not intended for

viewing advanced songs requiring precisely detailed scores, or complex songs.

• On the score display screen, lyrics and notes may extend beyond the range

displayed on the screen and may not be visible.

• Playback may start over from the beginning if you display the score or change

the displayed part during playback of the song.

■ Touching Notes to Confirm the Sounds

(Touch the Notes)

In the Score screen, you can have notes played by touching the notes on the screen.

You can operate the keys on

instruments featuring the

Moving key function (p. 168).

When you touch <

> to show the keyboard on the screen, the touched note is

indicated by the corresponding note on the keyboard. This allows you confirm notes

by sight, sound, and touch.

In addition, when you trace part of the score with your finger, the traced segment is

played back. This allows you to easily play back phrases you like.

fig.d-score-key.eps_60

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

■ Making Detailed Settings for the Score Display

You can change the part appearing on the score display and change the manner in

which the score is displayed.

Press the [Score Display] button to display the Score screen.

Touch <Option>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-scoreopt.eps_60

Switch the screens

Touch

for the parameter being set to select the value.

Touch <Exit> to return to the Score screen.

Item

Setting

Lyrics

Sets whether or not the lyrics

appear in the score.

OFF

The lyrics are displayed.

In some internal songs, the

fingering is displayed.

Not displayed.

The fingering numbers shown

in the screen indicate one

possible fingering.

Finger Numbers

Whether or not the fingering

appears in the score.

The fingering is displayed.

Not displayed.

Chords

Whether or not chord names

appear in the score.

The chord names are displayed.

Not displayed.

Chord names can be displayed

in some of the internal songs

and recorded performances

using the KR’s Chord

OFF

Not displayed.

C, D, E

The pitch names (C, D, E) are displayed.

Pitches

Sets whether or not the note

names appear in the music

when the score is expanded.

Do, Re, Mi

(Fixed)

The pitch names (fixed Do) are displayed.

Sequencer (p. 134).

Do, Re, Mi

(Movable)

The syllable names (movable Do) are

displayed.

Clef L

Auto

Display is switched automatically.

G (treble) clef is displayed in the score.

F (bass) clef is displayed in the score.

Display is switched automatically.

G (treble) clef is displayed in the score.

F (bass) clef is displayed in the score.

Key is switched automatically.

Determines whether a treble or

bass clef is shown in the score

for the left-hand part.

G Clef

F Clef

Auto

Clef R

Determines whether treble or

bass clef is shown in the score

for the right-hand part.

G Clef

F Clef

Auto

Key

Score is displayed in the

specified key.

b x 5–0–

# x 6

Score is displayed in the specified key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

Item

Setting

User Part

User Track,

Parts 1–16

Selects the part to display when “User” is selected as

the part to be displayed.

Lower Part

Lower Track,

Parts 1–16

Selects the part to display when “Lower” is selected as

the part to be displayed.

Upper Part

Upper Track,

Part 1–16

Selects the part to display when “Upper” is selected as

the part to be displayed.

■ Saving Scores as Image Data

You can take scores that are displayed on the KR and save them to floppy disks. You

can also use saved image data to your computer.

NOTE

Other than for your own

personal enjoyment, use of the

scores that are output without

the permission of the

Insert the floppy disk onto which you want to save the image data in the

KR’s disk drive.

Use a floppy disk formatted on the KR.

by law.

For more on formatting disks, refer to p. 114.

Press the [Select/Listen to a Song] button to select a song.

Press the [Score Display] button.

The Score screen appears.

Touch <Option>.

Touch <Export>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-scorebmp.eps_60

Touch

for each parameter to set the range of the image data.

NOTE

Do not remove the floppy disk

while “save” is in progress.

Touch <Execute>.

The score is saved to the floppy disk as image data in BMP (bitmap) format.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

Practicing Songs with the Practice

Function

Try using the KR’s practice function to practice a song you like.

This feature makes it simple to specify the segment you want for repeated practice,

check your own performance against the score, and practice at a slower tempo.

❍ 1 Displaying the Score Screen

Selecting the song

Press the [Select/Listen to a Song] button to select the song you want to

practice.

For more on how to select songs, refer to p. 77.

Displaying the Score screen

Press the [Score Display] button.

The Score screen appears.

Touch <Tutor>.

The following “Tutor screen” appears.

fig.d-tutor1.eps_60

NOTE

When you select this function

after turning on the power, a

message screen like the one

shown in the figure at left

appears only once.

When the Message screen appears, touch <Close>.

❍ 2 Practicing

Listening to a reference of the Performance

First, listen to the song you are going to practice.

Once you’re familiar with the song, practice it a number of times along with the

example.

Touch <Reference>.

When the Message screen appears, touch <Close>.

Touch <

> on the screen.

The example performance is played back.

Touch <

> or <

> to rewind or fast forward within the practice range.

> to return to the beginning of the practice range.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

When the Transpose function

(p. 103) is set to ON, the

Touch the Notes

original tone is sounded when

you touch notes or <One

When you touch a note on the Practice screen, the KR plays that note.

When you trace along the displayed score with your finger, the KR plays the traced

segment.

Note> on the screen.

One Note

When you touch <

>, the KR plays the note currently indicated by the bouncing

> or < >, you can return or advance one note at a time

ball. When you touch <

to check the notes.

➝ On instruments equipped with the Automatic Keyboard function, the automatic

keyboard will move.

Recording Your Performance

Once you are able to play the song, try recording your own performance.

Changing the Performance

Played Back in the Check

Screen

Touch <Rec>.

When the Message screen appears, touch <Close>.

You can switch the

performance that is played

back by touching the score for

“User” or “Reference” in the

Check screen.

Touch < > on the screen.

You’ll hear a count, and recording begins.

Play along with the accompaniment.

When the keyboard is

displayed in the Check screen,

touch <User> or <Reference>

to switch the performance to

be played back.

Checking Your Performance

Compare your recorded performance with the example.

Touch <Check>.

When the Message screen appears, touch <Close>.

Touch <

> on the screen.

The Check screen display compares the example performance with your own

performance.

Analyze and practice any trouble spots.

❍ 3 Changing the practice settings

Immediately after turning on the power, all measures are set for practice at the

original tempo.

In the beginning, you’ll probably want to select specific phrases, and practice that

material repeatedly at a slower tempo.

Touch <Options>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

fig.d-tutoropt.eps_60

Switch the screens

Parameter

Value

Explanation

Set

Left Hand,

Part

Right Hand,

Both Hands

Selects the part or parts to be practiced.

When the Transpose function

(p. 103) is set to ON, the

Specifies measures for practice.

Most of the KR’s internal songs have markers set in order

to make repeated practice easier. You can specify the

markers’ range by touching <Prev> or <Next>.

Range

1–

original tone plays even if

“Tone” is set to “Do Re Mi.”

Original Tempo,

A Little Slower,

Slower,

Tempo

Selects the practice tempo.

Much Slower

When “On” is selected, song accompaniment parts are

also played back.

When “Quiet” is selected, song accompaniment parts are

played back at a lower volume.

Accomp

On, Quiet, Off

When “Off” is selected, song accompaniment parts are

muted.

Selects the tone played when the notes are touched.

When “Original” is selected, a original tone for the song is

selected.

When “Do Re Mi Voice” is selected, the notes are “sung”

as “Do-Re-Mi.”

Do Re Mi,

Original

Tone

Selects whether the score display or the keyboard display

is used in demonstrating the example performance and

your own recorded performance in the Check screen.

Check

Score, Keyboard

Touch the icon for the parameter you want to set.

The selections appear.

Touch the setting icon.

Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to set each of the parameters.

Set the tempo, practice range and other variables to the values you prefer.

Touch <Audition>.

The practice range is played back using the selected settings.

Touch <Exit>.

You’re returned to the Practice screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

Adjusting the Tempo

This changes the song and Music Style tempos.

If songs seem difficult to play at their original speed, you may find it helpful to first

practice with the tempo slowed down. Then, after becoming more familiar with the

song, you can practice it at a gradually faster tempo.

Changing the tempo has no effect on the pitch of the notes. And you can change the

tempo even when the song is in progress.

fig.panel3-2

Adjusting the tempo with the Tempo [-] [+] buttons

Pressing the [+] button once increases the tempo by one unit. Holding down the

button makes the tempo increase continuously.

Pressing the [-] button once decreases the tempo by one unit. Holding down the

button makes the tempo decrease continuously.

Pressing the [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style or song

to the basic tempo.

Adjusting the tempo with the dial

When the tempo is displayed at the upper-left area of the screen (except at the

Rhythm screen (p. 56)), you can use the dial to adjust the tempo.

Turn the dial clockwise to speed up the tempo.

Turn the dial counterclockwise to slow the tempo.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

■ Setting the Tempo by Pressing the Button in Time

(Tap Tempo)

You can also set the tempo by pressing the Performance Pad. This feature is called

“Tap Tempo.” By using the Tap Tempo function, you can quickly set the tempo you

are thinking of, without specifying the tempo in numerical terms.

fig.panel3-3

Assigning functions to the Performance Pads

Press the [User Function] button and watch the indicator light up.

fig.d-usrfunc.eps_60

You can also assign the Tap

Tempo function to the pedal,

and use the pedal to specify

the tempo. For details, refer to

“Assigning Functions to

Pedals and Performance Pads

(Pedal Setting/User

Touch

for the Performance Pad to which the function is

assigned, then select “Tap Tempo.”

Functions)” (p. 157).

Touch <Exit>; the tempo is indicated in the upper left of the screen.

Specifying the Tempo

Press the Pad to which “Tap Tempo” is assigned at least twice.

The tempo is set to the rhythm you used when tapping the button.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

■ Use Your Voice to Select the Tempo

(Vocal Tap Tempo)

Just as in “Tap Tempo Function” (p. 96), you can set tempos using your voice. This

feature is called “Vocal Tap Tempo.”

Vocal Tap Tempo does not

function well when the mic

volume is too low. Adjust the

volume level with the Mic

[Volume] knob.

Connect a microphone (p. 22).

Press the [Metronome] button.

Touch <Vocal Tap>.

fig.d-vocaltap.eps_60

You can start the song by

giving the count through the

microphone. For more detailed

information, refer to “Enabling

the start of songs and

automatic accompaniment

with the sound of your voice

(Vocal Count-In)” (p. 48).

Count to four (“One, two, three, four”) into the mic.

The tempo is set to the beat you used speaking into the microphone. The new tempo

setting is indicated in the screen.

After setting the tempo, touch <Exit> and you’re returned to the Metronome screen.

■ Playing Back at a Fixed Tempo (Tempo Mute)

If a song has tempo changes, it helps to practice the song first at a steady tempo.

Overriding tempo changes is called “Tempo Muting.”

Hold down the [

[+] buttons.

(Play/Stop)] button and press one of the Tempo [-]

When tempo muting is in effect, the tempo display appears in reverse video.

fig.d-tempmute.eps_60

When you play back the song, it will play at a constant tempo.

Cancel the tempo mute setting

Hold down the [

(Play/Stop)] button and press one of the Tempo [-]

[+] buttons.

Tempo muting is canceled.

Tempo Mute will also be cancelled when you select a different song.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

Match the Tempo Before You Begin

Playing (Count In)

When you’re playing along with a song, you can listen to the tempo before you start

playing by adding a count-in.

This audible count before the song playback is called a “Count-In.”

fig.panel3-3

Press the [Metronome] button and watch the indicator light up.

The Metronome screen (p. 52) appears.

If you are not using the metronome, press the [Metronome] button so its indicator

goes out.

Touch <Count In>.

The following “Count In settings screen” appears.

fig.d-cntin.eps_60

You can have a count sound be

played before the song starts

playing back by holding down

the [Reset] button while you

press the [Play/Stop]

button.The status of the

<Count In> settings won’t be

affected by your use of this

procedure.

Touch <Switch>

to set this to “ON.”

With this setting, two measures count down before the song playback starts.

Cancelling the Count In

In the Metronome screen, touch <Count In>.

For more about other settings

on the Count-In settings

screen, refer to “Settings for

the Count-In” (p. 160).

Touch <Switch>

to set this to “OFF.”

This sets the KR so that the count sound is not played.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

Muting Some Parts Before Playing

(Track Buttons)

With commercially available music files for piano lessons, the part for each hand can

be played back independently. This makes it easy to practice hands separately. For

example, you can follow along with your right hand while you listen to that same

right-hand part be played, or you can practice the left-hand part while the right-hand

part plays.

For more on music files, refer

to “Music Files That the KR

Can Use” (p. 201).

A music file for piano lessons may be assigned to the five Track buttons as shown below.

fig.trackbuttons.e

Drums/SFX

Accom-

Left-hand Right-hand

paniment

Part

By using these Track buttons, you can eliminate the sound of specific parts. This is

referred to as “muting.”

If a single Track button

includes more than one

instrument and you want to

mute just one of those

instruments, take a look at

“Modifying the Settings of

Each Part” (p. 128).

By recording your own performances to the Track Buttons in this fashion, you can

mute parts the same way. For details, refer to “Recording While Selecting the Track

Buttons (Redoing Recordings)” (p. 111).

Select the song that you wish to play back (p. 77).

Selecting the part that you’ll be playing

When a single Part is not

played, it is called “Minus

One.” Using Minus One, you

can mute out a particular

instrument and play the part

yourself.

Press any one of the Track buttons to make the button’s indicator light go

dark.

The sound for the selected part no longer plays.

For example, when practicing the right hand, press the [4/Upper] button.

When you play back the song, the right-hand performance will not sound. Practice

your right-hand performance along with the left-hand playback.

When playing back SMF files

for Roland Piano Digital series

instruments, and the [3/

Lower] button and [4/Upper]

button do not correctly control

the left/right-hand

performances, please change

the “Track Assign” settings.

Please refer to “Changing the

Parts Assigned to the Track

Buttons During SMF Playback

(Track Assign)” (p. 170).

Playing back a song

Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button.

The song will begin playing back.

The part you selected in step 2 will not sound.

Once again press the button you selected in step 2. The button’s indicator will light

up, and the part will be heard once again.

Even while the song is playing, you can press the track buttons to mute or un-mute

the sound.

Stopping the song

You can adjust the balance

between the keyboard and

song volume levels. Check out

“Adjusting the Volume

Balance for Each Part

Press the [

(Play/Stop)] button.

The song will stop.

(Balance)” (p. 75).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

Setting Markers for Repeated Practice

(Marker)

By setting markers at points in a song that you want to practice repeatedly, you can

then easily go to and repeat play back of the selected measures.

■ Placing a Marker within a Song

You can place two separate markers (Marker A and Marker B) in one song. These

markers are placed at the beginning of a measure to make the beginning and end of

a section of music. Placing markers is a handy way to start playback at the same

place as many times as you like. You can add markers or move to a marker even

while playback is in progress.

Access the Marker screen

First, select the song in which you’ll set the markers (p. 77).

Press the [Menu] button.

Touch

to switch the screens.

Touch <Marker>.

The Marker screen appears.

fig.d-marker.eps_60

Placing Markers

Go to the measure where you want to set a marker using the [

and [ (Fwd)] buttons.

(Bwd)]

Touch <- - -> for Marker A.

Marker A is placed at the beginning of the measure you selected.

“- - -” on the screen will change to the number of the measure where you placed the

marker.

Markers can also be assigned

in units of beats rather than

measures. Refer to “Placing a

Marker in the Middle of a

Measure” (p. 160).

In the same way, touch the Marker B <- - -> to set Marker B.

It is not possible to assign marker B to the same location or a measure before marker A.

100

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

■ Playback from a Marker Location

At the marker screen, touch the measure number of the marker you want

to go to.

fig.d-mark1-5.eps_60

Playback will start from wherever Marker A or Marker B are set.

With the song playing back, playback will continue if you touch Marker A or Marker

B on the Marker screen.

■ Erasing a Marker

Touch <Clear> for the marker you want to erase.

fig.d-markclear.eps_60

The marker disappears and the on-screen display changes to <- - ->.

■ Moving a Marker

You can move a marker that has been placed in a song. You can also move the section

of music defined by Markers A and B forward or back, without changing the number

of measures of marked.

On the Marker screen, touch

for the marker to be moved.

fig.d-mark1-5.eps_60

When you touch

, the marker is moved to a previous part of the song.

, the marker is moved to a later part of the song.

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

Moving Markers A and B without changing the interval between them

On the Marker screen, touch

in the middle of the screen.

For example, if you have Marker A set at the beginning of the fifth measure, and

Marker B set at the beginning of the ninth measure, when you touch

A is moved to the beginning of the first measure, and Marker B is moved to the

beginning of the fifth measure.

, Marker

Touch

to shift Marker A to the beginning of the ninth measure and Marker B

to the beginning of the thirteenth measure.

fig.markerA-B.e

10 11 12 13 14 15

Measure

Marker A

Measure

Marker B

10 11 12 13 14 15

Marker A

Marker B

■ Playing Back the Same Passage Over and Over

You can play back a particular passage over and over. This is convenient when you

want to focus on a passage.

First, set Marker A and Marker B to define the measures you want to

repeat.

For instance, suppose you want to play back the passage from the fifth through

eighth measures over and over. You should place Marker A at the beginning of the

fifth bar and Marker B at the beginning of the ninth bar.

fig.d-markrpt.eps_60

OFF

When <Repeat> is On

• If neither Marker A nor

Marker B is set, the song is

played back from the

Touch <Repeat> in the Marker screen.

beginning to the end.

The setting is made for repeated playback of the passage from marker A to marker B.

When you play the song, the marked section of music plays back repeatedly.

• If you only place marker A,

playback repeats from marker

A to the end of the song.

• If you only place marker B,

playback repeats from the

beginning of the song to

marker B.

Cancelling repeat playback

Touch <Repeat> in the Marker screen, and the icon returns to the

original color.

Repeat playback is cancelled.

102

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

Transposing Keyboard Sounds and

Songs Played Back (Transpose)

By using the “Transpose function,” you can transpose your performance without

changing the notes you play. For example, even if the song is in a difficult key with

many sharps ( ) or flats ( ), you can transpose it to a key that is easier for you to

read and play.

You can also use this function to play back a song in a different key.

When accompanying a vocalist, you can easily transpose the pitch to a range that is

comfortable for the singer, while still playing the notes as written (i.e., with the same

fingering positions).

fig.panel3-4

First make sure you have selected the song to be transposed (p. 77).

Press the [Transpose] button.

A “Transpose screen” like the one below appears.

fig.d-transpose.eps_60

Touch the Transpose icon.

Icon

Target

Settings Value

Keyboard sound

-6–0–5

Song to be played back

-24–0–24

-6–0–5

Keyboard sounds, songs being played back

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Practice Functions

Touch the screen keyboard or

value.

to select the transposition

Each time you press

When you touch

, it transposes the key by a semitone.

, a value of “0” is set.

You can also use the [-] [+] buttons or the dial to change the transposition value.

When you transpose a song or the keyboard, the [Transpose] button’s indicator

lights up. As you play the keyboard or play back the song, the notes are transposed.

When you touch <Exit>, the transposition remains in effect, and you’re returned to

the previous screen.

Cancelling Transposition

Press the [Transpose] button and the indicator light goes out.

The transposition value reverts

to “0” when you turn off the

power or select another song.

Transposition is cancelled.

The next time you press the [Transpose] button, illuminating the indicator, the music

is transposed by the value set here.

Example: Playing a song in E major while playing the keys

for C major

In this example, C is the root note in the key of C major. E, the root of E major, is the

third in C major. It is up four keys, including the black keys, so touch

enter “4” for the setting.

, then

fig.trans.e

If you play C E G

It will sound E G^#B

104

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

You can easily record performances using the five track buttons.

A recorded performance can be played back to listen to your own playing, or to add

NOTE

additional parts.

Recorded performances are

discarded when another song

is selected, or when the power

is turned off. Be sure to save

important performances on a

floppy disk. Take a look at

“Saving Songs” (p. 116).

You can use the KR to make the following kinds of recordings.

• Recording just your own keyboard performance (→ “Recording a New Song

(New Song)” (p. 106))

• Recording performances using Automatic Accompaniment

(→ “Recording With Accompaniment” (p. 108))

• Recording along with the internal songs and songs on floppy disks

(→ “Recording Along with a Song” (p. 110))

NOTE

• Re-recording (→ “Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing

Recordings)” (p. 111))

You cannot record with songs

on CDs.

❍ If the following screen appears

NOTE

If you’ve recorded a song or changed a song’s settings (see p. 128), the following

message appears on the screen when you try to choose another song.

You cannot save songs to CDs,

and you cannot delete songs

recorded to CDs. Furthermore,

you cannot format CDs.

If it’s okay to delete the song, touch <OK>.

If you do not want to delete the song, touch <Cancel>, and either save the song to a

floppy disk (p. 116) or register the song to the Favorites (p. 80).

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Recording a New Song (New Song)

This records keyboard performances without the use of the internal songs or

Automatic Accompaniment.

fig.panel4-1

Settings for recording performances

Press One Touch Program [Piano] button.

This sets the KR for performance without the use of Automatic Accompaniment.

Decide on the tone of the performance (p. 27).

Use the Tone buttons and the touch screen to select the tone.

When you have finished choosing the settings, touch <Exit> to display the Basic

screen.

Recording settings

Press the [

(Rec)] button.

You press the [

(Rec)] button and the following messages will appear, when a

song has already been recorded.

fig.m-rec.eps_60

If you select <New Song>

when a song has already been

recorded, the “OK to delete

song?” prompt appears in the

screen. For more detailed

information, refer to “If the

following screen appears” (p.

105).

Touch <New Song>.

This switches the KR to the settings required for recording a new song.

The KR is put in recording standby.

To cancel recording, press the [

(Rec)] button once more.

Decide on the tempo and beat.

If necessary, press the [Metronome] button to play the metronome.

When you have finished making the settings, touch <Exit> to display the Basic

screen.

Start recording

Press the [

(Play/Stop)] button.

A two-bar count-in plays, then recording starts.

Even without pressing the [

(Play/Stop)] button, recording starts when you

play the keyboard. There is no count-in played when you start by playing rather than

106

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

pushing the [

(Play/Stop)] button.

NOTE

When recording starts, the [

light up.

(Play/Stop)] and [

(Rec)] buttons’ indicators

Any performance that has

been recorded is deleted when

the power to the KR is turned

off. If you do not want a

performance deleted, then

save it to a floppy disk or to

Favorites. Refer to “Saving

Songs” (p. 116).

Stop recording

Press the [

(Play/Stop)] button.

Recording stops.

The performance is recorded to the [1/Whole] button.

Listening to the Recorded Performance

Press the [ (Reset)] button, then press the [

(Play/Stop)] button.

The recorded performance is played back.

When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, playback stops.

Track buttons assignments for recorded performances

When you record only a keyboard performance, the performance will be assigned to

the track buttons as follows.

•

Normal performance (playing a single Tone from the entire keyboard)

The performance is recorded to the [1/Whole] button.

Layer performance

The performance is recorded to the [1/Whole] button.

Split performance

The left-hand part of the keyboard is recorded to the [3/Lower] button, and the

right-hand part of the keyboard is recorded to the [4/Upper] button.

•

Layer performance and Split performance

The left-hand part of the keyboard is recorded to the [3/Lower] button, and layer

performance in the right-hand part of the keyboard is recorded to the [4/Upper]

button.

Drum set or sound effect performance

Recorded on the [R/Rhythm] button.

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Recording With Accompaniment

Try recording a performance along with the Automatic Accompaniment.

Settings for recording performances

Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.

This chooses the setting for Automatic Accompaniment.

Decide on the Music Style.

When you have finished choosing the settings, touch <Exit> to display the Basic

screen.

Recording Settings

Press the [

(Rec)] button.

You press the [

(Rec)] button and the following messages will appear, when a

song has already been recorded.

fig.m-rec.eps_60

If you select <New Song>

when a song has already been

recorded, the “OK to delete

song?” prompt appears in the

screen. For more detailed

information, refer to “If the

following screen appears” (p.

105).

Touch <New Song>.

This switches the KR to the settings required for recording a new song.

The KR is put in recording standby.

To cancel recording, press the [

(Rec)] button once more.

Decide on the tempo.

Start recording

Play a chord on the left-hand part of the keyboard.

You can change how recording

is stopped when recording a

performance with Automatic

Accompaniment. To learn

how, see “Changing How

Recording Stops” (p. 112).

An Automatic Accompaniment intro starts, and recording starts at the same time.

Stop recording

Press the [Intro/Ending] button.

An ending plays, then the Automatic Accompaniment, and recording stop at the

same time.

Listening to the recorded performance

Press the [ (Reset)] button, then press the [

(Play/Stop)] button.

The recorded performance plays back.

When you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button, playback stops.

108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Track buttons assignments for recorded performances

Performances that have been recorded using Automatic Accompaniment are

assigned to the track buttons as shown below.

Music Styles are composed of

five parts. For details, refer to

“Music Styles and Automatic

Accompaniment” (p. 58).

Track button

[R/Rhythm]

Performance Recorded

The rhythm part of an Automatic Accompaniment is

recorded here. In addition, drum sets and effect sounds

that are selected with the keys in a performance are

recorded to this track.

When using Piano Style accompaniment (p. 74), the

performance played on the keyboard is recorded here.

[1/Whole]

[2/ Bass

Accomp]

The Automatic Accompaniment bass part and

accompaniment part are recorded here.

When the KR is set so that sounds from performances on

the left-hand side of the keyboard are played while the

Automatic Accompaniment sounds (p. 73), your own

performance on the left-hand side of the keyboard is

recorded here.

[3/Lower]

[4/Upper]

Your own performance on the right-hand side of the

keyboard is recorded here.

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Recording Along with a Song

Try recording along with internal songs and songs on floppy disks.

Here, record your right-hand performance along with the song accompaniment.

Settings for recording performances

Select a song before you begin recording.

When you have selected the song, press the [Score Display] button to display the score.

For more on how to select songs, refer to p. 77; for instructions on displaying the

score, refer to p. 88.

Decide on the tone and tempo of the performance.

After choosing the settings, touch <Exit> to display the Basic screen.

The song tempo is stored

within the song you selected.

Recording settings

Press the [

(Rec)] button.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.m-rec.eps_60

Touch <Add On>.

With this setting, you can record while listening to the selected song.

Selecting the track to record

Press the track button for the track that you want to record (i.e., the track

that you want to play yourself).

NOTE

The indicator of the button you pressed will blink, and the KR enters recording-

standby mode.

Only drum sets or SFX set are

recorded to the [R/Rhythm]

button.

Since in this example we will record the right-hand performance, press the [4/

Upper] button to make the button’s indicator light blink.

To cancel recording, press the [

(Rec)] button once more.

Start recording

Press the [

(Play/Stop)] button.

A two-bar count-in plays, then recording starts.

Even without pressing the [

(Play/Stop)] button, recording starts when you

play the keyboard. There is no count-in played when you start by playing the

keyboard instead of pushing the [

(Play/Stop)] button.

(Play/Stop)] and [ (Rec)] buttons’ indicators light.

When recording starts, the [

Stop recording

Press the [

(Play/Stop)] button.

Recording stops.

110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Listening to the recorded performance

Press the [

(Reset)] button, then press the [

(Play/Stop)] button.

The recorded performance is played back.

Recorded performances are

recorded to <0: (Song Name)>.

When you press the [

(Play/Stop)] button, recording stops.

Recording While Selecting the Track

Buttons (Redoing Recordings)

When you want to re-record, specify the Track button for the performance you want

to re-record, and then record again.

When you want to record over

again after deleting all of the

previous recording, refer to

“Erasing Recorded

When you select a previously recorded Track button and re-record, everything from

the point at which you begin recording up to the point where you stop recording will

be replaced by the newly re-recorded performance.

Performances” (p. 112).

Use the [

(Bwd)] and [

(Fwd)] buttons to go to the measure

where you want to begin recording.

Press the [

(Rec)] button.

The song tempo is stored

within the song you selected. If

you want to change the tempo

of the recorded song, refer to

“Changing the Tempo of

Recorded Songs” (p. 142) and

“Changing the Tempo Within

the Song” (p. 142).

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.m-rec.eps_60

Touch <Add on>.

Press the Track button for the track you want to re-record.

The indicator for the selected Track button starts blinking.

The [

(Play/Stop)] button’s indicator flashes, and the KR is put in recording

standby.

To cancel recording, press the [

(Rec)] button once more.

Press the [

(Play/Stop)] button to begin recording.

Rerecording the accompaniment part of automatic accompaniment

When rerecording an Automatic Accompaniment performance, set Sync Start (p.

66), then specify a chord or press the [Start/Stop] button.

Press the [

(Play/Stop)] button to stop recording.

If you also want to rerecord the ending of the Automatic Accompaniment, press the

[Intro/Ending] button.

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Erasing Recorded Performances

You can use the following method to delete a recorded performance.

Hold down the [Select/Listen to a Song] button and press the [

button.

(Rec)]

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.m-songdel.eps_60

Touch <OK>.

This deletes the recorded song.

When you touch <Cancel>, the previous screen appears and the recorded song is not

erased.

■ Erasing the Performance on Specific Tracks

You can select and erase performances on specific tracks.

Hold down the Track button for the track containing the performance

you want to erase, then press the [ (Rec)] button.

The Track button’s light goes dark, and the recorded music is erased.

Changing How Recording Stops

When recording an Automatic Accompaniment performance, you can change the

accompaniment and the way recording mode stops.

Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light up.

The Menu screen appears.

Touch <Rec Mode>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-recmode.eps_60

112

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Touch <Rec Stop>

“Composer Stop.”

to switch between “Arranger Stop” and

Display

Explanation

Recording stops at the same time the Automatic

Accompaniment stops.

Arranger Stop

Recording does not stop, even when the Automatic

Composer Stop

Accompaniment stops. When you press the [

Stop)] button, recording stops.

(Play/

Recording Songs Starting with Pickups

You can record songs that start with pickup beats (songs that start on a beat other

than the measure’s first beat).

fig.PU.e

Count Sound

Measure

-2

Recording begins here

Carry out Steps 1–4 on p. 106 to prepare for recording.

If the [ (Rec)] button’s indicator is not lit, press the [

(Rec)] button so the

indicator is lit.

The KR is put in recording standby.

Press the [

(Bwd)] button one time.

The measure number in the upper right of the Basic screen changes to “PU,” and the

KR is set to record a song starting with a pickup.

fig.d-pu.eps_60

Start recording. After a one-measure count, recording begins.

113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Using Floppy Disks

You can use the KR’s disk drive to save songs to floppy disks and listen to

If you’re using the disk drive

for the first time, be sure to

read the important notes on

p. 6.

commercial music files.

■ Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk

Inserting a floppy disk

With the front of the floppy disk facing up, insert the floppy disk in the

disk drive slot until there is an audible click.

NOTE

fig.diskdrive.e

Never remove the floppy

disk while it is being read or

written. Doing so will scratch

the magnetic surface of the

floppy disk, making it

Indicator

Eject Button

Floppy Disk

unusable. (The disk drive

indicator will light brightly

while data is being read or

written. Normally, it will be lit

dimly or will be dark.)

Removing a floppy disk

Press the Eject button.

NOTE

The end of the floppy disk comes out of the slot. Grasp the edge of the floppy disk

and gently pull it out.

When a floppy disk is

initialized, all of the data

saved on the floppy disk is

erased. If you’re formatting a

used floppy disk for reuse,

be sure to check first to

make sure the floppy disk

doesn’t contain any data you

don’t want to lose.

■ Formatting Floppy Disks (Format)

A newly purchased floppy disk, or a floppy disk that has been used by another

device cannot be used as is. Such floppy disks must be “formatted” (initialized) for

use with the KR.

If a floppy disk is in a format that doesn’t match the format of this unit, you won’t be

able to use that floppy disk.

fig.panel4-3

First make sure that the protect tab of the floppy disk is in the “Write (write enable)”

position.

fig.DiskProtect.e

Rear side of the disk

Write

(can write new data onto disk)

Write Protect Tab

Protect

(prevents writing to disk)

114

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.

Press the [Disk] button.

Touch <File>.

A “Song File screen” like the one below appears.

fig.d-songfile.eps_60

Touch <Format Disk>.

The following screen appears.

fig.d-format.eps_60

NOTE

Don’t try to take the floppy

disk out of the disk drive until

the formatting process is

finished.

Touch <Cancel> to go back to the previous screen.

NOTE

Touch <OK>.

If “Error” appears on screen,

take a look at “Error

Initialization of the floppy disk begins.

Messages” (p. 183).

When initialization is completed, you’re returned to the previous screen.

115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Saving Songs

A recorded performance is discarded when you switch off the power or choose

another song. Storing recorded performances and other data to floppy disks or the

Favorites is called “saving.” Be sure to save important songs to floppy disks or

Favorites.

When using a new floppy disk,

first initialize (format) the

floppy disk on the KR. Take a

look at “Formatting Floppy

Disks (Format)” (p. 114).

What are “Favorites?”

You can register songs you are currently practicing or particularly like to

“Favorites,” allowing you to select these songs easily (p. 80).

When you register a song on a floppy disk to Favorites, you can then play back the

song without inserting the floppy disk in the disk drive.

If a recorded performance is saved to Favorites, the performance won’t be erased

when the power is turned off.

NOTE

Some commercially available

music files cannot be saved

because they are copy

protected.

Preparations for Saving Data

When saving to floppy disks, first check to make sure that the floppy disk’s protect

tab is set to the “Write” position (p. 114), then insert the floppy disk in the disk drive.

Press the [Disk] button.

Touch <File>.

If not handled with care, a

floppy disk can be damaged,

or the data on it become

corrupted, making playback

impossible. We recommend

saving your songs on two

different floppy disks.

Touch <Save>.

The following “Save Song screen” appears.

fig.d-songsave.eps_60

When you want to clear all of

the content saved to the

“Favorites” and restore the

settings to the original factory

condition on the KR, refer to

“Formatting the User

Memory” (p. 165).

116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Determining the name of the song to be saved

Touch <Rename>.

The following “Rename screen” appears.

fig.d-songname.eps_60

When you touch

, the cursor moves.

When you touch the icon for the letter or character to be input, the character appears

at the cursor location. For example touching <ABC> in succession cycles you

through the available choices in that character group (“A”→”B”→”C”...).

Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters through “English (upper case),”

“English (lower case),” “numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper case).”

When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor position is deleted.

When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor position.

When you have finished with the name, touch <Exit>.

Determining the Save Destination

Touch <Disk> or <Favorites>.

Touch <Disk> if you are saving to a floppy disk; touch <Favorites> if you are saving

to Favorites.

Touch

to select the save-destination song number.

If a song name is displayed with a number a song is already saved to that number.

If you select a number with a previously saved song and then proceed to save a new

song, the previously saved song will be erased. If you do not want to lose a saved

song, select a number with no song name indicated in the save-destination column.

117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Selecting the tone compatibility format (when saving to floppy disks)

Touch <KR> or <MT>.

Some Tones are unique to the KR. Data that is recorded using these tones may not

play back correctly on other Roland Digital Pianos or Music Players. When you want

to save data so that it can be played back on another devices, save the data with

“MT” set as the Tone compatibility format.

Display

Explanation

The song is saved as data capable of reproducing performances with

richness of expression using this unit’s special Tones.

Data is saved in a form that can also be played on the Roland Digital

Pianos or Music Players other than this unit.

You can listen to songs saved in this format on the Roland HP-G/R

series and KR series keyboards as well as on Roland MT series devices.

<Note>

When data saved with “MT” as the Tone compatibility format is played back on this

instrument, some of the nuances that were part of the performance at the time the

data was recorded may be altered.

Even with data saved with “MT” as the Tone compatibility format, an exact

reproduction of the original performance may be unobtainable when using GS

devices other than Roland Pianos and Music Players.

Save

NOTE

Touch <Save> or <As SMF> to start saving.

You can only save songs in one

format on a single floppy disk.

The resulting file format will be different depending on whether <Save> or <As

SMF> is chosen, as described below.

NOTE

Never turn off the power

while the saving operation is

in progress. Doing so will

damage the KR’s internal

memory, making it unusable.

Display

Explanation

Saves the song in this unit’s format. You can listen to songs saved

in this format on the Roland HP-G/R series and KR series

keyboards as well as on Roland MT series devices. This format is

called “i-format”.

Save

Saves the song as an SMF (Standard MIDI Files). Songs saved in

this SMF format can be listened to on many instruments that can

play SMF music files (p. 201).

A song recorded using commercial music files can’t be saved in

“Save As SMF” format for reasons of copyright protection.

Save As SMF

It’s a good idea to get into the

habit of moving the write-

protect tab on the floppy disk

to the “Protect” position when

you’ve finished saving your

data. Keeping the tab at

The time required for saving ranges from several seconds to half a minute or more.

Don’t take the floppy disk out of the disk drive until the saving process is finished.

Touch <Exit> to return to the Song File screen.

“Protect” prevents operations

that could erase your songs by

mistake.

NOTE

Depending on the playback

instrument, some notes may

drop out or sound different.

118

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Deleting Saved Songs

This deletes songs that have been saved on floppy disks, or to Favorites.

To delete a song on a floppy disk, first insert the floppy disk in the disk drive.

Press the [Disk] button.

Touch <File>.

The “Song File screen” appears.

Touch <Delete>.

A “Delete Song screen” appears.

fig.d-songdel.eps_60

Touch <Disk> or <Favorites>.

Touch <Disk> if you are deleting a song from a floppy disk; touch <Favorites> if you

are deleting a song from Favorites.

Touch

to select the song to be deleted.

Touch <Delete>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.m-filedel.eps_60

Touching <Cancel> cancels the operation.

NOTE

Touch <OK>.

Never turn off the power

while the operation is in

progress. Doing so will

damage the KR’s internal

memory, making it unusable.

The selected song is deleted.

Do not eject the floppy disk from the disk drive until the operation is finished.

Touch <Exit> to return to the Song File screen.

119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

Copying Songs on Floppy Disks to

Favorites

You can take songs saved on floppy disks and copy them to Favorites.

NOTE

You can also copy songs in Favorites to floppy disks.

You cannot copy songs on CDs

to Favorites.

Insert the floppy disk with the song to be copied in the disk drive.

Press the [Disk] button.

Touch <File>.

Touch <Copy>.

The following “Copy Song screen” appears.

fig.d-songcopy.eps_60

Specifying the Copy Source

Touch the <Disk>

to select the song you want to copy.

When “Copy All” is selected, all of the songs on the floppy disk are copied to

Favorites.

Specifying the Copy Destination

Touch <Favorites>

song.

to select the copy destination for the

If a song name is displayed with a number, a song is already saved to that number.

If you select a number with previously saved song data and proceed to copy to that

location, the previously saved song will be erased. If you don’t want to erase a

previously saved song, choose a number with no song name appears in the

destination column.

NOTE

Never turn off the power

while the operation is in

progress. Doing so will

damage the KR’s internal

memory, making it unusable.

Touch <Execute>.

Do not eject the floppy disk from the disk drive until the copy is finished.

The song from the floppy disk is copied to Favorites.

120

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance

■ Copying Songs Saved in Favorites to Floppy

Disks

Songs that’ve been saved to Favorites can be copied onto floppy disks.

In this case, in the “Copy Song screen” in Step 4 above, touch the large arrow icon in

the center to point the arrow upwards. This sets the KR to copy the song in Favorites

to the floppy disk.

fig.d-songcopy2.eps_60

The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying songs from floppy

disks to Favorites.

Some song data cannot copy

because they are copy

protected.

121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 User Program Registration

Determining the name of the User Programs

Saving Performance Settings

4. ^{Touch <Rename>.}

(User Program)

A “Rename screen” like the following appears.

fig.d-upgname.eps_50

Any collection of settings, including those describing the

current status of your data selections or settings Automatic

Accompaniment, can be saved to the [User Program] button.

You can then call up the stored settings by pressing the [User

Program] button. Saving your preferred combinations of

Music Styles and Tones, as well as other frequently used

settings, makes it more convenient.

You can register up to 36 User Programs to the KR.

fig.panel_UPG

When you touch

, the cursor moves.

When you touch the icon for the character to be input,

the character appears of the cursor potion.

For example, touching the <ABC> icon in succession

cycles you through the available choices in that character

group (A→B→C→A...).

→ For more on what can be registered to a User Program, refer to

“Parameters Stored in the User Program” (p. 200).

Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters

through “English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”

“numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper

case).”

1. ^{Set the Music Style, Tone, and other data until the}

settings are the way you want them.

2. ^{Press the [User Program] button.}

When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor

position is deleted.

A “User Program screen” like the one shown below

appears.

fig.d-upg.eps_50

When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor

position.

5. ^{When you have finished with the name, touch <Exit>.}

You’re returned to the Write User Program screen.

Determining the write destination

6. ^Touch

to select the write-destination

number.

7. ^{Touch <Write>.}

3. ^{Touch <Write>.}

The confirmation message appears.

A “Write User Program screen” like the following

8. ^{Touch <OK>.}

appears.

fig.d-upgwrite.eps_50

The current performance settings are saved to the [User

Program] button.

* Never turn off the power while the display indicates

<Writing...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal

memory, making it unusable.

→ You can restore the content registered to the [User Program]

button to the original factory settings. Refer to “Restoring the

Factory Settings (Factory Reset)” (p. 165).

122

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 User Program Registration

Calling Up Saved User

Programs

You can easily call up settings saved to the [User Program]

button.

Saving the User Program Sets

You can take the 36 User Programs saved to the [User

Program] button and save them as a set to a floppy disk, or to

user memory.

When saving to a floppy disk, first insert a floppy disk in the

disk drive.

1. ^{Press the [User Program] button.}

The “User Program screen” appears.

→ For more on working with the disk drive, refer to “Using

2. ^{Touch the name of the User Program you want to call}

Floppy Disks” (p. 114).

up.

1. ^{Press the [User Program] button.}

2. ^{Touch <File>.}

When you touch the name of the User Program, the

buttons or other performance settings instantly change

to the previously saved settings.

3. Touch <Save>.

A “Save User Program screen” like the following

■ Changing the Way User

appears.

fig.d-upgsave.eps_50

Programs Are Called Up

When calling up User Programs, you can prevent the settings

for Automatic Accompaniment from switching by not

touching the touch screen for a few moments.

1. ^{Press the [User Program] button.}

2. ^{Touch <Option> in the lower part of the screen.}

A settings screen like the following appears.

fig.d-upgopt.eps_50

Giving a name to a set of User Programs

4. ^{Touch <Rename>.}

The Rename screen appears.

When you touch

, the cursor moves.

When you touch the icon for the character to be input,

the character appears at the cursor position. For example

touching the <ABC> icon in succession cycles you

through the available choices in that character group

(A→B→C→A...).

3. Touch <Instant> or <Delayed> to select the setting.

Display

Instant

Explanation

Immediately after a User Program name is

touched, the Automatic Accompaniment

settings also switch.

Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters

through “English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”

“numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper

case).”

The Automatic Accompaniment settings

switch after you touch and road the User

Program name for a few moments.

Delayed

When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor

position is deleted.

When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor

position.

Touch <Exit> to return to the User Program screen.

5. ^{When you have finished with the name, touch <Exit>.}

123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 User Program Registration

Determining the save destination

6. ^{Touch <Disk> or <User>.}

■ Loading Saved User Program

Sets

User Programs that have been saved on floppy disks or in

user memory can be called up, on an individual set basis, to

the [User Program] button.

Touch <Disk> if you are saving to a floppy disk; touch

<User> if you are saving to user memory.

7. ^Touch

to select the save-destination User

Note that calling up these User Programs results in the

deletion of all User Programs currently recorded to the [User

Program] button.

Program number.

If a User Program set name is displayed, a User Program

set saved to that saved to that number is already.

When loading a set of User Programs from a floppy disk,

first insert the floppy disk in the disk drive.

If you select a number with previously saved User

Program set data, then save a new set of data to that

same number, the older User Program set will be

deleted. If you don’t want to lose any previously saved

User Programs, select a number in the save-destination

column that does not yet have a name.

→ For more on working with the disk drive, refer to “Using

Floppy Disks” (p. 114).

1. ^{Press the [User Program] button.}

2. ^{Touch <File>.}

Save

3. ^{Touch <Load>.}

8. ^{Touch <Save> to begin the save.}

A “Load User Program screen” like the following

appears.

fig.d-upgload.eps_50

Touch <Exit> to return to the User Program File screen.

* Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from

the disk drive while the operation is in progress.

Doing so will damage the KR’s internal memory,

making it unusable.

→ When clearing the set of saved User Programs, refer to

“Deleting Saved User Program Sets” (p. 125).

Specifying the set of User Programs to be

loaded

4. ^{Touch <}

> (Disk) or <

> (User).

Touch <

> if you are loading User Programs from a

floppy disk; touch <

> if you are loading User

Programs from the user memory.

5. ^{Touch the name of User Program to load.}

6. ^{Touch <Load>.}

The confirmation message appears.

7. Touch <OK>.

The selected User Programs are loaded to the [User

Program] button.

* Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from

the disk drive while the operation is in progress.

Doing so will damage the KR’s internal memory,

making it unusable.

124

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 User Program Registration

Copying Sets of User Programs on

Floppy Disks to the User Memory

Deleting Saved User

Program Sets

You can delete individual User Program sets saved to floppy

disks or in user memory.

You can copy sets of User Programs saved on floppy disks

and to user memory.

You can also copy sets of User Programs saved in user

memory and to floppy disks.

When deleting a set of User Programs on a floppy disk, first

insert the floppy disk in the disk drive.

1. ^{Insert the floppy disk with the settings to be copied in}

→ For more on the use of the disk drive, refer to “Using Floppy

the disk drive.

Disks” (p. 114).

2. ^{Touch the [User Program] button.}

3. ^{Touch <File>.}

1. ^{Press the [User Program] button.}

2. ^{Touch <File>.}

4. ^{Touch <Copy>.}

3. ^{Touch <Delete>.}

A “Copy User Programs screen” like the following

A “Delete User Program screen” like the following

appears.

fig.d-upgcopy.eps_50

appears.

fig.d-upgdel.eps_50

Specifying the copy source

4. ^{Touch <Disk> or <User>.}

5. ^{Touch <Disk>}

to select the set of User

Touch <Disk> if you are deleting User Programs from a

floppy disk; touch <User> if you are deleting User

Programs from the user memory.

Programs you want to copy.

When “All” is selected, all of the sets of User Programs

on the floppy disk are copied to user memory.

5. ^Touch

to select the set of User Programs

Specifying the copy destination

to be deleted.

6. ^{Touch <Delete>.}

6. ^{Touch <User>}

to select the copy

destination for the set of User Programs.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.msg_filedel

If a User Program name is displayed, already a User

Program saved to that number is already.

If you select a number with User Programs data, and

then copy data to that number, the previously saved

User Programs are deleted. If you do not want to delete

the saved User Programs, select a number in the save-

destination column for which no name is displayed.

7. ^{Touch <OK>.}

7. ^{Touch <Execute>.}

The selected User Programs are deleted.

Touching <Cancel> cancels deleting the file.

The set of User Programs on the floppy disk is saved to

user memory.

* Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from

the disk drive while the operation is in progress.

Doing so will damage the KR’s internal memory,

making it unusable.

* Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from

the disk drive while the operation is in progress.

Doing so will damage the KR’s internal memory,

making it unusable.

125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 User Program Registration

■ Coping Sets of User Programs

Stored in the User Memory to

Floppy Disks

Simultaneously Switching

User Program and

Transmitting PC Numbers

You can take User Program sets saved in user memory and

copy them to floppy disks.

You can have PC (Program Change) numbers be transmitted

to an external MIDI device when you switch the User

Program on the KR.

In this case, in the Copy User Programs screen in Step 4

above, touch the large arrow icon in the center to get the

arrow to point up. This sets the KR to copy the User Program

set in the user memory to the floppy disk.

You can register PC number settings to each of the User

Programs, just as you can with button settings and other

settings preferences.

The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying

sets of User Program set from disks to user memory.

Calling Up the Performance Settings to Be Set

1. ^{Press the [User Program] button, then touch the name}

of the performance setting you want to set.

Using the Pedal to Switch

User Programs

You can use the Pedal as a dedicated switch for selecting

User Programs in order.

Setting the Transmission of the PC

2. ^{Touch <PC Set> in the User Program screen.}

The following type of screen appears.

fig-upgPCset.eps_50

1. ^{Press the [User Program] button.}

2. ^{Touch <Option> in the lower part of the screen.}

3. ^Touch

to display screen like the

following.

fig.d-upgopt.eps_50

3. ^Touch

for the parameter and make the

settings.

Display

Description

This prevents the PC number from being

transmitted (Off), or sets the transmission

channel (Channel 1–16).

Tx PC

Channel

4. ^Touch

Display

to select the setting.

Explanation

Bank

Select MSB

Sets the Bank Select MSB.

Sets the Bank Select LSB.

You can use a function assigned to the

pedal.

Off

Bank

Select LSB

The left pedal is dedicated to switching

User Programs.The function assigned to

the left pedal cannot be used.

Left Pedal

Program

Change

Sets the Program Change messages

(Program Numbers).

The center pedal is dedicated to

switching User Programs.The function

assigned to the center pedal cannot be

used.

4. ^{Touch <Exit>.}

Center Pedal

The User Program screen returns to the display.

Touch <Write> to save the setting to the User Program.

For more detailed information, refer to “Saving

Performance Settings (User Program)” (p. 122).

Touch <Exit> to return to the User Program screen.

126

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

Commercially Available Music Files

Commercially available song file recorded in Roland’s SMF

Multitrack Recording with 16

Parts (16-Track Sequencer)

format is also composed of sixteen parts.

By loading the song file from the floppy disk and using the

Multitrack recording always you to listen to previously

16-Track Sequencer, you can then also edit the song file.

recorded material while continuing to add performances of

→ Although with commercially available Roland SMF music

data, Part 11 is included in the [2/Bass Accomp] track button,

other tracks match to the corresponding Track buttons.

other parts.

The KR is capable of multitrack recording of up to sixteen

parts. Since each part’s performance is recorded using one

tone, you can layer performances, using up to sixteen tones

for the data in one song. The function used to layer these

sixteen parts, one at a time, is called the “16-Track

With some commercially available music files, you cannot edit

the data.

Sequencer.”

fig.16track.e

■ The 16-Track Sequencer Screen

When recording with 16-track Sequencer, display the 16-

track Sequencer screen.

16-Track Sequencer

You can record performances for up to 16 parts,

overlaying them part by part, to create a single song.

1. ^{Press the [Menu] button.}

Part 1

Flute Part

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

The Menu screen appears.

Bass Part

2. ^{Touch <16trk Sequencer>.}

Piano Part (left hand)

Piano Part (right hand)

A “16-track Sequencer screen” like the one shown below

•

appears.

Part 16

fig.d-16tr.eps_50

16-Track Sequencer and Track Buttons

In addition to the “16-Track Sequencer” function, the “Track

Buttons” (p. 99) are another of the unit’s playing/recording

functions.

These five “Track buttons” are used for organizing the 16-

Track Sequencer’s sixteen parts. This allows you to use the

16-Track Sequencer to add more sounds to performances

recorded with the Track buttons, and make even more

detailed edits of the songs.

You can easily play back the original song data with the 16-

Track Sequencer, mute parts by pressing the Track buttons,

and more.

Icon

Explanation

Touch to select the part to be recorded, or the

part whose settings are to be changed. The

button for the selected part changes color.

<1>–

<16>

The Track buttons correspond to 16-track sequencer parts as

shown below.

This Part to be played back

Track button

[R/Rhythm]

[1/Whole]

Part

D (10), S (11)

The Part not to be played back (Muted Part)

[2/Bass Accomp]

[3/Lower]

2, 5–9, 12–16

Parts that do not have performance data

recorded to them.

[4/Upper]

Solo

Mute

Only the selected Part is played back.

Since the 16-Track Sequencer records one tone to one part,

you cannot use Layer performance (p. 30), Split performance

(p. 31), or other such functions to record two or more tones

simultaneously. Also, you can’t record the performance with

Automatic Accompaniment.

This allows you to prevent the sound for the

selected part from playing.

The performance data for the selected part is

deleted.

Clear

When you want to record with Automatic Accompaniment,

then you should use the Track buttons for recording. (Refer

to “Recording With Accompaniment” (p. 108))

This displays the Part Settings screen, in

which you can make detailed settings for each

part. For details refer to p. 128.

Options

127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

Icon

Explanation

4. ^Touch

for the corresponding item to change

The Tone Set screen appears. For details refer

to p. 129.

the setting.

Tone Set

You can also change the values by touching each

parameter slider and then using the [-] [+] buttons and

the dial.

■ Modifying the Settings of Each Part

You can change the Tones and volume, as well as mute the

playback, for each individual part in songs recorded with the

16-track Sequencer and the internal songs.

Display

Explanation

→ Because commercially available Roland SMF music files are

also made up of 16 Parts, you can change the settings for the

individual Parts and play them back in the same way.

Volume

Reverb

Chorus

Changes the volume level.

Changes the amount of reverb effect

applied to the sound.

First, select the song for which the settings are to be made

(p. 77).

Changes the amount of chorus applied.

Shifts the direction from which the sound is

heard between left and right.

1. ^{Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 127).}

2. ^{Touch the screen to choose the Part for which you want}

Panpot

Touch

to shift the sound to the right,

to shift it to the left.

to make settings.

or touch

Change the settings for the selected Part.

Display

Solo

Function

What’s Panpot?

Only the selected Part is played back.

Panpot is the control that determines the placement of

the sound in the stereo sound field between left and

right speakers. By altering the Panpot setting, you can

change the perceived location of the sound between the

left and right speakers.

Toggles playback of the selected Part to on

or off.

Mute

Clear

The performance data for the selected part is

deleted.

When you touch <Clear>, a message asking you to confirm the

deletion appears. To erase the recorded sound, touch <OK>. If

you don’t want to erase the recorded sound, touch <Cancel>.

Once a performance has been erased, it can’t be restored.

When you press the [

(Play/Stop)] button, you

hear what the song sounds like as you change the

settings. When you press the [

(Play/Stop)]

button, playback of the song stops.

You cannot touch <Clear> during playback of the song.

3. ^{Touch <Options> to make more detailed settings for}

5. ^Touch

to make settings for other parts.

the selected part.

The Part name appears at the upper part of the screen.

Change the settings for other parts as needed.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-16trpart.eps_50

6. ^{Hold down the [}

(Rec)] button and press the [

(Reset)] button.

This operation set the changes in the settings.

The song can then be saved to a floppy disk or to user

memory.

If you do not want to delete a song after changing the

settings for the individual parts, save the song to a

floppy disk or to user memory (p. 116).

You cannot save the settings that determine whether sounds

for each individual part are played or not (solo and mute).

You can change the Tone for the selected Part by

pressing a Tone button while this screen is displayed.

When selecting Part 10 or 11, you can touch <Drum Set>

to select the drum set or effect sound.

The Part name and tone name are displayed at the top of

the screen.

128

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

If the following message appears

■ Recording a Performance

❍ Step 1 Prepare for Recording

Selecting the song to record

If you try to display another screen after you’ve changed the

song’s settings for each Part, a message like the one below

may appear.

fig.m-songmod.eps

1. ^{Press the [Select/Listen to a Song] button.}

2. ^{Touch the genre of the song you’re recording.}

When recording a new song, try recording to

“Favorites.”

3. ^{Select the song number to which you want to record.}

If recording a new song, touch <0: (Song Name)> to

Touch <OK> to change the song’s settings.

select <0: New Song>.

fig.d-songnew.eps_50

Touch <Cancel> to discard the changes you’re made.

■ Getting the Most Suitable Part

Tones for the Musical Genre

(Tone Set)

“Tone Set” is a function that automatically assigns the most

suitable tones for the selected musical style.

When you’re creating a song, you can assign Tone sets, then

change the Tones to suit the ideas you have for your song.

1. ^{Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 127).}

→ If a song has already been recorded, or if the song’s settings

have been changed, the “OK to delete Song?” confirmation

prompt appears when you touch <0: (Song Name)>. For more

information, take a look at “If the following screen appears” (p.

105).

2. Touch <Tone Set> in the lower part of the screen.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-16trtone.eps_50

Determining the song’s beat and tempo

4. ^{Press the [Metronome] button to select the beat (p. 52).}

→ You can’t change a song’s beat once it’s been recorded. If you

want to compose a song whose beat changes partway through

the song, take a look at “Changing the Beat in the Middle of a

Song (Beat Map)” (p. 141).

5. ^{Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to set the basic}

3. ^{Touch the screen to select a musical genre.}

4. ^{Touch <Exit>.}

tempo of the song.

If you do not need the metronome sound, press the

[Metronome] button once more.

The 16-track Sequencer screen appears.

Tones for each part are assigned automatically.

→ When using song data that has already been recorded, the

recording is made using the source song’s basic tempo. To

change the basic tempo of a song, please refer to “Changing the

Tempo of Recorded Songs” (p. 142).

In some genres, some parts may have no tone assigned.

129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

❍ Step 2 Start Recording

Changing the Recording

Method (Rec Mode)

You can use any of the four methods below to record with

the KR.

If necessary, choose a recording method.

For more on how to record, refer to p. 130.

If you record for the first time, there’s no need to select the

recording method.

Although you will normally be using “Replace Recording,”

where previously recorded material is erased when new

sounds are recorded, you’ll find that you can record songs

easily by using this method in combination with other

recording methods.

Selecting the Part to Record

1. ^{Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 127).}

2. ^{Touch the number for the Part you want to record.}

The button for the touched part being set turns orange.

Replace Recording (p. 131)

You can only record drum sounds or effect sounds on

Part D (10) or Part S (11). You can select drum sets or

effect sounds by selecting Part D (10) or Part S (11) and

touching <Drum Set>.

This is the normal method for recording. New material is

recorded as previously recorded material is erased.

Mix Recording (p. 131)

Selecting the sound to play

New notes are recorded on top of notes previously recorded.

3. ^{Use the Tone buttons to choose a Tone to play.}

This convenient feature makes it easy for you to record

melodies over prerecorded accompaniment.

After selecting a Tone, touch <Exit> to call up the “16-

Track Sequencer screen.”

Loop Recording (p. 132)

Recording the performance

Specified measures are recorded repeatedly, while new notes

are combined with existing music. A convenient feature for

creating rhythm parts. Loop Recording allows you to record

over and over within a selected segment, adding a different

percussion sound with each pass.

4. ^{Press the [}

(Reset)] button.

Recording will start at the beginning of the song.

If you want to record from a point other than the

beginning, use the [

(Bwd)] and [

(Fwd)]

buttons to select another measure to begin.

Punch-in Recording (p. 133)

5. ^{Press the [}

(Rec)] button and watch the indicator is

You can re-record only a specified passage as you listen to a

recorded performance.

light up.

→ Immediately after the power is turned on, Replace Recording is

The KR is put in recording standby.

selected.

6. ^{Press the [}

(Play/Stop)] button.

A two-bar count-in sounds, then recording starts.

You cannot use the performance pads when recording with the

16-track sequencer.

7. ^{Press the [}

(Play/Stop)] button.

Recording stops.

When one part is recorded, continue by selecting and

recording another part. Continue layering parts to finish

recording the song.

→ You only need to follow the procedure described in “Step 1 –

Prepare for Recording” when you’re recording the first Part.

For the second Part and after, you can skip step 1 and proceed

from “Step 2 Start Recording.”

Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the

power to the KR is turned off. It is a good idea to save song

data to a floppy disk or user memory. For more information,

refer to “Saving Songs” (p. 116).

130

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

Changing the Recording Method

1. ^{Press the [Menu] button.}

■ Recording While Erasing the

Previous Recording (Replace

Recording)

The Menu screen appears.

fig.d-menu1.eps_50

The recording process where previous material is erased as

new material is recorded is called “replace recording.” This

setting is in effect when you turn on the power.

1. ^{In the “Rec Mode screen” (p. 131), select <Replace>.}

Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.

The KR is set to the replace recording mode.

Record the performance using the procedures described

in Chapter 4 (p. 105), “Multitrack Recording with 16

Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 127).

2. ^{Touch <Rec Mode>.}

A “Rec Mode screen” like the following appears.

fig.d-recmode.eps_50

■ Layering a Recording Over

Previously Recorded Sounds

(Mix Recording)

You can record a performance layered over a previously

recorded performance. This method is called “Mix

Recording.”

1. ^{In the “Rec Mode screen” (p. 131), select <Mix>.}

Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.

Record the performance using the procedures described

in “Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons

(Redoing Recordings)” (p. 111), “Multitrack Recording

with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 127), or other

methods.

3. ^{Touch <Rec Mode>}

to select the recording

mode.

After you have finished with mix recording, return to the

usual replace recording mode.

Display

Replace

Mix

Recording Method

Replace Recording

Mix Recording

Loop

Loop Recording

Auto Punch-

In/Out

Punch-in recording of the interval

between set markers.

Punch-in recording starting from the

point at which the pedal, the

Manual

Punch-In/Out

Performance Pad or the [

button is pressed.

(Rec)]

For more about Punch In Recording,

refer to p. 133.

You can add tempo changes to a

recorded composition. See p. 142.

Tempo

4. ^{Touch <Exit>.}

Returns to the Menu screen.

131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

5. ^{Press the [}

(Play/Stop)] button to begin

■ Repeated Recording at the

recording.

Same Location (Loop Recording)

You can record a specified passage over and over, layering

sounds with each pass. This method is called “Loop

Recording.” This is handy when recording a Rhythm Part.

Recording starts from Marker A.

When the song reaches Marker B, it then returns to

Marker A, where recording continues.

For example, use this method to make a Loop Recording of a

four-measure segment. First record the bass drum, the snare

drum next, then the hi-hat and so on, layering a different

instrument onto the same four measures. After you have

finished recording the four-measure rhythm pattern, you can

then use the procedure in “Copying Measures (Copy)” (p.

136) to create as many copies of the four measures as you

need to complete your Rhythm part.

Each time the recording is looped, the newest sounds are

layered over previously recorded sounds.

6. ^{When you press the [}

(Play/Stop)] button,

recording stops.

After you have finished with loop recording, return to the

usual replace recording mode (p. 131).

1. ^{Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of the}

Loop Recording Shortcut

passage you want to record.

You can also use the method described below to set Loop

Recording.

Take a look at “Setting Markers for Repeated Practice

(Marker)” (p. 100).

1. Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of

If you haven’t recorded anything yet, then use “Blank

Recording” to create the necessary number of measures

before placing the markers.

the passage you want to record.

Take a look at “Setting Markers for Repeated

Practice (Marker)” (p. 100).

If you haven’t recorded anything yet, then perform

“Blank Recording” for the necessary number of

measures before placing the markers.

What is Blank Recording?

Blank Recording is recording a number of silent

measures with no content.

2. Touch the <Repeat> icon in the Marker screen

1. Set the basic tempo and beat of the song.

(p. 100).

2. Hold down the [

(Play/Stop)] button.

The indicators for the [ (Rec)] and [

Stop)] buttons both light up, then after two

(Rec)] button and press the

This sets the loop recording mode.

Start a recording.

[

(Play/

After you have finished with loop recording, touch the

<Repeat> icon in the “Marker screen” once more to

return to the usual replace recording mode.

measures of the count sound, recording begins.

3. Without performing anything, record only the

required number of measures, then press the

[

(Play/Stop)] button.

The indicators for the [ (Rec)] and [

(Play/

Stop)] buttons both go out, and recording stops.

2. ^{In the Rec Mode screen (p. 131), select <Loop>.}

Touch <Exit> to return to the menu screen.

The recording method changes to loop recording.

3. ^{Press the [}

(Rec)] button.

4. ^{Press the Track button for the track to be recorded.}

The KR is put in recording standby.

132

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

3. ^{Begin recording.}

■ Re-Recording Part of Your

Performance (Punch-in Recording)

Begin recording using the procedures described in

“Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing

Recordings)” (p. 111) or “Multitrack Recording with 16

Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 127).

You can re-record part of a passage as you listen to a

recorded performance. This recording method is called

“Punch-in Recording.” This convenient function lets you

record over a specified points in a part as you listen to a

prerecorded performance in another section.

Up until the specified passage, the previously recorded

performance plays back.

User Punch-In Recording by the following two methods:

When you reach the specified passage, sounds are erased

as recording starts; begin playing now.

Recording the Region Defined by Markers A and B

(Auto Punch-In/Out)

When you reach the end of the specified passage,

recording stops, and the KR returns to playback of the

previously recorded performance.

Before you start recording, place markers A and B to

define the passage you want to re-record. Make the

setting for punch-in recording, and re-record just the

passage between markers A and B.

4. ^{When you press the [}

(Play/Stop)] button, the

song stops.

Recording From the Point at Which the Pedal or Buttons

Are Pressed (Manual Punch-In/Out)

❍ Starting Recording from the Measure

You can play back a performance and depress the pedal

at the desired place to start re-recording. Depressing the

pedal a second time cancels recording and returns you to

playback.

Specified by Buttons and Pedals

If using the Performance Pads or pedals, you must first

change the function of the pedals and Pads. Follow the

procedures in “Assigning Functions to Pedals and

When you use the Performance Pads or [

(Rec)]

Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/User Functions)” (p. 157),

and assign <Auto Punch-In/Out> to the buttons or pedal.

button, recording begins when you press the Pad or

button upon reaching a specified point in the song.

When you press the Pad or [

(Rec)] button once more,

1. ^{In the Rec Mode screen (p. 131), select <Manual Punch-}

the KR exits recording mode and returns to normal

playback.

In/Out>.

This changes the recording mode to “Punch-In

Recording.”

❍ Recording a Passage Specified by Markers

Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.

1. ^{Before you start re-recording, place markers A and B to}

define the passage.

2. ^{Begin recording.}

Following the procedures described in “Setting Markers

for Repeated Practice (Marker)” (p. 100), use Markers A

and B to specify the passage.

Begin recording using the procedures described in

“Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing

Recordings)” (p. 111) or “Multitrack Recording with 16

Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 127).

2. ^{In the Rec Mode screen (p. 131), select <Auto Punch-In/}

Out>.

fig.d-rec-punch.eps_50

The previously recorded performance will be played

back.

Recording begins when you press the pedal, the

Performance Pad, or the [

recording at this time.

(Rec)] button; start re-

Recording stops when you press the pedal, the

Performance Pad, or the [

(Rec)] button again, and

the previously recorded performance is played back.

3. ^{When you press the [}

(Play/Stop)] button, the

performance stops.

This changes the recording mode to “Punch-In

Recording.”

When you’re finished with Punch-In Recording, return to the

ordinary Replace Recording mode. Take a look at “Changing

the Recording Method” (p. 131).

Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.

133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

4. ^{Touch <Exit>.}

Composing an

Accompaniment By Entering

Chords (Chord Sequencer)

You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen.

5. ^{Enter the chord progression and the accompaniment}

pattern.

You can enter a chord progression and choose the places

where the accompaniment pattern will change to create an

accompaniment for a song. This feature is called “Chord

Sequencer.”

Refer to “Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer.”

6. ^{When you have finished inputting all the data, touch}

<Execute>.

The accompaniment you’ve composed is registered at “0:

Thanks to the chord sequencer, you can create an

accompaniment ahead of time and play along with your

right hand.

New Song.”

When storage of the data is complete, return to the Menu

screen.

1. ^{Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light}

Now, press the [

(Play/Stop)] button, and try

up.

playing the melody along with the accompaniment you

created.

The Menu screen appears.

2. ^{Touch <Chord Sequencer>.}

Songs you’ve created are discarded as soon as you turn off the

power. If you do not want to delete the song, save it to a floppy

disk or to user memory. Refer to “Saving Songs” (p. 116).

The screen like the one shown below is called “Chord

Sequencer screen.”

fig.d-chordseq.eps_50

Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer

This is the “cursor.” The cursor

shows where the chord change

or other information is input.

This is the end of the song. When

continuing to add input, insert

measures by touching <Ins>.

Move the cursor

Change the accompaniment arrangements

Select the accompaniment pattern (Division)

1. ^{Use the [+] [-] buttons or the dial to move the cursor to}

This indicates the position where the

accompaniment pattern (Division) or

the Style Orchestrator changes.

the input position.

Use the [

(Bwd)] and [

(Fwd)] buttons to move

the cursor one measure at a time.

Display

Ins

Explanation

2. ^{Enter the chord progression and the changes in the}

accompaniment pattern and arrangement.

One measure is inserted before the measure

where the cursor is positioned.

Just as when performing with Automatic

The measure in which the cursor is

positioned is deleted.

Accompaniment, press the keys to specify a chord, and

press a button to select the accompaniment pattern (p.

69). You can change the Style Orchestrator with the

Performance Pads (p. 70).

Del

Allows input of chords without playing the

keyboard. Refer to “Inputting Chords

without Playing the Keyboard” (p. 135).

Chords

3. ^{Touch <Ins> once to insert one measure before the}

All Clear

Clear

Deletes all of the data that’s been input.

Deletes the data at the cursor position.

measure where the cursor is currently positioned.

If you touch <Del>, the measure where the cursor is

currently positioned is deleted, while the measures that

follow are moved forward.

Records the input chord progression.

Touch this icon when you have finished

inputting all of the chords.

Execute

To remove what you have input, move the cursor to the

position with input you want to delete, then touch

<Clear>. This deletes the entered setting.

3. ^{Press a Music Style button or the touch screen to select}

a Music Style (p. 62).

134

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

→ You can only insert an intro at the beginning of a song. When

you add an intro, the number of bars corresponding to the

length of the intro is inserted automatically.

Editing Songs

There are many ways you can edit performances recorded

using the KR Track button or 16-track sequencer.

Functions That Can Be Assigned to the Pedals

and the Performance Pads

■ Basic Operation of the Editing

→ For instructions on assigning functions, refer to “Assigning

Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/

User Functions)” (p. 157).

Functions

While songs are being loaded, the measure number in the

upper right of the screen is highlighted (text and background

are inverted). Start editing the song only after the measure

number is no longer highlighted.

• Inputting a short Intro and Ending

Assign “Intro 2/Ending 2" to a pedal or pad.

• Inputting a “Variation” or “Original” without a Fill-In

Assign “Original/Variation” to a pedal or pad.

Selecting the editing function

1. ^{Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light up.}

• Using the keyboard to input slash chords (such as Fm/C)

Assign “Leading Bass” to a pedal or pad.

The Menu screen appears.

2. ^{Touch <Song Edit>.}

• Inputting a break somewhere within the song

Assign “Break” to a pedal or pad.

A “Song Edit screen” like the following appears.

fig.d-edit1.eps_50

Check the accompaniment you inserted

Here’s how to play back as much of the accompaniment as

you have input.

1. ^{Press the [}

(Reset)] button to return to the

beginning of the song.

2. ^{When you press the [}

(Play/Stop)] button, the

performance is played back.

3. ^{Playback stops when you press the [}

(Play/Stop)]

3. ^{Touch an editing function to select that function.}

button once more.

For more detailed information, refer to the

corresponding page for each function.

■ Inputting Chords without

Playing the Keyboard

Function

Undo

Explanation

Page

You can use <Chords> at the bottom right of the Chord

Sequencer screen to specify chords on the screen.

Undoes editing operations that

have been performed.

p. 136

1. ^{At the Chord Sequencer screen, touch <Chords>.}

Copies measures and internal

rhythm patterns.

p. 136,

p. 137

Copy

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-chordinput.eps_50

Evens out sounds in recorded

performances.

Quantize

p. 137

Delete

Deletes measures.

p. 138

p. 139

Insert

Inserts a blank measure.

Transposes parts individually.

Transpose

Erases data in measures, creating

blank measures.

Erase

p. 139

p. 140

p. 141

Part

Exchange

Exchanges the sounds in parts.

Allows corrections to be made

note by note.

Note Edit

PC Edit

2. ^Touch

in each to specify the chords.

Allows editing of the Tones

changes that occur during a song.

3. ^{Touch <Execute> to enter the chord.}

You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen.

135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

→ ”PC” stands for “Program Change,” which is a command that

tells an instrument to change the sound it’s using. With songs

that rely on the use of a variety of sounds, a “PC” needs to be

located at every point within the song where the Tone is to be

changed

■ Copying Measures (Copy)

You can copy a portion of a performance to a different bar in

the same Part or to a measure in another Part. This is handy

when you’re composing a song that repeats a similar phrase.

fig.e-copy.e

Ex. To copy measures 5-7 to measure 8.

Some edits can’t be undone, not even by choosing “Undo.” We

recommend saving songs to floppy disks or to user memory before

editing. For more on how to save songs, refer to “Saving Songs”

(p. 116).

Editing

4. ^{Touch the item to be edited.}

At Step 3 of “Selecting the editing function” (p. 135), select

<Copy>.

The background of the item being set turns orange.

5. ^{Set the value with the [-] [+] buttons or the dial.}

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-e-copy.eps_50

To cancel the operation once it is underway, touch

<Exit>.

6. ^{When you’re done making all the settings, touch}

<Execute>.

When you are finished editing the setting, return to the

“Song Edit screen.”

Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.

→ You can play back edited songs by pressing the [

Stop)] button in the “Song Edit screen.” However, you cannot

play back songs while editing in each editing screen.

(Play/

Item

From

For

Content

■ Undoing Edits (Undo)

Measure number of the first measure of the

segment to be copied

You can cancel an editing operation that you’ve just carried

out. This is handy when you want to undo an edit and

restore data to the way it was before.

Number of measures to be copied

Copy-source Track button or part number

There are some edits that can’t be restored.

Choosing “All” copies all Parts. “- - -” appears

in the <Dst> column.

Choosing “R.Pattern” copies the KR’s built-in

Rhythm Patterns. For more information, take a

look at “Copying Rhythm Patterns to Create

Rhythm Parts” (p. 137).

At Step 3 of “Selecting the editing function” (p. 135), select

<Undo>.

Src

Editing functions that can be undone appear on screen.

fig.d-e-undo.eps_50

If you choose a Track button, you can only copy

to the selected Track button. You cannot copy

to the other Track buttons.

Copy-destination measure number

When “End” is selected, the data is copied to

the end of the song.

Times

Dst

Number of times the data is to be copied

Copy-destination part number

If you touch <Cancel>, the undo is cancelled, and you’re

returned to the Song Edit screen.

If you touch <OK>, the confirmation message appears on

screen. Touch <OK> to undone the most recent edit.

136

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

■ Correcting Timing

Item

Content

Discrepancies (Quantize)

Data can be copied in the following three ways:

You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded

performance by automatically aligning the music with the

timing you specify. This is called “Quantizing.”

Replace

If there is a performance recorded at the copy

destination, this previous recording is erased,

and the copied data is written in its place.

As an example, let’s say that the timing of some quarter-

notes in a performance is a little off. In this case, you can

quantize the performance with quarter-note timing, thus

Mix

If there is a performance recorded at the copy

destination, the copied data is layered over the

previous recording. If the Tones used for the

copy source and copy destination are different,

the copy-destination Tone is used.

making the timing accurate.

fig.e-quantize.e

Mode

Example: Quarter-note resolution

Actual note data

Insert

If there is a performance recorded at the copy

destination, the copied portion is inserted

without erasing the previous recording. The

song is lengthened by the number of inserted

measures.

Note data after quantization

Example: Sixteenth-note resolution

Actual note data

■ Copying Rhythm Patterns to

Note data after quantization

Create Rhythm Parts

At Step 3 of “Selecting the editing function” (p. 135), select

<Quantize>.

The KR features numerous internal rhythm patterns. You can

copy these rhythm patterns to create a rhythm part.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-e-quant.eps_50

→ For more information about the name of Rhythm Patterns,

please refer to “Rhythm Pattern List” (p. 199).

At Step 3 of “Selecting the editing function” (p. 135), select

<Copy>.

For more about ordinary copying, please refer to “Copying

Measures (Copy)” (p. 136).

Select “Rhythm Pattern” as the <Src>.

This makes the setting for copying a built-in Rhythm Pattern.

fig.d-e-copy2.eps_50

Item

From

For

Content

Measure number of the first measure of the

segment to be quantized

Number of measures to be quantized

Track button or part number to be

quantized

Tr/Pt

Choosing “All” quantizes the same passage

in all Parts.

• The rhythm pattern’s name and beat are indicated in the

<From> column.

Quantization timing

• The <Dst> is fixed at “Part 10.”

Select one of the following values

1/2 (half note), 1/4 (quarter note),

1/6 (quarter-note triplet), 1/8 (eighth note),

1/12 (eighth-note triplet), 1/16 (sixteenth

note), 1/24 (sixteenth-note triplet),

1/32 (thirty-second note)

• When the <Src> is switched to something other than

“Rhythm Pattern,” the KR is set to carry out normal

copying.

Resolution

Press the [

confirm the rhythm pattern. The rhythm pattern stops when

you press the [ (Play/Stop)] button once more.

(Play/Stop)] button to play back and

When finished with the Quantize settings, return to the Song

Edit screen.

137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

■ Deleting Measures (Delete)

■ Inserting Blank Measures

(Insert)

You can delete a part of a performance measure by measure.

When a portion of a performance is deleted, the rest of the

performance is shifted up to fill the gap. Erasing measures in

You can add a blank measure at a location you specify. This

addition of a blank measure is called “insertion.”

fig.e_insert.e

a specified passage is called “deleting.”

fig.e_delete.e

Ex. To insert measures (bars) 5-7

Ex. To delete measures (bars) 5-8

At Step 3 of “Selecting the editing function” (p. 135), select

<Delete>.

At Step 3 of “Selecting the editing function” (p. 135), select

<Insert>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-e-del.eps_50

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-e-ins.eps_50

Item

From

For

Content

Item

From

For

Content

Measure number of the first measure of the

segment to be deleted

Measure number of the first measure of the

segment to be inserted

Number of measures to be deleted

Number of measures to be inserted

Track button or part number to be deleted

Track button or part number where data will be

inserted

Tr/Pt

When “All” is selected, the same portion of all

parts is deleted.

Tr/Pt

When “All” is selected, blank measures are

inserted at the same place in all parts.

138

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-e-erase.eps_50

■ Transposing Individual Parts

(Transpose)

You can transpose specified parts and tracks individually.

At Step 3 of “Selecting the editing function” (p. 135), select

<Transpose>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-e-trans.eps_50

Item

From

For

Content

Measure number of the first measure of the

segment to be erased

Number of measures to be erased

Track button or part number to be erased

Tr/Pt

When “All” is selected, the same portion of all

parts is erased.

Item

From

For

Content

Measure number of the first measure of the

segment to be transposed

Select from the following types of performance

data to erase:

Number of measures to be transposed

All

All performance data, including notes, tempos,

tones switches, volume changes, etc., are erased.

Track button or part number to be transposed

Tr/Pt

Bias

When “All” is selected, the same portion of all

parts is transposed.

Tempo

Tempo data is erased. Erasing the tempo data for

all measures results in a single, constant tempo.

The range of transposition

You can select the range to transpose the data,

from -24 (two octaves down) to +24 (two

octaves up), adjustable in semitones.

Event

Prog.Change

Erases the data for switching Tones (p. 136).

Note

Erases only notes.

You cannot transpose performances of the drum sets and

sound effect sets (such as the Rhythm Track).

Except Notes

Erases all of the performance data except for the

notes.

■ Making Measures Blank

(Erase)

Expression

Erases Expression (volume change) information.

You can delete the performance data in a specified block of

measures, turning them into blank measures without

reducing the length of the song. This process is called

“erasing.”

fig.e_erase.e

Ex. To erase measures (bars) 5-8

Blank measures

Follow the steps in “Selecting the editing function” (p. 135) to

choose <Erase>.

139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

■ Exchanging Parts

■ Correcting Notes One by One

(Part Exchange)

(Note Edit)

You can exchange the notes recorded for a particular part

with the notes recorded for another part. This process of

exchanging parts is called “part exchange.”

You can make corrections in a recorded performance one

note at a time. This process of making changes in individual

notes is called “note editing.”

You can make these corrections by using note editing:

• Deleting misplayed notes

At Step 3 of “Selecting the editing function” (p. 135), select

<Part Exchange>.

• Changing the scale of a single note

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-e-partex.eps_50

• Changing the force used in playing a single key (velocity)

At Step 3 of “Selecting the editing function” (p. 135), select

<Note Edit>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.e-note.e

Touch each

exchange.

to choose Parts you want to

Location

Pitch

Velocity

The note-location display uses “Measure: Beat: Tick” as the

format. A tick is a unit of time that’s shorter than a beat.

Touch

to select the part with the note to be

corrected. The Part number appears at the top of the screen.

Use the [ (Bwd)] button and the [ (Fwd)] button or

use < > < > in the upper part of the screen to find the

note to be corrected.

When you’ve found the note you want to correct, touch

“Pitch” or “Velocity” for the note.

Use the [-] [+] buttons and the dial to correct the pitch or

velocity. If you want to delete the note, touch <Delete>.

When you’re done making all the settings, touch <Exit>.

Return to the Song Edit screen.

140

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

■ Modifying the Tone Changes in

Changing the Beat in the Middle

of a Song (Beat Map)

a Song (PC Edit)

In some songs, the instrument sound changes during the

course of the song (that is, the Tone changes in the middle of

a Part). In such songs, an instruction to switch the Tone is

inserted at the place where you want the sound to change.

This instruction is called a “Program Change” (PC), and

actions such as deleting program changes, or changing the

selected Tone by them are called “PC editing.”

You can create songs that have beat changes during the

course of the song.

You can’t change a song’s beat once it’s been recorded. Before

recording the performance, determine the beat to be used.

1. ^{Press the [Menu] button.}

The Menu screen appears.

It is not possible to insert a program change into a measure or

beat that does not contain a program change.

2. ^{Touch <Beat Map>.}

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-beatmap.eps_50

At Step 3 of “Selecting the editing function” (p. 135), select

<PC Edit>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-e-pc.eps_50

3. ^{Use <}

> in the screen or the [

(Bwd)]

and [

(Fwd)] buttons to move to the measure

whose beat you want to change.

The measure number appears in the top-right area of the

screen.

Location

Tone name

The PC-location display uses “Measure: Beat: Tick” as the

format. A tick is a unit of time that’s shorter than a beat.

Touch <

> to move to the beginning of the song.

> to move to the end of the song.

Touch

to select the part with the program

4. ^Touch

in each to set the beat.

change to be edited.

5. ^{Touch <Execute>.}

The Part number appears at the top of the screen.

Use the [ (Bwd)] button and the [ (Fwd)] button or

The beat change starts with the measure you selected.

Repeat Steps 3–5 to make beat settings in other measures

as needed.

use < > < > in the upper part of the screen to find the

program change to be edited.

Recording the performance

When you’ve found the Program Change you want to

modify, touch “Tone Name” on the screen.

6. ^{Touch <Exit> twice.}

The screen displayed before you pressed the [Menu]

Press a Tone button to select a Tone group, then select a Tone

with the [-] [+] buttons and the dial. When selecting Part 10

or 11, select the drum set or effect sound.

button appears.

7. ^{Press the [}

(Reset)] button to return the measure

number to “1.”

If you want to delete the Program Change, touch <Delete>.

When you’re done making all the settings, touch <Exit>.

8. ^{Start a recording.}

Record the performance using the procedures described

in “Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance”

(p. 105). Specify the measure, then change the beat.

141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

Changing the Tempo of

Recorded Songs

3. ^{Touch the <Rec Mode>}

to select <Tempo>.

This makes the setting for tempo recording.

You can change the basic tempo of a composition. The basic

tempo was initially set when the song was recorded.

Touch <Exit> a number of times to switch to the screen

where the measure number is indicated in the upper

right of the screen.

1. ^{Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to choose a tempo.}

When the KR goes into Tempo Recording, the tempo

indication is highlighted.

2. ^{Hold down the [}

(Rec)] button and press the

[

(Reset)] button.

Recording the Tempo

The song’s basic tempo changes.

4. ^{Use the [}

(Bwd)] and [

(Fwd)] buttons to

The change in basic tempo is discarded when you turn

off the power or choose a different song. Save important

song data to floppy disks or to user memory (p. 116).

move slightly before the measure where you want to

change the tempo.

5. Press the [

flashing.

The KR is put in recording standby.

(Rec)] button and watch the indicator is

If the song you’re working on has tempo changes, press the

[

(Reset)] button to go back to the beginning of the song

before you carry out this operation.

6. ^{When you press the [}

(Play/Stop)] button,

recording begins.

Changing the Tempo Within

the Song

7. ^{When you get to the place where you want to change}

the tempo, use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons or the dial

to vary the tempo as desired.

You can add tempo changes to a recorded composition.

The KR stores song tempo information and performance data

separately. Therefore, when making changes to the tempo in

a song, you must record the changes in the tempo

8. ^{When you press the [}

(Play/Stop)] button,

recording stops.

The song’s tempo changes.

information independently of the performance data.

This recording of the tempo is called “Tempo Recording.”

You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording

mode. When you’re finished tempo recording, go back to the

ordinary Replace Recording. Take a look at “Changing the

Recording Method (Rec Mode)” (p. 130).

■ Adjusting the Tempo While

Listening to a Song

You can add ritardando and other such gradual tempo

changes.

Setting the Rec Mode to “Tempo”

1. ^{Press the [Menu] button.}

The Menu screen appears.

2. ^{Touch <Rec Mode>.}

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-rec-tempo.eps_50

142

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs

■ Adjusting the Tempo at a

Particular Measure

You can create a tempo change at the beginning of a selected

measure. This is handy when you want to make a sudden

change in tempo.

First, carry out Steps 1–3 of “Changing the Tempo Within the

Song” (p. 142) to make the “Tempo Recording” settings.

1. ^{Use the [}

(Bwd)] and [

(Fwd)] buttons to

move to the measure where you want to change the

tempo.

The measure number appears in the top-right area of the

Basic screen.

2. Press the [

flashing.

(Rec)] button and watch the indicator is

The KR is put in recording standby.

3. ^{Use the [-] [+] buttons or the dial to change the tempo.}

4. ^{Press the [}

(Play/Stop)] button.

The song’s tempo changes starts with the measure you

selected.

→ While tempo recording is being used to write tempo, the tempo

display in the screen will be highlighted.

5. ^{When you press the [}

(Play/Stop)] button, the

change in tempo stops.

You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording

mode. When you’re finished tempo recording, go back to the

ordinary Replace Recording. Take a look at “Changing the

Recording Method (Rec Mode)” (p. 130).

→ If you want to restore the previous tempo, delete the tempo

data at the place where the tempo was recorded. For an

explanation of how to delete the information of tempo settings,

refer to “Making Measures Blank (Erase)” (p. 139).

Tempo Recording Shortcut

Hold down the [

(Rec)] button and press one of the

Tempo [-] [+] buttons to switch to the Tempo Recording

settings. Record tempo information. In this case, tempo

recording is canceled when recording ends.

143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles

■ Creating New Styles by

Creating Original Styles

(User Styles)

Although the KR features a variety of internal Music Styles,

you can also create your own. These original Styles are called

“User Styles.”

Combining Internal Music

Styles (Style Composer)

You can create a new style by selecting from among the

Rhythm, Bass, Accompaniment 1, Accompaniment 2, and

Accompaniment 3 parts in different Styles. This function is

called the “Style Composer.”

You can use either of the two methods described below to

create a User Style.

You can only combine the KR’s built-in Styles.

Style Composer

Displaying the Style Composer Screen

1. ^{Press the [Menu] button.}

With this method, you combine internal Music Styles to

create new Styles. You can create a new Style by selecting

from among the Rhythm, Bass, Accompaniment 1,

Accompaniment 2, and Accompaniment 3 parts in different

styles.

The Menu screen appears.

fig.d-menu1.eps_50

Style Converter (p. 146)

Create a new Style by extracting the portions you need from

songs composed with the 16-track sequencer.

When you’re composing a song, there’s no need to specify all

the chords. You can specify just some of the chords, and the

KR automatically chooses the other chords and arranges the

Style.

Style Converter features an “Auto mode” that allows you to

easily create Styles from songs with a single chord, and a

“Manual mode,” in which you create Styles from songs with

three kinds of chords–major, minor, and seventh chords.

2. Touch <Style Composer>.

If a User Style has already been recorded, a message like the

one shown below appears.

fig.m-styledel.eps

Touch <Cancel> to return to the Menu screen. Save User

Styles to floppy disks, or to user memory (p. 149).

When you touch <OK>, the previously recorded User Style is

deleted, and a new User Style is created.

144

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles

A “Style Composer screen” like the one shown below

Deciding on a Style

appears.

fig.d-stylecomp.eps_50

6. ^{Touch <Execute>.}

You have created a new Style.

The User Style is recorded to the Music Style [User]

button. Try playing with the new Style.

If you turn off the power or record a new User Style, any User

Style you’ve previously recorded is lost. If you do not want to

delete the Style, save it to a floppy disk or to user memory.

Take a look at “Saving a User Style” (p. 149).

❍ Muting Parts for a particular division

You can mute the sound of particular Parts in specific

Divisions.

Display

Part

For example, have all of the parts play in the “Variation”

accompaniment pattern, while muting “Accompaniment 2”

and “Accompaniment 3” in the “Original” accompaniment

pattern. With this arrangement, when the accompaniment

pattern changes from the original to the variation, it creates a

more elaborate effect in the accompaniment.

Rhythm

Bass

Accompaniment 1

Accompaniment 2

Accompaniment 3

→ For more on Divisions, refer to the “Style Arrangements” (p.

146).

1. ^{Touch the Style Composer screen to choose the Part}

Icon

Function

you want to mute out.

All Clear

Deletes all of the settings.

2. ^{Press the Fill In [To Variation] or [To Original] button}

You can mute the sound of particular

Parts in specific Divisions. For more

information, take a look at “Muting

Parts for a particular division” (p. 145).

to switch to the division that you want to mute.

Mute

Clear

3. ^{Touch <Mute> on the screen.}

The Part you chose is only muted out in the Division you

selected.

Deletes the Styles in selected parts.

The Part Settings screen is displayed,

allowing you to make detailed settings

to each part. For more information, take

a look at “Editing the volume and effect

settings for each Part” (p. 146).

If you want to hear the muted-out Part, touch <Mute>

again.

Options

Execute

To mute out a Division that changes after a few seconds (intro,

ending, or fill-in), touch <Mute> immediately after switching

to the Division.

Records the created Style to the Music

Style [User] button. Touch this when

you have finished creating the Style.

Selecting the Styles assigned to each part

3. ^{Touch the part to be set.}

The button for the touched part being set turns orange.

4. ^{Press an Music Style button, then select a Style with}

the touch screen or the [-]/[+] buttons and the dial.

When you have decided on a Style, touch <Exit> to

display the Style Composer screen.

5. ^{Repeat steps 3 and 4 to determine the Styles for each}

Part.

145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles

❍ Editing the volume and effect settings for

■ Creating a Style from a Song

You Composed Yourself

(Style Converter)

each Part

Displaying the Part settings screen

You can take a song you’ve composed yourself and extract

the portions you need to create your own original Style.

When you’re composing a song, there’s no need to specify all

the chords. You can specify some of the chords, and the KR

automatically chooses the other chords and arranges the

style. This function is called the “Style Converter.”

1. ^{At the Style Composer screen, touch <Options>.}

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-scomp-part.eps_50

Style Converter features an “Auto mode” that allows you to

easily create Styles from songs with a single chord, and a

“Manual mode,” in which you create Styles from songs with

three kinds of chords–major, minor, and seventh chords.

When creating a song in order to create an music style, it’s

good practice to consider the arrangement of the music style.

Style Arrangements

Modifying the settings of each part

A Music Style is made up of five performance parts:

“Rhythm,” “Bass,” “Accompaniment 1,” “Accompaniment

2” and “Accompaniment 3.”

2. ^{Touch the}

to select the part with the

settings to be changed.

The part name and Tone name are indicated in the upper

part of the screen.

A song progresses in predictable a sequence, such as intro,

melody A, melody B, bridge and ending.

With the KR, such changes in songs are allocated to the

following six performance states. We call these six parts of a

song “Divisions.”

3. ^Touch

for each parameter to change the value.

You can also change the values by touching each

parameter name and then using the [-] [+] buttons and

the dial. Pressing the [-] [+] buttons simultaneously

returns the parameter to its original value.

Division

Intro

Performance division

The intro is played at the start of a song.

This is played at the end of a song.

This is a basic accompaniment pattern.

Display

Explanation

Ending

Original

Volume

Reverb

Adjusts the volume.

Adjusts the amount of reverb effect applied

to the sound.

This is a developmental accompaniment

pattern. It is a variation on an Original.

Variation

Adjusts the amount of chorus effect applied

to the sound.

Chorus

This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a

juncture where the mood changes. It is used

to make a song more lively.

Fill-In To

Variation

Changes the left-right direction from which

the sound appears to come.

This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a

juncture where the mood changes. It is used

to make a song more sedate.

Fill-In To

Original

Panpot

When you touch

, the sound moves to

to move the sound to

the right; touch

the left.

You can make a song more lively or more restrained by

increasing or reducing played parts by Divisions. You can

also modify a song by changing the Tone of the parts in the

Divisions.

You can change the Tone for the selected Part by

pressing a Tone button to change the Tone while this

screen is displayed. When selecting Rhythm Part, you

can touch <Drum Set> to select the drum set or effect

sound.

Finishing the settings

4. ^{Touch <Exit>.}

The Style Composer screen appears.

146

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles

fig.d-styleconv.eps_50

❍ Creating Styles in Auto Mode

Points to note when creating songs

• Use one of the major, minor, or diminished seventh

chords to create the song. We recommend using

diminished seventh chords to compose the song.

• It is convenient to record the sounds shown below for

the Parts of the 16-track sequencer.

Rhythm

Bass

Accomp Accomp Accomp

D (10)

Parameter

Name

Settings Content

→ When using parts other than Part 2, 7, 8, 9, and D, refer to

“Changing an Extracted Part” (p. 148).

Conv.Mode

Chord Root

Switches the mode (Auto/Manual)

Creating songs

Chord root for the segment to be

extracted

1. ^{Use the 16-track sequencer to record the song.}

Chord type for the segment to be

extracted (major/minor/seventh)

Chord Type

Division

From

Record the song after referring to “Multitrack Recording

with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 127) and other

related sections.

Division

Measure number of the first measure of

the segment to be extracted

When using music data, first select a song (p. 77).

Displaying the Style Converter screen

2. Press the [Menu] button.

For

Number of measures extracted

The Menu screen appears.

Making the settings

3. ^{Touch <Style Converter>.}

4. ^{Touch <Conv.Mode>, then use the [-] [+] buttons or the}

If no song for use in creating a new Style is selected, the

message “Please select a song” appears. Use the [Select/Listen

to a Song] button to select a song (p. 77), then start the

procedure again.

dial to switch the mode to “Auto.”

This makes the setting for the Auto mode.

5. ^{Touch <Chord Root> and <Chord Type>, then use the}

[-] [+] buttons or the dial to input the chord root and

type for the segment to be extracted.

If a User Style has already been recorded, a message like the

one shown below appears.

fig.m-styledel.eps

6. ^{Touch <Division>, then use the [-] [+] buttons or the}

dial to select the Division.

Display

Intro

Performance division

Intro

Original

Original accompaniment pattern

Touch <Cancel> to return to the Menu screen. Please save the

Fill To

Vari

User Style on a floppy disk or in the internal memory (p. 149).

When you touch <OK>, the previously recorded User Style is

deleted, and a new User Style is created.

From the fill-in to the variation

Variation

Fill To Ori

Ending

Variation accompaniment pattern

From the fill-in to the original

Ending

A “Style Converter screen” like the one shown appears.

Only one measure can be extracted when “Fill To Vari” or

“Fill To Ori” is selected for the Division. The number of

measures may also be limited in other Divisions.

147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles

Displaying the Style Converter screen

2. ^{Press the [Menu] button.}

7. ^{Touch <From> and <For>, then use the [-] [+] buttons or}

the dial to select the measures to be extracted.

Touching <Play> at the bottom of the screen, you can

listen to performance of the portion which you chose.

3. ^{Touch <Style Converter>.}

The “Style Converter screen” appears.

8. ^{Repeat Steps 5–7 to create Styles for all of the}

4. ^{Touch <Conv.Mode>, then use the [-] [+] buttons or the}

Divisions.

dial to switch the mode to “Manual.”

If no setting is made for a Division, it uses a simple drum pattern.

This makes the setting for the Manual mode.

Deciding on a Style

After that, the steps are the same as for “Creating Styles

in Auto Mode” (p. 147).

9. ^{When you’re done making all the Division settings,}

When you touch <Play> in the lower part of the screen,

you can listen to the performance of the part selected

with <Options>.

touch <Execute>.

The User Style is recorded to the [User] button.

If you turn off the power or record a new User Style, any User

Style you’ve previously recorded is lost. If you do not want to

delete the Style, save it to a floppy disk or to user memory.

Take a look at “Saving a User Style” (p. 149).

❍ Changing an Extracted Part

You can extract and change part of a song created with 16-

track sequencer.

The following data is saved to the User Style. If a song

includes data other than this, the results you get might not be

what was intended.

1. ^{At the Style Converter screen (p. 147), touch <Options>.}

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-styleconv.eps_50

• Keyboard performance data

• Amount of Reverb effect applied

• Amount of Chorus effect applied

❍ Creating a Style in Manual Mode

When you create a Music Style in the Manual mode, you can

clearly point up the differences in accompaniment for each

individual chord.

Points to note when creating songs

• Record your performance with the three chord types of

diminished seventh, major, and minor.

2. ^{Touch the performance Part with settings you want to}

• It is convenient to record the sounds shown below for

the Parts of the 16-track sequencer.

change.

3. ^{Use the [-] [+] buttons and the dial to specify which 16-}

Accomp Accomp Accomp

Chords Rhythm Bass

track Sequencer performance part you want to extract.

→ In the Manual mode, the type of chords appear at the bottom of

Major

Seventh

Minor

D (10)

the screen. Set the Parts for all chords.

4. ^{Touch <Exit> to return to the Style Converter screen.}

The Style Converter screen appears.

→ The chords all share the same Rhythm Part.

→ If you want to use the performance of other part, check out

“Changing an Extracted Part” (p. 148)

Creating songs

1. ^{Use the 16-track sequencer to record the song.}

Record the song after referring to “Multitrack Recording

with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 127) and other

related sections.

When using music data, first select a song (p. 77).

148

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles

fig.d-stylesave.eps_50

Saving a User Style

You can save the User Styles you create to floppy disks and

the user memory. When saved to the user memory, User

Styles are not deleted when the power is turned off. You can

also select Styles saved to the user memory by pressing the

Music Style [User] button.

You can save up to 99 User Styles in user memory.

What is the User Memory?

The user memory is the area within the instrument

where User Styles created with the KR, sets of User

Programs, and other such data are stored.

Determining the name of the Style to be saved

4. ^{Touch <Rename>.}

You can also copy User Styles and sets of User Programs

saved on floppy disks.

A “Rename screen” like the following appears.

fig.d-stylename.eps_50

Data saved to the user memory is not deleted, even

when the KR’s power is turned off.

→ When you want to clear all of the content saved to the user

memory and restore the settings to the factory settings, refer to

“Formatting the User Memory” (p. 165).

Preparations for saving data

When saving to a floppy disk, first insert a floppy disk in the

disk drive.

1. ^{Press the Music Style [User] button.}

When you touch

, the cursor moves.

A “User Style screen” like the following appears.

fig.d-usrdisk.eps_50

When you touch the icon for the character to be input,

the character appears at the cursor position.

For example, touching the <ABC> icon in succession

cycles you through the available choices in that character

group (A→B→C→A...).

Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters

through “English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”

“numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper

case).”

When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor

position is deleted.

If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User/

Disk> in the lower part of the screen.

When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor

position.

2. ^{Touch <File>.}

5. ^{When you have finished with the name, touch <Exit>.}

3. ^{Touch <Save>.}

Determining the save destination

6. ^{Touch <Disk> or <User>.}

A “Save Style screen” like the following appears.

NOTE

Touch <Disk> if you are saving to a floppy disk; touch

<User> if you are saving to user memory.

This function is not available with songs on CDs.

149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles

■ Deleting Saved User Styles

7. ^Touch

to select the save-destination

This deletes User Styles that have been saved to floppy disks

or in user memory.

number.

If a Style name is displayed, a style is already saved to

that number.

When deleting a User Style on a floppy disk, first insert the

floppy disk in the disk drive.

If you select a number with a previously saved User

Style and then save to that number, the previously saved

User Style is deleted. If you do not want to delete the

User Style being saved, select a number in the save-

destination column that does not yet have a name.

1. ^{Press the Music Style [User] button.}

A “User Style screen” appears.

If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User/

Disk> in the lower part of the screen.

8. ^{Touch <Save>.}

2. ^{Touch <File>.}

The saving process starts.

3. ^{Touch <Delete>.}

A “Delete Style screen” like the following appears.

fig.d-styledel.eps_50

* Never turn off the power while the operation is in

progress. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal

memory, making it unusable.

4. ^{Touch <Disk> or <User>.}

Touch <User> if you are deleting a file from user

memory; touch <Disk> if you are deleting a file from a

floppy disk.

5. ^Touch

to select the Style to be deleted.

6. ^{Touch <Delete>.}

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.m-filedel.eps

7. ^{Touch <OK>.}

The selected Style is deleted.

If you touch <Cancel>, the Style won’t be deleted.

* Never turn off the power while the operation is in

progress. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal

memory, making it unusable.

150

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles

Specifying the Copy Destination

Copying Styles on Floppy

Disks to the User Memory

6. ^{Touch <User>}

to select the copy destination

for the Style.

You can take User Styles saved on floppy disks and copy

them to user memory.

If a Style name is displayed, a style is already saved to

that number.

You can also take User Styles saved in user memory and

copy them to floppy disks.

If you select a number with a previously saved Style and

then copy to that number, the previously saved Style is

deleted. If you do not want to lose the Style being saved,

select a number in the save-destination column that does

not yet have a name.

1. ^{Insert the floppy disk with the Style to be copied in the}

disk drive.

2. ^{Press the [User] button.}

7. ^{Touch <Execute>.}

A “User Style screen” like the following appears.

fig.d-usrdisk.eps_50

The Style on the floppy disk is copied to user memory.

* Never turn off the power while the operation is in

progress. Doing so will damage the KR’s internal

memory, making it unusable.

■ Copying Styles Saved in the

User Memory to Floppy Disks

You can take Styles saved in user memory and copy them to

floppy disks.

If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User/

Disk> in the lower part of the screen.

In this case, touch the large arrow icon in the center of the

“Copy Style screen” in Step 4 above so that the arrow points

upwards. Turn the KR will copy user memory Styles to the

floppy disk.

3. ^{Touch <File>.}

4. ^{Touch <Copy>.}

The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying

Styles from floppy disks to user memory.

A “Copy Style screen” like the following appears.

fig.d-copystyle.eps_50

Specifying the copy source

5. Touch <Disk>

to select the Style you want

to copy.

When “All” is selected, all of the Styles on the floppy

disk are copied to user memory.

151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

■ Adjusting Resonance

Changing the Settings for

One-Touch Piano

You can make detailed settings, such as those for the

keyboard touch and tunings, allowing you to set up the KR

just the way you want for your piano performances.

(Resonance)

You can adjust this resonance (Sympathetic Resonance)

when the damper pedal is depressed.

At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 152), touch <Resonance>.

fig.d-p-reso.eps_50

→ For more information about the Piano screen, refer to “Playing

the Keyboard Like a Piano (One-Touch Piano)” (p. 26).

■ Procedure

1. ^{Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.}

The Piano screen appears.

fig.d-piano.eps_50

Display

Explanation

Standard

This replicates the resonance inside a piano.

The KR physically reproduces the vibration

of other free strings when keys are played,

allowing you to experience the feeling of

acoustic piano reverberation and resonance

(Physical Damper Simulation).

Advanced

Demo

2. ^{Touch <Functions>.}

Touch <Exit> to go back the Piano screen.

fig.d-pianoopt1.eps_50

In addition to the effects of Advanced, this

also replicates the noise produced when

you depress the pedal.

On the KR, touch the <Standard>, <Advanced>, or <Demo>

icon to choose the type of resonant sound.

Touch <Level>

applied.

to adjust the amount of effect

Display

Resonance p. 152

Tuning p. 153

Page

Display

Page

p. 154

p. 155

Touch

to deepen the effect. When you touch

, the

Hammer Response

String Resonance

Key Touch

effect is lessened.

→ The Resonance settings may change when you use the

Transformer (p. 45) and Harmonist (p. 47) vocal effects.

→ When you’ve chosen <Demo>, touching <Exit> changes the

→ You can set the master tuning and make a variety of other

settings to the instrument starting from the third page of

Function Screen. For more detailed information, refer to

“Other Settings” (p. 161).

setting for resonant notes to <Advanced>.

3. ^{Touch the icon for the setting.}

Refer to the corresponding page for each function.

4. ^{Touch <Exit> to return to the Piano screen.}

152

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

■ Changing the Tuning (Tuning)

❍ Choosing the Tuning

Tuning

system

Characteristics

This temperament is based on the

theories of the Greek philosopher

Pythagoras, and has pure fourths and

fifths. Chords containing a third will

sound impure, but melodies will sound

good.

You can play classical styles such as Baroque using historic

temperaments (tuning methods).

Pythagorean

Most modern songs are composed for and played in equal

temperament, the most common tuning in use today. But at

one time, there were a wide variety of other tuning systems

in existence. By playing in the temperament that was in use

when a composition was created, you can experience the

sonorities of chords originally intended for that song.

This temperament is a partial

compromise of just intonation in order

to allow modulation.

Meantone

This temperament is a combination of

meantone and Pythagorean

temperaments. It allows you to play in

all keys. (First method, number three.)

Werkmeister

At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 152), touch <Tuning>.

fig.d-p-temp.eps_50

Touch any one of the icons to choose the tuning system.

When playing in a temperament other than equal

temperament, you must specify the tonic (the note

corresponding to C for a major key, or to A for a minor key)

of the key in which you will play.

Touch <Key>

to select the tonic.

If you have selected equal temperament, it is not necessary to

select the tonic.

You can choose from among the eight tunings described

below.

❍ Setting the Tuning Curve (Stretch Tuning)

Pianos are generally tuned so that the low range is flatter and

the high range is sharper than equal tempered pitches. This

method of tuning is unique to the piano, and is known as

“stretched tuning.”

Tuning

Characteristics

system

This temperament divides the octave

into 12 equal parts. All intervals will be

Equal

slightly out of tune by the same amount.

This setting is in effect when you turn on

the power.

A graph that shows the changes in pitch of actual tuning

compared with the changes in equal temperament pitch is

called a tuning curve. Changing the tuning curve produces

subtle variations in the reverberations of the chords you play.

This temperament makes the 5th and

3rd intervals pure. It is unsuited to

playing melodies and cannot be

transposed, but is capable of beautiful

sonorities.

Just (Maj)

Touch the Stretch Tuning <ON> or <OFF> icon to select the

tuning curve.

When set to “ON,” the tuning curve features extended low

and high ranges (Stretch Tuning). It is suitable for piano

solos. This setting is selected when the power is turned on.

Just intonation differs between major

and minor keys. The same results as

major can be obtained in a minor key.

Just (min)

Arabic

When set to “OFF,” the standard tuning curve is used. It is

suitable when playing in an ensemble with other

instruments.

This tuning is suitable for the music of

Arabia.

This temperament is a modification of

meantone temperament and just

intonation, allowing more freedom of

modulation. Performances are possible

in all keys (III).

Kirnberger

153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

■ Changing How Rapidly Sounds Are

Expressed According to the Force

Used to Play the Keys

(Hammer Response)

You can adjust the timing with which sounds are produced

according to the force used to play the keys. This function is

called “Hammer Resonance.”

■ Adjusting the Resonant Sounds

(String Resonance)

When the keys are pressed on an acoustic piano, the strings

for keys that are already pressed also vibrate

sympathetically. The function used to reproduce this

resonance is called “String Resonance.”

At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 152), touch <String Resonance>.

fig.d-p-streso.eps_50

When a key is pressed on an acoustic piano, it causes a

hammer to move and strike the strings, producing sound.

The hammers move more slowly when the keys are played

gently, meaning that sounds are produced just slightly later

than when you play the keyboard with greater force.

When the Hammer Response function is on, the interval

between the time a key is pressed and the time sound is

produced varies according to the force used to play the key.

The more gently the key is pressed, the more delayed the

timing of the sound.

Touch <ON> to turn the String Resonance function on.

At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 152), touch <Hammer

Response>.

fig.d-p-hmreso.eps_50

Touch the screen slider to adjust the amount of effect

applied.

Moving the slider to “Max” increases the amount of

resonance effect applied. Moving the slider to “Min” reduces

the amount of effect applied.

Touch <OFF> to cancel the effect.

Touch <ON> to turn the Hammer Response function on.

Touch the screen slider to adjust the time it takes for a key to

sound after it is pressed.

The more the slider is moved to “Slow,” the more delayed

the sound is when the keys are played softly. Conversely,

sounds are produced more quickly when the keys are played

with greater force.

Touch <OFF> to cancel the effect.

154

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

■ Adjusting the Keyboard Touch

Changing the Settings for

One-Touch Arranger

(Key Touch)

You can vary the touch of the keyboard when you play the

keys.

■ Procedure

1. ^{Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button to}

At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 152), touch <Key Touch>.

fig.d-p-key.eps_50

display the Basic screen.

fig.d-arrbasic.eps_50

Display

Explanation

2. ^{Touch <Functions>.}

Notes sound at an unchanging volume level,

regardless of how lightly or forcefully you

play the keyboard.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-funcmenu1.eps_50

Fixed

This sets the keyboard to a light touch. You

can achieve fortissimo (ff) play with a less

forceful touch than usual, so the keyboard

feels lighter. This setting makes it easier for

children, whose hands have less strength.

Light

This sets the keyboard to the standard touch.

You can play with the most natural touch.

This setting is closest to the response of an

acoustic piano.

Medium

This sets the keyboard to a heavy touch. You

have to play the keyboard more forcefully

than usual in order to play fortissimo (ff), so

the keyboard touch feels heavier. This

setting allows you to add more expression

when playing dynamically.

Parame-

Explanation

ter Name

Heavy

Key

Touch

Refer to “Adjusting the Keyboard Touch

(Key Touch)” (p. 155).

Sets the key at which the keyboard is

divided (the split point) (p. 156).

Split Point

Touch any of the icons <Fixed>, <Light>, <Medium>, or

<Heavy>, to set the key touch for the keyboard.

One

Touch

Setting

Selects the setting to be specified when the

One Touch Program [Arranger] button is

pressed (p. 156).

To make fine adjustments, touch the slider in the screen.

Move the slider to the right to add resistance, and to the right

to make the key touch lighter.

Pedal

Setting

Assigns functions to the pedal and

performance pad (p. 157).

Arranger

Config.

Sets the way the Automatic Accompaniment

plays sounds (p. 159).

Refer to “Changing the Tuning (Tuning)” (p.

153).

Tuning

3. ^{Touch the name of the parameter to be set.}

Refer to the corresponding page for each function.

4. ^{Touch <Exit> to return to the Basic screen.}

155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

■ Changing the Keyboard’s Split

■ Changing Music Styles Without

Changing the Tone or Tempo

(One Touch Setting)

Point (Split Point)

This sets the point (the split point) where the keyboard is

divided when specifying chords in the left hand while using

the Automatic Accompaniment and when playing split

performances (p. 31).

Normally, when you select a Music Style, the Tone and

tempo settings suitable for that Music Style are selected

automatically. However, you can also set it so the tempo and

Tone settings don’t change when you change Music Styles.

The setting is at “F#3” when the KR is powered up.

fig.splitpoint.e

At Step 3 “Procedure” (p. 155), touch <One Touch Setting>.

fig.d-1touchset.eps_50

F 3 (Split Point)

Split Point Settings Range

→ The key you chose for the split point belongs to the left-hand

section of the keyboard.

At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 155), touch <Split Point>.

fig.d-splitpoint.eps_50

Display

Explanation

Suitable

Tone

The suitable tone for a Music Style is

selected automatically.

Suitable

Tempo

The suitable tempo for a Music Style is

selected automatically.

Other

Setting

Other settings (Style Orchestrator, phrases,

etc.) are changed automatically.

Touch each icon to switch individual settings on and off.

All items are set to ON when you turn on the power.

Parameters switched to OFF (highlighted in orange) do not

change, even when the Music Style is changed.

Touch either <C3>, <F#3>, <C4>, or <F#4> in the lower part

of the screen.

The key you chose becomes the split point.

To set another key as the split point, touch

the screen, then specify the key.

You can set the split point within a range of B1 to B6.

156

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

❍ Functions that can be assigned (Pedals,

■ Assigning Functions to Pedals

and Performance Pads (Pedal

Setting/User Functions)

Performance Pads)

Function

Explanation

You can assign a variety of functions to the left and center

pedals and to the performance pads.

Toggles the Leading Bass function* on or

off. The function stays on as long as the

pedal to which this is assigned is pressed.

When assigned to a Performance Pad, this

is alternately switched on and off each time

the pad is pressed.

You can call up the assigned functions just by pressing the

corresponding pedal or pad.

Leading

Bass

❍ Assigning Functions to Pedals

At Step 3 “Procedure” (p. 155), touch <Pedal Setting>.

fig.d-pedalset.eps_50

Only the accompaniment’s rhythm part is

played. The next time you specify a chord

with the keyboard, the No Chord function

is cancelled, and all of the accompaniment

parts are played.

No Chord

Break

During the performance of Automatic

Accompaniment, the accompaniment

stops for one measure only.

Fill In to

Variation

Performs the same function as the Fill In

[To Variation] button (p. 69).

Fill In to

Original

Performs the same function as the Fill In

[To Original] button (p. 69).

Touch

to assign functions to each of the pedals.

A fill-in is inserted, but the accompaniment

pattern after that doesn’t change.

Fill In

Pressing the One Touch Program [Piano] button restores the

piano performance functions to the pedals (p. 21).

This plays a fill-in half a measure long,

then switches to the Variation

accompaniment pattern.

Half Fill In

Variation

❍ Assigning Functions to Performance Pads

1. ^{Press the [User Function] button and watch the}

This plays a fill-in half a measure long,

then switches to the Original

accompaniment pattern.

Half Fill In

Original

indicator light up.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-usrfunc.eps_50

Original/

Variation

This changes the accompaniment pattern

without inserting a fill-in.

When this function is used during

Automatic Accompaniment, the

accompaniment returns to the beginning of

the Division (p. 58).

Arranger

Reset

Performs the same function as the [Intro/

Ending] button (p. 66). Intro 1 and Ending

1 are played.

Intro 1/

Ending 1

Performs the same function as the [Intro/

Ending] button (p. 66). Intro 2 and Ending

2 are played.

Intro 2/

Ending 2

2. ^Touch

to assign functions to each of the

Arranger

Start/Stop

Performs the same function as the [Start/

Stop] button (p. 66).

Performance Pads.

→ If you set the pedal as a dedicated switch for selecting User

Programs, the function assigned to the pedal cannot be used.

Refer to “Using the Pedal to Switch User Programs” (p. 126).

Orchestrat

or Up

This changes the accompaniment to a more

elavorate arrangement (p. 70).

Orchestrat

or Down

Changes the accompaniment to a simpler

arrangement (p. 70).

Turns the Melody Intelligence function on

and off (p. 72).

Melody

Intelligence

157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

❍ Functions that can be assigned (Pedals

Function

Explanation

Only)

This starts Automatic Accompaniment

with a fade-in (where the volume gets

Fade In/Out progressively louder), ends it with a fade-

out (where the volume gets progressively

softer), then stops.

Function

Explanation

Pressing the pedal during playback of a song

stops the playback. When the pedal is

released, playback resumes from the

beginning of the measure that was playing

when the pedal was pressed. When the pedal

is pressed in rapid succession, the playback

will resume backs up the same number of

measures as the number of times the pedal is

pressed.

Rotary

Slow/Fast

This switches the speed of the rotary effect*

when you perform with an organ Tone.

Replay

While the pedal or Performance Pad is held

down, the pitch of the sound drops

temporarily, returning to the original pitch

when the pedal or Pad is released. This can

be effective for simulating the performance

of instruments like a Hawaiian guitar.

Glide

Upper

Soft

The pedal functions as a soft pedal (p. 21).

The pedal functions as a sostenuto pedal

Composer

Play/Stop

Performs the same function as the [

(Play/Stop)] button (p. 77).

Upper

Sostenuto (p. 21).

Press the pedal or the Pad turns the score

appearing on the KR display to the next

page while the performance of a song is

stopped.

Lower

Damper

Applies a damper pedal effect to the sounds

in the left-hand side of the keyboard.

Page

Fwd 1

This raises the pitch of notes you play on the

keyboard.

Bend Up

Press the pedal or the Pad turns the score

appearing on the KR display to the

preceding page while the performance of a

song is stopped.

Page

Bwd 1

Bend

Down

This lowers the pitch of notes you play on the

keyboard.

When the pedal is pressed during a layer

performance, the Tone volume changes

between two levels, depending on how

firmly the pedal is pressed.

Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX1” selected

increases the layer Tone volume. The layer

Tone is played at a fixed volume, regardless

of how forcefully the keys are played.

Press the pedal or the Pad turns the score

appearing on the external display to the

next page while the performance of a song

is stopped.

Page

Fwd 2

Pedal EX1

Press the pedal or the Pad turns the score

appearing on the external display to the

preceding page while the performance of a

song is stopped.

Page

Bwd 2

Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX2” selected

increases the layer Tone volume.

Pedal EX2

Pedal EX3

Punch In/

Out

During Punch-in Recording, this starts and

stops recording (p. 133).

Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX3” selected

increases the layer Tone volume, while the

volume of the left-hand Tone is decreased.

The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume,

regardless of how forcefully the keys are

played.

You can set the tempo according to the

interval at which the pedal or pad is

pressed

(p. 97).

Tap

Tempo

Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX4” selected

Pedal EX4 increases the layer Tone volume, while the

* What is the leading bass function?

The function that sounds the lowest note of a fingered chord

as the bass tone is called “Leading Bass.” When this function

is turned on, the Bass Tone changes when chord inversions

are used. Usually the tonic of the chord you play sounds as

the bass tone.

volume of the right-hand Tone is decreased.

The effect may not be applied correctly when you press a pedal

if “Pedal EX1–4” is assigned to more than one pedal.

→ Using the “Bend Up” or “Bend Down” function during a

split performance (p. 30) changes the pitch of sounds in the

right-hand side of the keyboard. Additionally, the range in

which the pitch can change when the Bender effect is used is

called the “bend range”; refer to “Changing the Bend Range

(Pedal Setting)” (p. 159).

* What is the rotary effect?

This adds a sort of spinning effect to the organ sound, similar

to the sound when a rotary speaker is used.

Changing the speed increases or decreases the speed of this

spinning effect.

158

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

■ Changing the Bend Range

■ Changing How Chords Are

Played and Specified

(Arranger Config)

(Pedal Setting)

The effect of smoothly raising or lowering the pitch of a

played note is called the “bender effect.”

This changes the settings determining how Music Styles are

played, and how the keys are pressed to specify chords.

You can assign the bender function to a pedal, then apply the

bender effect by depressing and releasing the pedal.

What are the Chord Tone and Bass Tone?

You can also make a setting that determines how much the

pitch of the note changes when you apply the bender. The

maximum range of change in pitch is called the “bend

range.”

When the Automatic Accompaniment is stopped, and Sync

Start (p. 66) is turned off, chords are produced when you

play in the left-hand side of the keyboard. This is called the

“chord tone,” and the root of the chord that is played at the

same time is called the “bass tone.”

At Step 3 “Procedure” (p. 155), touch <Pedal Setting>.

fig.d-pedalset.eps_50

At Step 3 “Procedure” (p. 155), touch <Arranger Config>.

fig.d-arrset.eps_50

Touch <Bend Range>

setting.

to adjust the bend range

Touch

of each item to make settings.

You can set this to any value within a range of 1 to 12 (in

half-tone steps, up to one octave).

Parame-

ter Name

Value

Explanation

All Music Style parts are

played.

Accomp

Only Music Style rhythm

parts, chord Tones, and

bass Tones are played.

Chord&Bs

OFF,

Acoustic Bs.,

A. Bass+Cymbl,

Fingered Bs.,

Picked Bs.,

Fretless Bs.,

Slap Bass,

Bass

Tone

Organ Bass,

Synth Bass 101,

Thum Voice

Selects the bass Tone or

chord Tone. When set to

“Off,” no tone is played.

OFF, E.Piano 1,

E. Piano 2,

Soft E. Piano,

Hard E. Piano,

Slow Strings,

Strings,

Chord

Tone

Choir,

Doos Voice

159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

Changing the Settings for the

Count-In and Countdown

Parame-

ter Name

Value

Explanation

The function that allows

the KR to recognize

accompaniment chords

when you press only one

or two keys during

1. ^{Press the [Metronome] button.}

The Metronome screen (p. 52) appears.

2. ^{Touch <Count In> or <Countdown>.}

Chord

Intelli

ON, OFF

Automatic

Accompaniment is called

the “Chord Intelligence

function” (p. 60). When

set to “Off,” play all of the

notes to specify chords.

The “Count In settings screen” or the “Countdown

settings screen” appears.

3. ^Touch

of each item to make settings.

4. ^{Touch <Exit> to return to the Metronome screen.}

■ Placing a Marker in the Middle

■ Settings for the Count-In

of a Measure

→ For detailed information about count-in, refer to “Match the

A marker is normally placed at the start of the selected

measure, but you can also set it so that a marker is placed at a

position partway through a measure.

Tempo Before You Begin Playing (Count In)” (p. 98).

fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50

→ For detailed information about Marker, refer to “Setting

Markers for Repeated Practice (Marker)” (p. 100).

1. ^{Press the [Menu] button.}

The Menu screen appears.

2. ^{Touch <Marker>.}

The Marker screen appears.

3. ^{Touch <Option>.}

A screen like the following appears.

fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50

Parame-

Value

Explanation

ter Name

Count-in will be added

(ON) or not (OFF).

Switch

ON, OFF

Stick, Click,

Electronic,

Voice (JP),

Voice (ENG),

Wood Block,

Triangle

Specify the count-in

sound.

Sound

Castanets,

Handclap

Animal

4. ^{Touch <Resolution>}

to choose the marker

Specify the length (number

of measures) of the count-

in.

setting.

Measures 1, 2

Indication

Explanation

When “Repeat” is turned

ON on the Marker screen

(p. 102) this specified

whether the count-in will

sound each time the range

between the markers is

repeated, or only the first

time.

This lets you place a marker at the

beginning of the measure.

Measure

Beat

Repeat

First, Every

This lets you place a marker at the

beginning of the beat.

5. ^{Touch <Exit> to go back to the Marker screen.}

160

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

■ Settings for the Countdown

Other Settings

→ For detailed information about count-in, refer to “Having a

You can change the tuning, the language shown on the

Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro (Countdown)” (p.

display, and other settings to make the KR easier to use.

68).

fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50

■ Procedure

1. ^{Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch}

Program [Piano] button.

2. ^{Touch <Functions>.}

When you touch <Functions> on the Basic screen, the

first page displayed shows the parameters for the

Automatic Accompaniment settings (p. 155).

When you touch <Functions> on the Piano screen, the

parameters for the piano performance settings continue

into the second page (p. 152).

A “Functions screen” like the following appears.

fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50

Parame-

ter Name

Value

Explanation

Countdown will be added

(ON) or not (OFF).

Switch

ON, OFF

Voice (JP),

Voice (ENG)

Specify the countdown

sound.

Sound

Part

Specify the track or part

that will determine the

beginning of the

performance when added

a countdown.

Both Tracks

Lower Track

Upper Track

Part 1–16

Parameter

Explanation

Master Tune

Sets the KR’s standard pitch (p. 162).

Selects the language used in the

display (p. 162).

Language

Opening

Message

Sets the message that appears when

the power is turned on (p. 162).

MIDI Ensemble

Refer to p. 173.

Selects the content to be shown on the

connected external display (p. 163).

ExternalDisplay

User Image

Display

Selects the image data and display

used (p. 163).

MIDI Setting

Refer to p. 174.

Program

Change

Refer to p. 174.

Remains the beat indicator off at all

times (p. 164).

Beat Indicator

Stores edited settings and other data to

the KR (p. 164).

Memory Backup

Restores the content stored with

Memory Backup to the original factory

settings (p. 165).

Factory Reset

Touch Screen

Allows for calibration of the touch

screen (p. 165).

Aux Out

Refer to p. 177

Refer to p. 168

Moving Key

Changing the Functions of the Remote

Control’s Buttons (p. 167).

Remote Control

161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

3. ^{Touch the name of the parameter you want to set.}

■ Changing the Screen Message

When the Power Is Turned On

(Opening Message)

Refer to the corresponding page for each function.

4. ^{Touch <Exit> to return to the Functions screen.}

You can modify this screen to show your favorite phrase

when the power is turned on.

■ Changing Standard Pitch

(Master Tune)

At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 161), touch <Opening Message>.

“Standard pitch” generally refers to the pitch that is heard

when you play middle A. When performing in an ensemble

with other instruments, adjust the standard pitch so that the

instruments of the ensemble match. Tuning all the

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-openmsg.eps_50

instruments to a standard pitch is called “master tuning.”

At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 161), touch <Master Tune>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-tuning.eps_50

Use

to move the cursor.

When you touch the character icon, the character is input

where at the position.

When you touch the icon for the character to be input, the

character appears at the cursor position. For example,

touching the <ABC> icon in succession cycles you through the

available choices in that character group (A→B→C→A...).

Touch

to change the pitch.

Standard pitch can be set to any value from 415.3–466.2 Hz.

The setting is at “440.0 Hz” when the KR is powered up.

Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters through

“English (upper case),” “English (lower case),” “numerals,”

“symbols,” then back to “English (upper case).”

■ Changing the Language (Language)

Five choices are available for the language used in displaying

When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor position is

deleted.

information on the screen.

When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor

position.

At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 161), touch <Language>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-lang.eps_50

When you have finished inputting the characters, touch

<Execute>.

* Never turn off the power while the display indicates

<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s

internal memory, making it unusable.

→ If you touch <All Clear> at the bottom of the screen and then

touch <Execute>, the display reverts to the screen that

normally appears when you turn on the power to the

instrument.

Touch

to select the language.

Available settings

English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish

German, Spanish, and French are displayed for some

functions. Other screens will be displayed in English.

162

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

■ Changing the Settings for Showing

Images with the External Display

(External Display)

■ Selecting Images To Be Shown on

the KR and External Displays

(User Image Display)

This selects the content shown on the external display

You can have image data from computers and other devices

shown on the onboard display, or on an external display

you’ve connected. You can store two types of image data,

“KR-display-use” data, and “external-display-use” data.

connected to the KR.

At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 161), touch <External Display>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-extdisp.eps_50

→ “KR-display-use” images appear on the KR’s display when the

instrument’s power is turned on. Refer to the procedure in

“Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the External

Display (External Display)” (p. 163) to set the instrument so

the “external-display-use” image is displayed on the external

display.

At Step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 161), touch <User Image

Display>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-usrimage.eps_50

Touch the parameter

to make the settings.

Settings

Value

Setting

Explanation

The display of scores, lyrics,

score + keyboard, and image

data are switched

Auto

automatically.

Selecting the display to be set

The Score screen is normally

displayed.

Score

1. ^{Touch <KR Display> or <Ext. Display>.}

Mode

The Lyrics screen is normally

displayed. However, lyrics

are displayed only when

playing back music files that

contains lyrics data.

Select the setting either for “KR-display-use” or

“external-display-use” images.

Lyrics

Selecting the images to be displayed

First, take a floppy disk to which the image data stored

in the KR has been saved, and insert the floppy disk in

the disk drive.

Score and

Keyboard

The score and keyboard are

displayed.

Bitmap,

2. ^{Touch <File>.}

Selects the screen’s

background color.

“Bitmap” displays a image

data set in “User Image

Display” (p. 163).

White, Black,

Red, Yellow,

Green, Blue,

Cyan,

Backgro

und

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-usrimage2.eps_50

Magenta

White, Black,

Red, Yellow,

Green, Blue,

Cyan,

Line

Color

Selects the color used for

lines and text in the display.

Magenta

White, Black,

Red, Yellow,

Green, Blue,

Cyan,

Selects the color used for the

bouncing ball on the score

and lyrics displays.

Bouncin

g Ball

Magenta

163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

3. ^{Touch the name of the stored image data.}

■ Turning Off the Beat Indicator

(Beat Indicator)

When you touch <Preview>, you can then show the

selected image data on the display selected in Step 1.

The beat indicator normally flashes in time with the

metronome, Music Style, or song tempo. However, if you

wish, it can be set to remain off at all times.

4. ^{Touch <Save>.}

The selected image data is stored.

At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 161), touch <Beat Indicator>.

5. ^{Touch <Exit> to return to the previous screen.}

To clear the stored image data, touch <Erase>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-memory.eps_50

❍ Image data that KR can display

320 x 240 pixels (for KR display)

Size

640 x 480 pixels (for external display)

Color

1/4/8 bit (2/16/256 colors)

BMP format

Format

The KR cannot deal with compressed

image data.

1–8 characters in length (lowercase is ok). A

filename extension of “.BMP” (uppercase

characters) must be added after the name.

Touch

to turn the setting ON, or OFF (so the beat

indicator remains off).

■ Remembering the Settings

Even When the Power is

The following characters can be used to

name an image.

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U

V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s

t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 # $ % & ‘ ( ) -

@ ~ { } ^ _ !

Name

Turned Off (Memory Backup)

Normally, the various settings revert to their default values

when the power is turned off. However, you can specify that

the settings will be remembered even when the power is

turned off. This function is called “Memory Backup.”

If you use a character that cannot be used

in a name, it will be replaced by another

character when displayed.

→ For more on the settings stored using Memory Backup, refer to

“Parameters Stored in Memory Backup” (p. 200).

At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 161), touch <Memory Backup>.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-memory.eps_50

Touch <Execute>.

The confirmation message appears on screen.

Touch <OK> to store the setting.

When the setting has been stored in memory, the previous

screen will reappear.

* Never turn off the power while the display indicates

<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s

internal memory, making it unusable.

164

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

■ Restoring the Factory Settings

■ Calibrating the Touch Screen

(Factory Reset)

(Touch Screen)

You can return the content stored with “Memory Backup” (p.

164) and the User Programs (p. 122) to their original factory

settings. This operation is referred to as “Factory Reset.”

If you’ve been using the touch screen for some time, the

pointer may be shifted, making the KR react incorrectly. You

should correct this displacement when necessary by

performing calibration (repositioning).

When you perform a Factory Reset, all settings that have been

stored in memory up to then are erased and reset to their

factory defaults.

At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 161), touch “Touch Screen.”

A screen like the one shown below appears.

→ This operation does not return the touch screen calibration

settings to the original factory condition. To return the touch

screen calibration settings to the original factory settings, refer

to “Returning the touch screen calibration settings to the

original factory settings” (p. 165)

fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50

→ When you want to restore the content registered to the KR’s

User memory to the factory condition, refer to “Formatting the

User Memory” (p. 165).

At step 3 in “Procedure” (p. 161), touch “Factory Reset.”

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-factory.eps_50

Touch <Execute>.

Touch the points indicated.

Do this carefully, because touching a location that’s different

from the one indicated for the pointer may make the

displacement even worse. Be sure to touch the pointer

accurately.

When the calibration is finished, touch <Write> to store the

settings.

If you don’t write them to memory, the calibration settings

will be discarded as soon as the power is switched off.

Touch <Execute>.

Returning the touch screen calibration settings

to the original factory settings

The confirmation message appears on screen.

Touch <OK> to restore the original factory settings.

When the setting is changed, the previous screen returns.

If you touch <Factory Reset> in the above screen, the touch

screen calibration settings revert to the original factory

settings.

When you touch <Cancel>, the settings are left untouched,

and you’re returned to the previous screen.

* Never turn off the power while the display indicates

<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s

internal memory, making it unusable.

Formatting the User Memory

The KR features an internal storage area where you can save

recorded performances and User Styles. This space is called

the “User Memory.”

The following content is stored to the user memory.

• Content registered to the “Favorites” (p. 80)

• Sets of saved User Programs (p. 123)

• User Styles saved on user memory (p. 149)

• Image files set with the “User Image settings” (p. 163)

To delete all of the content held in the user memory and

restore the original factory settings, carry out the following

procedure.

165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

1. ^{Press the [Disk] button.}

3. ^{Touch <ON> or <OFF>.}

Even when you press the Music Style [User] button

(User/Disk screen) or the [User Program] button, the

rest of the procedure is the same.

When set to “ON,” the Quick Tour starts when you turn

on the power. The demo stops as soon as you carry out

any kind of operation. If no operation is performed for

5–10 minutes after that, the automatic demo starts again.

2. ^{Touch <File>.}

3. ^{Touch <Format User Memory>.}

When set to “OFF,” the Quick Tour does not start unless

you touch the Quick Tour screen icon.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50

4. ^{Touch <Exit> to return to the Quick Tour screen.}

→ This setting is saved even after the power is turned off.

For more information about Quick Tour, refer to the Quick

Start.

Disabling Functions Other

Than Piano Performance

(Panel Lock)

4. ^{Touch <OK>.}

All of the content in the user memory is deleted.

If you touch <Cancel>, the deletion is cancelled, and

you’re returned to the previous screen.

The “Panel Lock” function locks the KR in a state where only

piano performance can be used, and all buttons will be

disabled. This prevents the settings from being inadvertently

modified even if children press the buttons accidentally.

* Never turn off the power while the display indicates

<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KR’s

internal memory, making it unusable.

In the Panel Lock state, only the grand piano sound can be

played.

→ Carrying out this operation does not initialize any settings

other than the user memory settings. To restore settings other

than those for the user memory to the original factory settings,

carry out Factory Reset (p. 165).

1. ^{Turn down the volume all the way.}

2. ^{Press the [Power] switch to turn off the power.}

3. ^{While holding down the [Wonderland/Game] button,}

press the [Power] switch and turn on the power.

Automatically Starting the

Quick Tour

You can set the instrument so that the Quick Tour starts

automatically with no operation required.

Then, continue to hold down the button for a few

seconds.

All buttons except for piano play are disabled.

Adjust the volume. When you play the keyboard, the

grand piano sound will be heard.

1. ^{Hold down the [Wonderland/Game] button and press}

the [Part Balance] button.

To undo the Panel Lock function, turn the volume down

to the minimum, and turn on the power once again.

The Quick Tour screen appears.

2. ^{Touch <Option>.}

fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50

166

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

Changing the Functions of

Display

Explanation

the Remote Control’s Buttons

Changes the tempo. Pressing [-] slows the

tempo down; pressing [+] speeds up the

tempo.

Tempo

You can change the functions assigned to the remote

control’s buttons.

You cannot change the tempos for CDs.

1. ^{Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch}

This adjusts the timing of the piano

accompaniment during playback of

Player Piano CDs. When [-] is pressed, the

piano sound is played earlier; when [+] is

pressed, the piano sound is played later.

Program [Piano] button.

CD Sync

2. ^{Touch <Functions>.}

When you touch <Functions> on the Basic screen, the

first page displayed shows the parameters for the

Automatic Accompaniment settings (p. 155).

When you touch <Functions> on the Piano screen, the

parameters for the piano performance settings continue

into the second page (p. 152).

Transposes the song. Pressing [-] lowers

the pitch in semitone steps; pressing [+]

raises the pitch in semitone steps.

Transpose

You cannot transpose songs on CDs.

Fast forwards and rewinds the song.

When [-] is pressed, the song rewinds;

when [+] is pressed, the song is fast

forwarded.

Bwd/Fwd

3. ^{Touch <Remote Controller>.}

A screen like the one shown below appears.

CD Volume

Changing the volume of the Song on CDs

Changing the [FUNC] Button Functions

4. ^{Touch <FUNC>}

to assign functions to

[FUNC] button.

Display

Explanation

Each time the [FUNC] button is pressed,

the piano player function is switched on

or off.

Moving Key

Random

Changing the [

4. ^{Touch <PLAY>}

] (PLAY) Button Functions

The songs are played back in random

order.

to assign functions to

Each time the [FUNC] button is pressed,

the left-hand track is switched on or off.

When turned off, the sound from the left-

hand track does not play.

[

] (PLAY) button.

Track 3

Track 4

Display

Explanation

Songs are played back continuously in

sequence, starting from the currently

selected song.

Each time the [FUNC] button is pressed,

the right-hand track is switched on or off.

When turned off, the sound from the

right-hand track does not play.

Internal Song

Songs in the selected genre are played

back continuously.

All Song

Each time the [FUNC] button is pressed,

the EQ is switched on or off.

Songs on Floppy Disks and CDs

Songs within the selected folder are

played back continuously.

Zoom

The display of the song list is expanded.

5. ^{Touch <Exit> to return to the Functions screen.}

Only the selected song is played back.

Playback stops when the song is finished.

One Song

NOTE

The remote control buttons’ original function assignments are

restored when the power is turned off. If you want to save the

changed settings, carry out the memory backup (p. 164).

Changing the TEMPO [-] [+] Button Functions

4. ^{Touch <TEMPO>}

to assign functions to

TEMPO [-] [+] button.

167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

■ Changing the Part That Makes

Enabling the Moving Key

the Keys Move

■ Changing the Moving Key

Using the Track Buttons to Choose the Part

That Makes the Keys Move

Settings

You can have the keyboard play automatically along with the

performance.

Upon power-up, the instrument is set so the keys move along

with the performances of the Whole, Upper, and Lower

tracks. You can choose a different part to make the keys

move by pressing the Track buttons, and changing the

buttons that are lighted.

1. Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch

Program [Piano] button.

2. ^{Touch <Functions>.}

1. ^{Choose the song to play (p. 77).}

When you touch <Functions> on the Basic screen, the

first page displayed shows the parameters for the

Automatic Accompaniment settings (p. 155).

When you touch <Functions> on the Piano screen, the

parameters for the piano performance settings continue

into the second page (p. 152).

2. ^{Press the Track button you want to have associated}

with key movement a number of times, until the

button’s light is flashing.

Each time you press a Track button, its light changes to

the next state, in this order: lighted → extinguished →

flashing → lighted →....

3. ^{Touch <Moving Key>.}

The following shows the relationship between the Track

buttons, played parts, and keyboard movement.

Indicator

Indicator flashing

Indicator on

Keyboard

Movement

Sound

No movement

Sound

Indicator off

No sound

3. ^{Press the [}

(Play/Stop)] button.

Song playback starts, and the keys move along with

what is played as a result of the flashing Track button or

buttons.

4. ^Touch

to turn the setting ON, or OFF.

Display

Keyboard Function

The keys play along with the performance.

The keys do not move.

OFF

5. ^{Touch <Exit> to return to the Functions screen.}

You can also select <Moving Key> from the Menu

screen.

1. ^{Press the [Menu] button.}

The Menu screen appears.

2. ^{Touch <Moving Key>.}

The Moving Key screen appears.

168

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

Using the 16 Track Sequencer Screen to

Choose the Part That Makes the Keys Move

Detailed Song Playback

Settings

You can get the keys to move along with the performance of

parts selected with the 16 Track Sequencer screen.

■ Changing the Tone Settings

When Playing Back Songs

(Play Mode)

1. ^{Choose the song to play (p. 77).}

2. ^{Press the [Menu] button.}

The Menu screen appears.

3. Touch <16tr Sequencer>.

With the normal setting, GS tones (sounds that are

compatible with other GS instruments) will normally be used

to play back song data. By changing this setting, you can play

back song using KR-specific tones for certain portions of the

data.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-16tr.eps_50

For detailed information about GS, refer to “About the

KR Sound Generator” (p. 201).

1. ^{Press the [Menu] button.}

The Menu screen appears.

Touch

to switch the screens.

2. ^{Touch <Play Mode>.}

4. ^{Touch the part you want to have associated with key}

movement.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-plymode.eps_60

The following shows the relationship between the

indication in the display (icons), played parts, and

keyboard movement.

Icon

Keyboard

Movement

Sound

3. ^{Touch the icon to choose the setting.}

No Movement

No movement

Icon

Explanation

No sound

(no performance data for

this part)

Playback uses GS-compatible tones for

performances that sound like other GS

instruments.

No sound

(no keyboard movement

for muted parts)

No movement

Playback uses KR tones for greater

expressiveness. However, differences

may appear when playing back using

devices other than the KR.

4. ^{Touch <Exit> to go back to the Menu screen.}

5. ^{After changing this setting, try selecting the song once}

again.

For more detailed information about selecting a song,

refer to “Playing a Song” (p. 77).

169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

■ Hiding the Lyrics (Lyrics)

■ Changing the Parts Assigned

to the Track Buttons During

SMF Playback (Track Assign)

Some commercially available music files for use in karaoke,

as well as some of the internal songs include lyrics data.

When you play such music files, the lyrics automatically

appear in the screen. If you do not want lyrics to appear

automatically, set this to “OFF.”

Normally, when playing back Roland Piano Digital-

compatible SMFs (p. 201), the left-hand part is assigned to the

[3/Lower] button, and the right-hand part is assigned to the

[4/Upper] button. However, assignment of the right-hand

and left-hand parts may differ with some SMF data.

If you cannot get the right-hand and left-hand parts to work

well set on “Auto,” then change the setting to “2/1 Part” or

“3/4 Part.”

1. ^{Press the [Menu] button.}

The Menu screen appears.

Touch

to switch the screens.

2. ^{Touch <Lyrics>.}

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-lyric.eps_60

When you select this parameter, the message “OK to

delete song?” may be displayed. Refer to “If the

following screen appears” (p. 105).

This setting is effective with SMF format song data.

This is not effective with the internal songs.

1. ^{Press the [Menu] button.}

The Menu screen appears.

Touch

to switch the screens.

3. ^Touch

to select the setting.

2. ^{Touch <Track Assign>.}

A screen like the one shown below appears.

fig.d-trkasgn.eps_60

Display

Explanation

Lyrics are displayed automatically (when

performance data containing lyrics is

played back).

Lyrics are not displayed, even if the song

data being played back contains lyrics data.

OFF

4. ^{Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.}

3. Touch

to select the setting.

Even when this is set to “OFF,” you can still have the lyrics be

displayed by touching <lyrics> when it appears in the Piano or

Basic screen (p. 25).

Display

Explanation

The part assigned to each track will be

determined automatically,

Auto

depending on the song data.

The screen may be switched when you press the button

while the Lyrics screen is displayed. To have the lyrics

displayed again, touch <lyrics> on the Piano or Basic

screen, or stop playback of the song, then press the

Part 1 will be assigned to the right-hand

track, part 2 to the left-hand track, and part

3 to the user track.

2/1 Part

3/4 Part

Part 4 will be assigned to the right-hand

track, part 3 to the left-hand track, and part

1 to the user track.

[

(Play/Stop)] button.

4. ^{Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.}

After changing this setting, try selecting the song once

again.

For more detailed information about selecting a song,

refer to “Playing a Song” (p. 77).

170

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Various Settings

■ Setting the Type of CD To Be

Changing the CD Settings

Played Back

■ Synchronizing the Timing of

The KR may be unable to correctly recognize the type of CD

being used. In such instances, you can specify the type of CD

manually.

the Piano and Accompaniment

With certain CDs designed to be used with the player

function, the timing of the piano and accompaniment sounds

may not be synchronized. However, you can synchronize the

piano and accompaniment.

1. ^{Press the [Menu] button.}

The Menu screen appears.

2. ^{Touch <CD>.}

1. Press the [Menu] button.

The Menu screen appears.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

2. ^{Touch <CD>.}

A screen like the one shown below appears.

3. ^{Touch the <CD Data>}

to select the type of

CD.

3. ^{Touch the <Sync> slider to adjust the timing of the}

Display

Explanation

piano sound.

Auto

The CD type is detected automatically.

4. ^{Touch <Exit> to go back to the Menu screen.}

General CDs for Player Piano contain audio

and MIDI data, and the data format may

vary from one CD to the next. If the CD’s

data format does not match the KR’s

settings, a “beep” will sound. Certain

general Automatic Piano CDs may not be

playable on the KR.

Type A

Type B

Commercial Audio CD (CDs other than

those designed for use with the piano player

piano)

Off

NOTE

Note that certain commercially available CDs cannot be played

back on the KR.

4. ^{Touch <Exit> to go back to the Menu screen.}

171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

You can connect the KR to external devices such as audio

Connecting MIDI Devices

equipment, MIDI instruments and computer.

By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging

❍ Connecting MIDI Devices (p. 172)

performance data, you can control one device from the other.

You can connect a MIDI sequencer and record performance

For instance, you can output sound from the other

data from the KR, or play performance data from the KR on

instrument or switch Tones on the other instrument.

the sequencer. Also, when you connect a MIDI sound

What’s MIDI?

module, you can perform on the KR and hear the sounds

MIDI, short for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface,” was

played through the MIDI sound module.

developed as a universal standard for the exchange of

❍ Connecting Audio Equipment (p. 176)

performance data between electronic instruments and

The KR has high-quality built-in stereo speakers, but you can

also hook it up a stereo system for an even more impressive

sound.

computers.

The KR is equipped with MIDI connectors and a Computer

connector to let it exchange performance data with external

devices. These connectors can be used to connect the KR to

an external device for even greater versatility.

You can also connect it to a tape recorder or other recording

equipment and record your performances.

A separate publication titled “MIDI Implementation” is also

available. It provides complete details concerning the way

MIDI has been implemented on this unit. If you should require

this publication (such as when you intend to carry out byte-

level programming), please contact the nearest Roland Service

Center or authorized Roland distributor.

❍Connecting External Speakers (p. 177)

You can connect an amp or external speaker to the Aux jack

and play the accompaniment and reverb sounds through it.

❍ Connecting a Computer (p. 178)

You can use a sequencer program (such as Roland Visual-

MT) to record performance data from the KR and play

performance data from the program on the KR.

■ Connectors

fig.09-

❍Connecting an Expression Pedal

You can connect an expression pedal to the KR.

NOTE

MIDI Out Connector

Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-7; sold separately).

By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk causing

malfunction and/or damage to the unit.

Connect this to the MIDI In connector on an external MIDI

device using a MIDI cable (sold separately).

Performance data when you play the keyboard or depress a

pedal is sent from this connector to the external MIDI

connector.

MIDI In Connector

Connect this to the MIDI Out connector on an external MIDI

device using a MIDI cable (sold separately).

This receives MIDI messages that are sent from external

MIDI devices. The KR receiving MIDI messages can output

sounds, exchange tones and perform other operations.

External MIDI devices can’t be used for remotely changing the

Tones played by the KR’s keyboard.

172

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

■ Making the Connections

Performing in Ensemble with

MIDI Instruments

(MIDI Ensemble)

To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other

devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power

on all devices before making any connections.

You can connect an electronic percussion device or other

MIDI instrument to the KR’s MIDI In connector for ensemble

playing. Making the MIDI settings for the instrument

connected to the MIDI In connector is easy. The sounds from

the connected MIDI instrument are played from the KR’s

speaker.

1. ^{Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on}

the device you’re about to connect.

2. ^{Switch off the power to the KR and the device you’re}

about to connect.

3. ^{Set the Computer switch on the underside of the unit to}

1. ^{Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch}

“MIDI.”

Program [Piano] button.

4. ^{Use a MIDI cable (sold separately) to connect the MIDI}

2. ^{Touch <Functions>.}

connectors to each other.

Please refer to the connection examples below.

3. ^{Touch <MIDI Ensemble>.}

A screen like the following appears.

fig.09-04.eps

5. ^{Switch on the power to the KR and the connected}

device.

6. ^{Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected}

device.

7. ^{You should also set the MIDI settings as needed.}

For details on the MIDI-related settings, refer to

p. 174–p. 175.

Connection Examples:

Setup with a MIDI Sequencer

fig.09-10

4. ^{Select the method for using the MIDI In connector.}

Roland MT Series

Displayed

Meaning

Out

MIDI

Normal setting. Make changes in Tone and

other settings from the connected device.

Normal

Bottom of the KR

Select this when you have percussion pads

(such as Roland’s SPD-20 Total Percussion

Pad) connected to the KR’s MIDI In

connector. You do not need to make any

MIDI settings on the KR. Select pad Tones

and make other settings from the connected

pads (for further details, refer to the Owner’s

Manual provided with the pads).

Pad

When the KR is connected to a MIDI sequencer, set it to Local

OFF. Refer to “Disconnecting the Keyboard from the Internal

Sound Generator (Local On/Off)” (p. 174).

Select this when you have a keyboard (such

as a Roland A-37 or AX-7 MIDI Keyboard

Controller) connected to the KR’s MIDI In

connector. You can select tones for the

connected keyboard from the KR. No MIDI

settings need be made on the KR.

Connecting with a MIDI Sound Module

fig.09-

Keyboard

Sound Module

MIDI

OUT

THRU

5. ^{When “Keyboard” is selected in Step 4 above, use}

Bottom of the KR

to select the Tone.

The connected keyboard plays using the selected Tone.

173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

Making the Settings

MIDI Settings

You can make MIDI settings like those described below.

1. ^{Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch}

Program [Piano] button.

“MIDI Setting Screen”

fig.09-04.eps

2. ^{Touch <Functions>.}

3. ^{Touch <MIDI Setting> or <Program Change>.}

4. Touch

to make the setting for each

item.

Touch <Exit> to return to the Functions screen.

■ Selecting the Transmit Channel

(Tx Channel)

MIDI organizes things into “channels,” which are numbered

from 1 through 16. Simply connecting a cable is not enough

for communication to take place. The connected devices must

be set to use the same MIDI channels. Otherwise, no sound

will be produced, and no sounds can be selected.

Display

Explanation

Chooses the MIDI send channel

(p. 174).

Tx Channel

Switches Local Control on or off

(p. 174).

Local Control

Select the transmit channel (1–16) of the KR.

The channel setting is at “1” when the KR is powered up.

“Program Change Screen”

fig.09-04.eps

If the keyboard has been split into right-hand and left-hand

sections, messages from the left-hand section are fixed at “3.”

The KR receives messages on all channels from 1 through 16.

■ Disconnecting the Internal

Sound Generator and

Keyboard (Local Control)

When connecting a MIDI sequencer, set Local Control to

“OFF.” The setting is at “Local Control ON” when the KR is

powered up.

As illustrated, information describing what has been played

on the keyboard is passed to the sound module over two

different routes, (1) and (2). As a result, you hear overlapping

or intermittent sounds. To prevent this from happening,

route (1) must be disabled, by setting the unit to what is

Display

Explanation

Sends Bank Select MSB messages

(p. 175).

Bank Select MSB

Sends Bank Select LSB messages

(p. 175).

Bank Select LSB

Program Change

known as “Local Off.”

fig.09-

Sends Program Change messages

(Program Numbers) (p. 175).

Local On

(1)

Sequencer

Memory

MIDI

OUT

MIDI

Sound

Generator

MIDI

OUT

MIDI

Soft Tru On

(2)

Each note played is sounded twice

174

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

Local On: The keyboard and internal sound generator are

■ Sending Recorded

connected.

fig.09-

Performance Data to a MIDI

Device (Composer MIDI Out)

Sound is emitted

When Composer Out is active, you can send performance

data recorded with the KR to a connected MIDI device or

computer.

Sound Generator

Local On

When you turn on the power, this is set to “OFF” (data is not

sent).

1. ^{Press the [Menu] button.}

2. ^{Touch <Composer MIDI Out>.}

Local Off: The keyboard and internal sound generator are

fig.09-04.eps

separated. No sound will be produced by the keyboard when

it is played.

fig.09-

No sound produced

Sound Generator

Local Off

3. Touch

to set ON or OFF.

→ When connecting a unit in the Roland MT series, you don’t

need to switch off Local Control. MT units transmit Local Off

messages when their power is switched on. If you first switch

on the KR, then the MT-series device, Local Control is

automatically switched off on the KR.

4. ^{Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.}

■ Sending Tone Change Messages

(Program Change/Bank Select

MSB/Bank Select LSB)

A Program Change is a message that means “change to the

Tone of the specified number.” The device that receives this

changes to the Tone of the corresponding number.

When you choose a Program Change message (Program

Number), the Program Number will be transmitted to the

MIDI device connected to the KR. The MIDI device that

receives the Program Number changes the tone to the

corresponding Program Number.

Normally, the Tone is selected from the 128 Tones available.

Some MIDI devices, however, have more than 128 Tones.

With such devices, the Tone is selected through a

combination of Program Change messages and Bank Select

messages. There are two parts of a Bank Select message: the

MSB (Controller 0, with a value of 0–127) and the LSB

(Controller 32, with a value of 0–127).

Some MIDI instruments can’t handle Bank Select messages.

Others can handle Bank Selects, but do not recognize the LSB

part.

175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

Playing Sounds from the KR Through the Speakers

on Audio Equipment or Recording Your

Performances on a Recording Device

Connecting to Audio

Equipment

fig.09-

When you connect the KR to audio equipment, you can play

the sounds from the KR through the speakers on the audio

equipment or record your performances on a tape recorder

or other recording device.

Input R/L

(Line In, Aux In)

Bottom of the KR

When connecting, please use audio cables (sold separately)

with standard phone plugs.

■ Connectors

fig.09-

1. ^{Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on}

the device you’re about to connect.

2. ^{Turn off the power to the KR and other connected}

equipment.

Input Jacks

You can connect another sound source, such as audio

equipment or an electronic instrument, using audio cables

(sold separately). Play the sounds from the connected device

through the speakers on the KR.

3. ^{Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the}

connection.

4. ^{Switch on the KR.}

5. ^{Switch on the connected device.}

If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must

use the L (Mono) jack.

6. ^{Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected}

You cannot use the KR to adjust the volume of the connected

sound generating device.

device.

Recording KR Performances on a Recording Device

Output (Main) Jacks

7. ^{Start recording with the connected device.}

You can connect audio equipment using audio cables (sold

separately) and play the sounds from the KR through the

speakers on the connected equipment, or record your

performances on a tape recorder or other recording device.

8. ^{Play the keyboard.}

9. ^{When the performance ends, stop recording on the}

connected equipment.

If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must

use the L (Mono) jack.

Playing Audio Equipment Sounds Through the

Speakers on the KR

Output (Aux) Jacks

fig.09-

Select this when playing the keyboard performance through

the KR’s internal speaker and the accompaniment sound

through an amp or speaker connected to the Output (Aux)

jack.

Output R/L

(Line Out)

Bottom of the KR

■ Making the Connections

To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other

devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power

on all devices before making any connections.

1. ^{Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on}

the device you’re about to connect.

2. ^{Turn off the power to the KR and other connected}

equipment.

3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the

connection.

4. ^{Turn on the connected equipment.}

176

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

5. ^{Turn on the KR.}

■ Setup Examples With Aux Set

to “Surround”

6. ^{Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected}

device.

Spacious Location

The piano sound is played through the KR’s speaker, and the

surround sound is played through the external speaker.

External Speaker and KR’s Speaker Volume Settings (p. 37).

• Volume of the external speaker is raised

After use, turn off the power using the following procedure.

1. ^{Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on}

the device you’re about to connect.

• Volume of the KR’s speaker is lowered

2. ^{Turn off the KR.}

Piano Sound

3. ^{Turn off the connected equipment.}

Speaker

■ Changing the Aux Jack

Settings (Aux Out)

1. Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch

Program [Piano] button.

2. ^{Touch <Functions>.}

When you touch <Functions> on the Basic screen, the

first page displayed shows the parameters for the

Automatic Accompaniment settings (p. 155).

When you touch <Functions> on the Piano screen, the

parameters for the piano performance settings continue

into the second page (p. 152).

Mixer

3. Touch <Aux Out>.

A screen like the following appears.

fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50

Speaker

Location Limited in Space

The piano sound is played through the KR’s speaker, and the

surround sound is played both through the KR’s speaker and

the external speaker.

External Speaker and KR’s Speaker Volume Settings (p. 37).

• Volume of the external speaker is raised

• Volume of the KR’s speaker is raised

4. ^Touch

to choose the marker setting.

Piano Sound

Display

Explanation

Select this when using an external

speaker for the surround effect

(p. 35).

Surround

Select this when playing the

keyboard performance through the

KR’s internal speaker and the

accompaniment sound through an

amp or speaker connected to the

Aux jack.

Concert

Speaker

5. ^{Touch <Exit> to go back to the Marker screen.}

177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

■ Connect to the Computer

Connecting a Computer

Connector

■ Connect to the MIDI Connectors

You can connect a computer on which a sequencing program

such as Roland Visual MT is installed and save songs

recorded on the KR on the computer.

You can use a USB MIDI interface cable (sold separately) to

connect the KR to your computer.

If the KR is connected to a computer in which sequencer

software such as Roland’s “Visual MT” is installed, a song

you’ve recorded on the KR can be saved on your computer.

■ Connectors

fig.09-

Connection examples

To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other

devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power

on all devices before making any connections.

Computer Connector

You can connect a computer to this connector to exchange

performance data.

In order to make connections to your computer, you must

install “MIDI driver” software on your computer. For details,

refer to the owner’s manual for your MIDI interface.

Use a computer cable (sold separately) to make the

connection.

The type of cable required will depend on your computer.

Use a USB MIDI interface cable to connect the USB

connector of your computer to the MIDI connectors of

the KR.

Computer Switch

The setting for this switch is made depending on the

computer connected— Mac/PC-1/PC-2.

When this switch is set to MIDI, this connector cannot be

used.

Set the Computer switch on the KR’s bottom panel to

“MIDI,” then turn on the power to the KR.

fig.comp.e

Bottom of the KR

■ Making the Connections

To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other

devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power

on all devices before making any connections.

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

1. ^{Turn off the KR and the computer.}

USB Connector

of your Computer

2. ^{Using a compatible computer cable (sold separately),}

connect the Computer connector on the underside of

the KR with the computer’s serial port.

UM-1 etc.

Computer

3. ^{Set the computer switch on the underside of the KR to}

match the type of computer connected.

Please refer to the connection examples below.

Change the setting of the Computer switch only after the

power to the unit is off.

4. ^{Turn on the KR.}

5. ^{Turn on the computer.}

6. ^{Make the settings for baud rate (transmission speed)}

for the computer and the software.

→ For more information on this procedure, please refer to the

owner’s manual for your computer.

7. ^{You should also make the settings for the MIDI send}

channel and Local Control ON or OFF as needed (p.

174).

178

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices

Connection Examples:

Connection with an Apple Macintosh computer

Use a computer cable (sold separately) to connect the

Computer connector on the KR to the modem port (or printer

port) on the Apple Macintosh. Set the Computer switch to

“Mac.”

When using the Macintosh “Patch Bay” utility, specify 1

MHz as the Interface Type (MIDI Interface Clock).

fig.09-

Apple Macintosh

Modem Port

Macintosh IIci

Computer cable (sold separately)

Connection with an IBM PC

Use a computer cable (sold separately) to connect the

Computer connector on the KR to the COM1 or COM2 serial

port on the IBM PC. Set the Computer switch to “PC-2.”

fig.09-

IBM PC/AT

RS-232C

Computer cable (sold separately)

179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendices

Troubleshooting

If you think there’s a problem, read this first.

Case

Cause/Remedy

Case

Cause/Remedy

The power doesn’t

come on

Do you have different external devices

plugged into different power outlets?

When connecting external devices, always

draw power from the same outlet.

Is the power cord connected and plugged in

correctly? (p. 20)

Low hum coming

from external

device

The button doesn’t

work

Is the panel locked? (p. 166)

Turn the power off, then back on.

No sound is heard

The KR uses a liquid-crystal screen, so text

may not be displayed when the ambient

temperature is below freezing.

Nothing appears

on screen

Is the volume level of the KR (p. 22) or

connected device turned all the way down?

Are headphones plugged in? (p. 22)

Vertical lines

appear in the

screen/Color is

“washed out” at the

edges of the

screen

These occur due to the nature of a liquid

crystal display, and do not indicate a

malfunction. They can be minimized by

adjusting the brightness of the screen (p. 24).

Has the Balance knob been moved all the way

to the right or left?

Has the volume been set to “0” using the Part

Balance? (p. 75)

No sound is heard

Are all sliders in the Equalizer screen at the

minimum level? (p. 40)

The positioning of the touch screen may

become displaced if some time has passed

since it was last used. Take a look at

“Calibrating the Touch Screen (Touch

Screen)” (p. 165) to correct the positioning.

The touch screen

doesn’t respond

correctly

Has the footage been adjusted so that all

frequency components aren’t sounded? (p. 15

in the Quick Start)

Have all devices been switched on?

Is the pedal connected correctly?

Make sure the pedal cord extending from the

stand is securely connected to the pedal

connector on the rear of the unit (p. 20).

Are the MIDI cables connected correctly? (p.

173)

No sound is heard

(when a MIDI

instrument is

connected)

Does the MIDI channel match the connected

instrument? (p. 174)

Depressing a

Has a different function been assigned to the

pedal?

pedal has no

Is the Computer switch on the bottom of the

KR set to “MIDI”? (p. 178)

See “Assigning Functions to Pedals and

Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/User

Functions)” (p. 157).

effect, or the pedal

effect doesn’t stop

The MIDI connectors and the computer

connector cannot be used at the same time.

Confirm that the computer switch is set to

“MIDI” when a MIDI device is connected to

the MIDI connector, and to either “MAC,”

“PC-1,” “PC-2,” when a computer is

You cannot use a

connected MIDI

device and

Normal pedal operation is automatically

enabled when the One Touch Program

[Piano] button is pressed (p. 21).

computer

The volume level

of the instrument

connected to Input

jacks is too low

Could you be using a connection cable that

contains a resistor?

Use a connection cable that does not contain a

resistor.

simultaneously

connected to the Computer connector (p. 178).

Has Local Control been set to “Off”?

When Local Control is set to Off, no sound is

produced by playing the keyboard.

Set Local Control to On (p. 174).

No sound is heard

when the keyboard

is played

Is the external display properly connected (p. 23)?

Is the external display’s power turned on?

The maximum number of notes can play

simultaneously is 128. Frequent use of the

damper pedal during automatic

accompaniment or when playing along with a

song on floppy disk may result in

Are you using a display that is compatible

with the KR?

Refer to “Displays That Can Be Connected to

This Instrument” (p. 23).

Not all played

Images not shown

on external display

when external

display is

notes are sounded

performance data with too many notes,

causing some notes to drop out.

Are the KR’s settings correct?

Follow the instructions in “Selecting Images

To Be Shown on the KR and External Displays

(User Image Display)” (p. 163) to set the

“External Display” image. Also refer to

“Changing the Settings for Showing Images

with the External Display (External Display)”

(p. 163).

connected

180

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting

Case

Cause/Remedy

Case

Cause/Remedy

When listening through headphones:

Some of the more flamboyant and effervescent

piano tones feature an ample high-end

component, which may make the sound

appear to have metallic reverberation added.

Since this reverberation becomes particularly

audible when supplemented by heavy reverb,

you may be able to diminish the problem by

reducing the amount of reverb applied to the

sound.

When listening through speakers:

Here, a different cause (such as resonance

produced by the KR) would be suspect.

Consult your Roland dealer or nearest Roland

Service Center.

The sound is strange

Is the KR in layer play? (p. 30)

Sounds are heard

twice (doubled)

when the keyboard

is played

When the KR is connected to an external

sequencer, set it to the Local OFF mode

(p. 174). Alternatively, the sequencer could be

set so its Soft Thru feature is OFF.

A High-pitched

whine is produced

Have you set transpose? (p. 103)

The tuning or pitch

of the keyboard or

song is off

Are the settings for the “Temperament” and

“Stretch Tuning” correct? (p. 153)

Is the setting for the “Master Tune” correct?

(p. 162)

It’s not possible to apply more than one effect

at the same time, so when a performance has

been recorded on multiple tracks or when

playing along with a song as it’s played back,

the desired effect may not be applied.

When listening through speakers:

Playing at loud volumes may cause

instruments near the KR to resonate.

Resonation can also occur with fluorescent

light tubes, glass doors, and other objects. In

particular, this problem occurs more easily

when the bass component is increased, and

when the sound is played at higher volumes.

Use the following measures to suppress such

resonance.

• Place speakers so they are 10–15 cm from

walls and other surfaces.

• Reduce the volume.

• Move the speakers away from any

resonating objects.

Effects cannot be

applied to Tones

Have the Chord Tone and Bass Tone been

changed? (p. 159)

Some Chord Tone and Bass Tone notes may

be sounded continuously.

A note doesn’t stop

playing

The bass range

sounds odd, or

there is a vibrating

resonance

During automatic accompaniment, changing

the Music Style automatically changes the

Tones and tempo of the upper part of the

keyboard to match the new Music Style. If you

want to change only the Music Style without

also altering the tempo and Tone, check out

“Changing Music Styles Without Changing

the Tone or Tempo (One Touch Setting)” (p.

156).

When listening through headphones:

Here, a different cause (such as resonance

produced by the KR) would be suspect.

Consult your Roland dealer or nearest Roland

Service Center.

The Tone has

changed

When a performance made along with a

Music Files tune has been recorded, recording

the performance to button [1/Whole] may

make the Tones for buttons [3/Lower] and

[4/Upper] change as well.

The automatic accompaniment doesn’t play

correctly

Touch <Exit> several times to return to the

Basic screen (p. 24), and then select a tone or

Music Style.

Can’t select a tone

Since the KR’s piano sounds faithfully

reproduce the sense of spaciousness and

reverberation of an actual acoustic piano’s

sound, a certain amount of reverberation is still

perceptible, even with the reverb effect

deactivated.

or Music Style

Reverberation still

audible even with

Reverb turned off

Has the Balance knob been moved all the way

to the right? (p. 75)

Have you pressed the One Touch Program

Automatic

[Arranger] button?

On an acoustic piano, notes in the upper one

and a half octaves of the keyboard continue to

sound until they decay naturally, regardless

of the damper pedal. There is a difference in

the timbre as well. Roland pianos faithfully

simulate such characteristics of the acoustic

piano. The range that is unaffected by the

damper pedal will change depending on the

Key Transpose setting.

accompaniment is

not heard

If the One Touch Program [Arranger] button

has not been pressed, only the rhythm pattern

is played (p. 65).

In the upper range,

the sound changes

abruptly beyond a

certain key

Is the 16-track Sequencer screen displayed?

(p. 127)

Has Chord Intelligence been switched off? (p.

159)

Chord Intelligence

can’t be used

Is the setting for “Piano Style Arranger”

active? (p. 74)

181

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting

Case

Cause/Remedy

Case

Cause/Remedy

In certain cases, such as when playing Music

Styles on floppy disks, the accompaniment

may lag when excessive amounts of

performance data are used.

If you select a part that does not contain

performance data, notes will not be displayed

in the score. Change the part that is displayed

(p. 90).

Accompaniment

tempo becomes

unstable

Song doesn’t play back correctly

The score screen feature is particularly

unsuitable for the display of difficult,

complex musical works that demand accurate

notation. Refer to “Notes Regarding the Score

Display” (p. 89).

Score is not

indicated properly

in the display

Does the screen indicate message, like “OK to

delete song?” (p. 105)

Song doesn’t play

back

The internal songs cannot be played back

while recorded performance data remains in

the KR’s memory. Try playing back the song

after deleting the performance data.

In the score screen, some lyrics or notes could

extend beyond the edges of the screen, and

not be displayed.

Is the light for the Track button extinguished?

(p. 99)

If the button light is out, the music on that

track is not heard. Press the track button so

the light is illuminated.

In certain cases, such as when playing songs

on floppy disks, the song may lag when

excessive amounts of performance data are

used.

Only the sound of a

particular

Song becomes

unstable

instrument in a

song does not play

Have song settings been changed for each Part

on the 16-Track sequencer screen (p. 128)?

Can’t record

Has one of the track buttons for recording

been selected? (p. 111)

Some music files may contain settings that

stop play at a point partway through the song.

Pressing the [

(Reset)] button

doesn’t return to

the beginning of

the song

Has the setting for “Punch-in Recording”

(p. 133) or “Tempo Recording” (p. 142) been

made?

Press the [

(Reset)] button several times

more to return to the beginning of the tune.

Can’t record

Select the replace recording method (p. 131).

Has a Marker placed in the song? (p. 100)

It is not possible to record while the score is

being generated. Once the unit has finished

generating the score (i.e., when the measure

number in the screen is no longer

The fast-forward and reverse buttons are

ignored while music files is being read in.

Wait until processing finishes.

The [

and [

(Fwd)]

(Bwd)]

If you attempt to play back performance data

that contains more data than the entire

capacity of the KR’s memory, you may find

that operations other than playback (such as

rewind or fast forward) become unavailable.

highlighted), try the operation once again.

buttons don’t work

If you select an internal song in which the

tempo changes during the song, and then

record, the tempo will change in the same

way for the performances that are recorded

on the other tracks. The tempo of the

There are two types of SMF music files:

format 0 and format 1. If the song uses SMF

format 1 data, there will be a slight delay until

playback starts. Refer to the booklet that came

with the music files you’re using to determine

the format type.

There is a slight

delay before

playback of a song

on floppy disk

starts

Tempo of recorded

song or

metronome will also change in the same way.

metronome is off

If you record additional material without

erasing the previously recorded song, the

song will be recorded at the first-recorded

tempo. Please erase the previously recorded

song before you re-record (p. 112).

With some music files, the lyrics cannot be

displayed correctly.

Any performance that has been recorded is

deleted when the power to the KR is turned

off or a song is selected. A performance

cannot be restored once it’s been deleted. Be

sure to save it on a floppy disk or User

Memory before you turn off the power

(p. 116).

If you press a button while the lyrics are being

shown in the display, the lyrics will

disappear. To recall them, touch <lyrics> in

the Piano or Basic screen, or press the

The recorded

performance has

disappeared

Lyrics are not

indicated properly

in the display

[

(Play/Stop)] button.

In the score screen, some lyrics or notes could

extend beyond the edges of the screen, and

not be displayed.

182

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Error Messages

Indica-

tion

Meaning

Indica-

tion

Meaning

To protect the copyright, this music file cannot be

saved as an SMF.

Also, the music file can not be saved. If you want to

save it, please save on the same floppy disk.

The selected image data cannot be displayed. If it

cannot be made to appear either on the KR’s display

or the external display, you will need to prepare

image data that can be used with the KR (p. 164).

Error 00:

Error 01:

Error 02:

Error 17:

Error 30:

You can only read the music file. It can not be saved

on a floppy disk or user memory.

The internal memory capacity of the KR is full. Save

the song data on a floppy disk (p. 116) and

delete the song or the User style data stored on the

KR memory.

The protect tab on the floppy disk is set to the

Protect position (p. 6). Change it to the Write

position.

The KR cannot deal with the excessive MIDI data

sent from the external MIDI device. Reduce the

amount of MIDI data sent to the KR.

Repeat the procedure.

Error 40:

Error 41:

This floppy disk cannot store the format or save any

data.

Insert a different disk and repeat the procedure.

Error 03:

Error 04:

A MIDI cable or computer cable has been

disconnected. Connect it properly and securely.

The data cannot be saved onto this floppy disk

because the format is different. Use the floppy disk

in the same format.

An excessive amount of performance data has been

sent to KR in one time and therefore could not be

recorded. Change the tempo more slowly to record

the performance again.

Error 42:

Error 43

Error 51:

A new song cannot be written on this song. Select a

different song number or use a different floppy

disk, and repeat the procedure.

Error 05:

Error 10:

The Computer switch is set to a wrong position or

the computer is set wrongly. Switch off the KR then

set the Computer switch to the correct position and

set the computer correctly. After that, switch on the

KR again.

No disk is connected to the disk drive.

Insert the disk correctly, and repeat the procedure.

There is not sufficient space left on the floppy disk

or User memory for the data to be saved.

Insert a different floppy disk or delete files on user

memory, and repeat the procedure.

There may be a problem with the system. Repeat

the procedure from the beginning. If it is not solved

after you have tried several times, contact the

Roland service center.

Error 11:

Error 12:

The floppy disk inserted into the disk drive can’t be

read. Be sure you’re using Roland SMF Music Files

or other music files compatible with Roland digital

pianos (p. 201). Also, if you want to save your work

on floppy disk, you need to format the floppy disk

first (p. 114).

Error 61:

Error 62:

Moving Key Error.

Stop use immediately, and contact the nearest

Roland Service Center.

Automatic Keyboard System or CD Drive Error.

Stop use immediately, and contact the nearest

Roland Service Center.

Error 63:

For more on CDs that can be read, refer to p. 82.

The disk was removed from the disk drive while

reading or writing was in progress. Insert the disk

and repeat the procedure.

Error 13:

Error 14:

This disk or user memory is damaged and cannot

be used. Insert a different disk and repeat the

procedure or format the user memory (p. 165).

This song or music style cannot be read. Please use

a Roland SMF Music Files or Roland Digital Piano

compatible music files (p. 201). Also, you can only

use User Programs that have been saved with the

KR (p. 123).

Error 15:

Error 16:

The KR cannot read the disk or user memory

quickly enough. Press the [

button, then press the [

(Play/Stop)]

(Reset)] button and

[

(Play/Stop)] button to play the song.

For more on CDs that can be read, refer to p. 82.

183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tone List

SynthBass101

Jungle Bass

Modular Bass

WireStr Bass

ResoSH Bass

SH101 Bass

Mute PickBs.

Mr.Smooth

Open Hard

Dazed Guitar

Acid Guitar

Hawaiian Gt.

Ukulele

Oboe

LM PureLead

LM Square

JP SuperSaw

Natural Lead

2600 SubOsc

SquareWave2

Org Bells

[Piano]

[Organ]

Flugel Horn

Power Brass

St. Brass ff

AltoSax Soft

English Horn

EX Tp&Shake

BrassSection

Bs Clarinet

Tenor Sax f

Brite Brass

Brass ff

Grand Piano1

PianoStrings

Piano Choir

Tremolo Dyno

Jazzy Vib+Gt

Suitcase

Jazz Organ

Full Organ 1

Lower Organ

Theater Org.

Diapason 8'

Bandneon

Oohs Chord

Fantasia

Vibraphone

Harpsi.Doubl

Marimba

Perc. Organ

Full Organ 2

Lower Organ2

Church Organ

Rock Organ1

Blues Harp

Pop Organ

L-Organ

Crystal

Harpvox

Steel Drums

Honky-Tonk

Stage Rhodes

Ballad Piano

Wurly

CC Solo

OrchestraBrs

Grow Sax

Vox Sweep

Brightness

Syn.Square

JP8 Square

FM Lead

Banjo

Koto

Baritone Sax

Alto Sax

Shamisen

Dyno Rhodes

Rock Piano

Honky-tonk 2

Clav.

Trem.Flute

Accordion

Gt.Harmonics

EX Trumpet

Tp Shake

FM Lead 2

Mg Lead

Nason flt 8'

Organ Flute

Jazz Organ2

Jazz Organ3

Jazz Organ4

CheeseOrgan

Full Organ 3

Full Organ 4

Rotary Org.S

Rotary Org.F

Rock Organ2

Pipe Org. Bs

Organ Bass

Metalic Org.

VS Organ

Tenor Sax

GS Bari Sax

SuperF.Horns

Fr.Horn Solo

Jump Brass

Soft Brass

DeepSynBrass

Trombone

Trombone 2

Tuba

[Strings]

Dual Sqr&Saw

P5 Saw Lead

Rhythmic Saw

Waspy Synth

JP8 Pulse

Cheese Saw

SynVox

Harpsi.Singl

Harpsichord

UprightPiano

Grand Piano2

Bell Piano

Velo Strings

Dolce Strings

SlowStrings2

Tremolo Str

Suspense Str

EX Orchestra

Choir Str

Piano Oohs

Bright Piano

E. Grand

Clear Bells

Soft Crystal

Digi Bells

Harp Strings

Warm Strings

Violin

MIDI Piano1

E.Piano 1

Piccolo

Pan Flute

Nylon Harp

Nylon+Rhodes

Fantasia 2

Soft Pad

St.FM EP

GS Pan Flute

Blow Pipe

Bottle Blow

BottleBlow2

Bassoon

Slow Strings

Cello

FM+SA EP

Hard FM EP

Harpsi.o

St. Harp

Organ 1

P5 Poly

JV Strings

DecayStrings

Legato Str

Strings

Coupled Hps.

Soft Marimba

EG+Rhodes 1

EG+Rhodes 2

Hard Rhodes

Vibra Bells

Celesta

Organ 2

Reso Saw

RAVE Vox

Fat & Perky

Heaven II

Digi Church

Recorder

Trumpet

French Horn

Synth Brass1

Synth Brass2

Shakuhachi

Brass 1

Oct Strings

PizzicatoStr

Mellow Pizz.

Bell Strings

Orchestra

OrchestraHit

Warm JP Str

Slow Violin

Contrabass

Timpani

[Guitar / Bass]

JP8 Sqr Pad

Sweep Pad 2

Converge

EX Ac.Guitar

Flamenco Gtr

Steel Guitar

Jazz Guitar

Requint Gtr

12str Guitar

Nylon+Steel

Nylon Guitar

Mandolin

Glockenspiel

Soft E.Piano

60's E.Piano

E.Piano 2

Big Panner

Ai-yai-a

Brass 2

Ocarina

Echo Pan 2

Falling Down

Poly King

Xylophone

Music Box

Balafon

[Voice]

Boys Choir

Octave Stack

Warm Pad

Rising Osc

RandomEnding

Piano 1

Syn.Strings1

Syn.Strings2

Syn.Slow Str

Strings 2

Detuned EP 1

Detuned EP 2

Hard E.Piano

Hard Clav.

Soft Clav.

Gut Guitar

Kids Choir

Acoustic Bs.

A.Bass+Cymbl

JC E.Guitar

DistortionGt

Rock Rhythm

Rock Rhythm2

Overdrive Gt

Power Guitar

Power Gt.2

Muted Dis.Gt

Fingered Bs.

Picked Bs.

Jazz Scat

Rich Choir

Piano 1w

JP Saw Str

OB Strings

Euro Hit

Holy Voices

Jz Scat Vib

Opera Voice

Jz Scat Doet

Humming

Piano 1d

Reso Clav.

Phase Clav.

Pop Vibe.

Piano 2

Piano 2w

6th Hit

Piano 3

Bass Hit

Pop Celesta

Tubular-bell

Santur

Piano 3w

Philly Hit

Dreamy Choir

Jz Scat Vib2

Doos Voice

Doot Accent

Dat Accent

Bop Accent

Thum Voice

HollowReleas

Choir Oohs

VoiceAah Fem

Choir Aahs

Warm SqrPad

New Age Pad

Sugar Key

GS Honkytonk

Honky-tonk 2

GS E.Piano1

GS E.Piano2

60's E.Piano

E.Piano 1v

E.Piano 2v

Detuned EP 1

Detuned EP 2

GS Harpsi

Coupled Hps.

Harpsi.w

Kalimba

[Sax / Brass]

Air Grand

Piano 1

Super Tenor

EX Tenor Sax

Sax Section

Romantic Tp

TromboneSoft

AltoSax + Tp

Flute

Fretless Bs.

Slap Bass

Piano 2

Piano 3

Steel Vox

MIDI Piano2

Synth Harpsi

SynRingClav

Analog Clav

Muted Gt.

Muted Gt.2

Mellow Gt.

5th Dist.

Soprano Sax

Clarinet

Feedback Gt2

Synth Bass 1

Synth Bass 2

Harpsi.o

MutedTrumpet

Soft Clav.

184

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tone List

Celesta

Syn.Strings1

Syn.Strings2

Syn.Strings3

Choir Aahs

Choir

Sitar 2

Celesta*

Pan Flute*

Glockenspiel

Music Box

Viberaphone

Vibe.w

Banjo

Glocken*

Bottle Blow*

Shakuhachi*

Whistle*

Shamisen

Koto

Music Box*

Vibraphone*

Marimba*

Taisho Koto

Kalimba

Ocarina*

GS Marimba

Marimba

Pop Voice

SynVox

Xylophone*

Tubularbell*

Santur*

Square Wave*

Saw Wave*

Doctor Solo*

SynCalliope*

ChifferLead*

Charang*

Bagpipe

Xylophone

Tubular-bell

Church Bell

Carillon

OrchestraHit

GS Trumpet

Trombone

Trombone 2

Tuba

Fiddle

Shanai

Organ 1*

Tinkle Bell

Agogo

Organ 2*

Pop Organ 1*

Rock Organ2*

ChurchOrg.1*

Reed Organ*

AccordionFr*

Harmonica*

Bandoneon*

Nylon-strGt*

Steel-strGt*

Jazz Guitar*

Clean Gt.*

Muted Gt.*

Funk Gt.*

Santur

Steel Drums

Woodblock

Castanets

Taiko

Solo Vox*

5th SawWave*

Bass & Lead*

Fantasia*

Organ 1

MutedTrumpet

French Horn

Fr.Horn 2

Organ 2

Pop Organ

Detuned Or.1

Detuned Or.2

Church Org.1

Church Org.2

Church Org.3

Full Organ 4

Jazz Organ

Rock Organ 2

Reed Organ

Accordion Fr

Accordion It

GS Harmonica

Bandoneon

GS Nylon Gt.

Nylon Guitar

Nylon Gt.o

Ukulele

Brass 1

Concert BD

Melo. Tom 1

Melo. Tom 2

Synth Drum

808 Tom

Elec Perc.

Reverse Cym.

Gt.FretNoise

Gt.Cut Noise

String Slap

Breath Noise

Fl.Key Click

Seashore

Rain

Warm Pad*

Polysynth*

Space Voice*

Bowed Glass*

Metal Pad*

Halo Pad*

Sweep Pad*

Ice Rain*

Brass 2

Synth Brass1

Synth Brass2

Synth Brass3

Synth Brass4

AnalogBrass1

AnalogBrass2

GS Sop.Sax

Alto Sax

OverdriveGt*

Dist.Guitar*

Gt.Harmo*

Acoustic Bs*

Fingered Bs*

Picked Bs.*

Fretless Bs*

Slap Bass 1*

Slap Bass 2*

SynthBass 1*

SynthBass 2*

Rubber Bass*

Violin*

Soundtrack*

Crystal*

Tenor Sax

GS Bari Sax

GS Oboe

Syn Mallet*

Atmosphere*

Brightness*

Goblin*

English Horn

Bassoon

Thunder

Echo Drops*

Star Theme*

Sitar*

Clarinet

Wind

Piccolo

Stream

Steel-str.Gt

12-str.Gt

GS Flute

Bubble

Banjo*

Recorder

Bird

Shamisen*

Koto*

Mandolin

GS Pan Flute

Bottle Blow

Shakuhachi

Whistle

Dog

Jazz Guitar

Hawaiian

Horse-Gallop

Bird 2

Kalimba*

Viola*

Bagpipe*

Clean Gt.

Telephone 1

Telephone 2

DoorCreaking

Door

Cello*

Fiddle*

Chorus Gt.

Muted Gt.

Ocarina

Contrabass*

Tremolo Str*

Pizzicato*

Harp*

Shanai*

Square Wave

Square

Tinkle Bell*

Agogo*

Funk Gt.

Funk Gt.2

Sine Wave

Saw Wave

Saw

Scratch

Steel Drums*

Woodblock*

Taiko*

Overdrive Gt

DistortionGt

Feedback Gt.

Gt.Harmonics

Gt.Feedback

GS Ac.Bass

GS Fing.Bass

Picked Bs

Fretless Bs.

Slap Bass

Slap Bass 2

SynthBass101

Synth Bass 1

Synth Bass 2

Synth Bass 3

Synth Bass 4

Rubber Bass

Violin

Windchime

Helicopter

Car-Engine

Car-Stop

Car-Pass

Car-Crash

Siren

Timpani*

Strings*

Doctor Solo

Syn.Calliope

Chiffer Lead

Charang

SlowStrings*

Syn.Str 1*

Syn.Str 2*

Choir Aahs*

Pop Voice*

SynVox*

Melo.Tom 1*

Synth Drum*

ReverseCym.*

Fret Noise*

BreathNoise*

Seashore*

Bird*

Solo Vox

5th Saw Wave

Bass & Lead

Fantasia

Train

Jetplane

Orche.Hit*

Trumpet*

Starship

Telephone 1*

Helicopter*

Applause*

Gun Shot*

Warm Pad

Polysynth

Space Voice

Bowed Glass

Metal Pad

Halo Pad

Burst Noise

Applause

Laughing

Screaming

Punch

Trombone*

Tuba*

M.Trumpet*

FrenchHorns*

Brass 1*

Tone with a “*”

Heart Beat

Footsteps

Gun Shot

Machine Gun

Lasergun

Explosion

Piano 1*

SynthBrass1*

SynthBrass2*

A.Brass 1*

Soprano Sax*

Alto Sax*

symbol appended to

their name may not

play back

Sweep Pad

Ice Rain

Slow Violin

Viola

Soundtrack

Crystal

satisfactorily on

other GS sound

generating devices.

Cello

Syn Mallet

Atmosphere

Brightness

Goblin

Tenor Sax*

BaritoneSax*

Oboe*

Contrabass

Trem. Str

Piano 2*

PizzicatoStr

GS Harp

Piano 3*

EnglishHorn*

Bassoon*

Echo Drops

Echo Bell

Honky-tonk*

E.Piano 1*

E.Piano 2*

Harpsichord*

Clav.*

Timpani

Clarinet*

GS Strings

Orchestra

Echo Pan

Star Theme

Sitar

Piccolo*

Flute*

GS Sl.Str

Recorder*

185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Drum Set List

-----: No sound.

[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.

POP Set

ROCK Set

JAZZ BRUSH Set

VOX DRUM Set

R&B Snare

Rock Snare

Pop Snare m

Pop Snare Ghost

Pop Snare m

Finger Snap

707 Claps

Hand Clap

Hand Clap2

Hand Clap

Pop Pedal HH

Gospel Hand Clap

Vox Dut

Rock Snare

Pop Snare m

Pop Snare Ghost

Pop Snare m

Finger Snap

707 Claps

Hand Clap

Hand Clap2

Hand Clap

Pop Pedal HH

Gospel Hand Clap

Snare Roll

Pop Kick

Pop Side Stick

Pop Sanre s

Pop Snare Ghost

Pop Snare s

Pop Low Tom f

Pop CHH 1

Pop Low Tom

Pop CHH 2

Pop Mid Tom f

Pop OHH

Pop Snare m

Pop Snare Ghost

Pop Snare m

Finger Snap

707 Claps

Hand Clap

Hand Clap2

Hand Clap

Pop Pedal HH

Gospel Hand Clap

Snare Roll

Rock Kick

Rock Side Stick

Rock Sanre s

Rock Snare Ghost

Rock Snare s

Rock Low Tom f

Rock CHH 1

Rock Low Tom

Rock CHH 2

Rock Mid Tom f

Rock OHH

Rock Mid Tom

Rock High Tom f

Rock Crash Cymbal

Rock High Tom

Rock Ride Cymbal 1

Pop Chinees Cymbal

Pop Ride Bell

Tambourine 2

Splash Cymbal

Cha Cha Cowbell

Chinees Cymbal

Vibra-slap 2

Pop Ride Cymbal 3

High Bongo 2

Low Bongo 2

Mute Conga

High Conga 2

Low Conga 2

High Timbale 2

Low Timbale 2

High Agogo

Pop Snare m

Pop Snare Ghost

Pop Snare m

Finger Snap

707 Claps

Hand Clap

Hand Clap2

Hand Clap

Pop Pedal HH

Gospel Hand Clap

Snare Roll

Pop Kick

Jazz Snare Swing

Jazz Sanre

Pop Snare Swing

Jazz Sanre

Jazz Low Tom f

Pop CHH 1

Jazz Low Tom

Pop CHH 2

Jazz Mid Tom f

Pop OHH

Jazz Mid Tom

Jazz High Tom f

Jazz Crash Cymbal 1

Jazz High Tom

Jazz Ride Cymbal 1

Jazz Chinees Cymbal

Jazz Ride Cymbal 2

Tambourine 2

Splash Cymbal

Cha Cha Cowbell

Jazz Crash Cymbal 2

Vibra-slap 2

Pop Ride Cymbal 2

High Bongo 2

Low Bongo 2

Mute Conga

High Conga 2

[EXC7]

[EXC1]

Vox Dom

Vox Tuush

Vox Hehho

Vox Doyear

Vox Thu!

Vox That

Vox Aahhh

Vox Tu

Vox Dooh

Vox Ptu

Vox Down

Vox Pa

Vox Bom

[EXC1]

Pop Mid Tom

Pop High Tom f

Vox Toear

Vox Aahhu

Vox Toya

C3 48

Pop Crash Cymbal 1

Pop High Tom

Pop Ride Cymbal 1

Pop Chinees Cymbal

Pop Ride Bell

Tambourine 2

Splash Cymbal

Cha Cha Cowbell

Pop Crash Cymbal 2

Vibra-slap 2

Pop Ride Cymbal 2

High Bongo 2

Low Bongo 2

Mute Conga

High Conga 2

Low Conga 2

Vox Thu

Vox Cheey

Vox Cymm

Vox Tub

Vox Pruru

Vox Tut

Vox Tyun

Vox Tdum

Vox Afahhhh

High Bongo 2

Low Bongo 2

Mute Conga

High Conga 2

Low Conga 2

High Timbale 2

Low Timbale 2

High Agogo

Low Agogo

Shaker 3

C4 60

Low Conga 2

High Timbale 2

Low Timbale 2

High Agogo

Low Agogo

Shaker 3

High Timbale 2

Low Timbale 2

High Agogo

Low Agogo

Shaker 3

Low Agogo

Shaker 3

Shaker 4

Short Hi Whistle

Shaker 4

Short Hi Whistle

Shaker 4

Short Hi Whistle

Shaker 4

Short Hi Whistle

[EXC2]

Long Low Whistle [EXC2]

C5 72

Short Guiro

Long Guiro

Claves

[EXC3]

Short Guiro

Long Guiro

Claves

[EXC3]

Short Guiro

Long Guiro

Claves

[EXC3]

Short Guiro

Long Guiro

Claves

[EXC3]

High Wood Block

Low Wood Block

Mute Cuica

Open Cuica

Mute Triangle

Open Triangle

Shaker

High Wood Block

Low Wood Block

Mute Cuica

Open Cuica

Mute Triangle

Open Triangle

Shaker

High Wood Block

Low Wood Block

Mute Cuica

Open Cuica

Mute Triangle

Open Triangle

Shaker

High Wood Block

Low Wood Block

Mute Cuica

Open Cuica

Mute Triangle

Open Triangle

Shaker

[EXC4]

[EXC5]

[EXC4]

[EXC5]

[EXC4]

[EXC5]

[EXC4]

[EXC5]

Jingle Bell

Bell Tree

Castanets

Jingle Bell

Bell Tree

Castanets

Jingle Bell

Bell Tree

Castanets

Jingle Bell

Bell Tree

Castanets

C6 84

Mute Surdo

Open Surdo

Cana

[EXC6]

Mute Surdo

Open Surdo

Cana

[EXC6]

Mute Surdo

Open Surdo

Cana

[EXC6]

Mute Surdo

Open Surdo

Cana

[EXC6]

Falamenco Hi-Timbale

Falamenco Lo-Timbale

Falamenco Tmbl Flam

Shekere 1

Falamenco Hi-Timbale

Falamenco Lo-Timbale

Falamenco Tmbl Flam

Shekere 1

Falamenco Hi-Timbale

Falamenco Lo-Timbale

Falamenco Tmbl Flam

Shekere 1

Falamenco Hi-Timbale

Falamenco Lo-Timbale

Falamenco Tmbl Flam

Shekere 1

Shekere 2

Low Bongo Mute

High Bongo Mute

-----

Low Bongo Mute

High Bongo Mute

-----

Low Bongo Mute

High Bongo Mute

-----

Low Bongo Mute

High Bongo Mute

-----

100

101

Falamenco HC

Bongo Cowbell

-----

Bongo Cowbell

-----

Falamenco HC

Bongo Cowbell

-----

Bongo Cowbell

-----

Falamenco HC

Bongo Cowbell

-----

Bongo Cowbell

-----

Falamenco HC

Bongo Cowbell

-----

Bongo Cowbell

-----

102

104

103

105

186

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Drum Set List

-----: No sound.

[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.

STANDARD Set

ROOM Set

POWER Set

ELECTORONIC Set

-----

Bar Chime

Snare Roll

Finger Snap

High Q

-----

Bar Chime

Snare Roll

Finger Snap

High Q

-----

Bar Chime

Snare Roll

Finger Snap

High Q

-----

Bar Chime

Snare Roll

Finger Snap

High Q

Slap

Scratch Push

Scratch Pull

Sticks

Square Click

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Std Kick 2’

Kick 1

Side Stick

Std Snr 1

Hand Clap

Std Snr 2

Low Tom 2

Closed Hi-hat 1’

Low Tom 1

Pedal Hi-hat 1’

Mid Tom 2

Open Hi-hat 1’

Mid Tom 1

High Tom 2

Crash Cymbal 1

High Tom 1

Ride Cymbal 1

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Bell

[EXC7]

Scratch Push

Scratch Pull

Sticks

Square Click

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Kick1

Room Kick

Side Stick

Room Snr 1

Hand Clap

Std Snr 1

Room Low Tom 2’

Closed Hi-hat 1’

Room Low Tom 1’

Pedal Hi-hat 1’

Room Mid Tom 2’

Open Hi-hat 1’

Room Mid Tom 1’

Room Hi Tom 2’

Crash Cymbal 1

Room Hi Tom 1’

Ride Cymbal 1

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Bell

[EXC7]

Scratch Push

Scratch Pull

Sticks

Square Click

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Std Kick 2

MONDO Kick

Side Stick

Gated SD

[EXC7]

Scratch Push

Scratch Pull

Sticks

Square Click

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Std Kick 2

Elec BD

Side Stick

Elec SD

Hand Clap

[EXC7]

Hand Clap

Snare Drum 2

Room Low Tom 2

Closed Hi-hat 1

Room Low Tom 1

Pedal Hi-hat 1

Room Mid Tom 2

Open Hi-hat 1

Room Mid Tom 1

Room Hi Tom 2

Crash Cymbal 1

Room Hi Tom 1

Ride Cymbal 1

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Bell

Gated SD

Elec Low Tom 2

Closed Hi-hat 1

Elec Low Tom 1

Pedal Hi-hat 1

Elec Mid Tom 2

Open Hi-hat 1

Elec Mid Tom 1

Elec Hi Tom 2

Crash Cymbal 1

Elec Hi Tom 1

Ride Cymbal 1

Reverse Cymbal

Ride Bell

[EXC1]

C3 48

Tambourine

Splash Cymbal

Cowbell

Crash Cymbal 2

Vibra-slap

Tambourine

Splash Cymbal

Cowbell

Crash Cymbal 2

Vibra-slap

Tambourine

Splash Cymbal

Cowbell

Crash Cymbal 2

Vibra-slap

Tambourine

Splash Cymbal

Cowbell

Crash Cymbal 2

Vibra-slap

Ride Cymbal 2

High Bongo

Low Bongo

Mute High Conga

Open High Conga

Low Conga

High Timbale

Low Timbale

High Agogo

Low Agogo

Cabasa

Ride Cymbal 2

High Bongo

Low Bongo

Mute High Conga

Open High Conga

Low Conga

High Timbale

Low Timbale

High Agogo

Low Agogo

Cabasa

Ride Cymbal 2

High Bongo

Low Bongo

Mute High Conga

Open High Conga

Low Conga

High Timbale

Low Timbale

High Agogo

Low Agogo

Cabasa

Ride Cymbal 2

High Bongo

Low Bongo

Mute High Conga

Open High Conga

Low Conga

High Timbale

Low Timbale

High Agogo

Low Agogo

Cabasa

C4 60

Maracas

Short Hi Whistle

Maracas

Short Hi Whistle

Maracas

Short Hi Whistle

Maracas

Short Hi Whistle

[EXC2]

Long Low Whistle [EXC2]

C5 72

Short Guiro

Long Guiro

Claves

[EXC3]

Short Guiro

Long Guiro

Claves

[EXC3]

Short Guiro

Long Guiro

Claves

[EXC3]

Short Guiro

Long Guiro

Claves

[EXC3]

High Wood Block

Low Wood Block

Mute Cuica

Open Cuica

Mute Triangle

Open Triangle

Shaker

High Wood Block

Low Wood Block

Mute Cuica

Open Cuica

Mute Triangle

Open Triangle

Shaker

High Wood Block

Low Wood Block

Mute Cuica

Open Cuica

Mute Triangle

Open Triangle

Shaker

High Wood Block

Low Wood Block

Mute Cuica

Open Cuica

Mute Triangle

Open Triangle

Shaker

[EXC4]

[EXC5]

[EXC4]

[EXC5]

[EXC4]

[EXC5]

[EXC4]

[EXC5]

Jingle Bell

Bell Tree

Castanets

Jingle Bell

Bell Tree

Castanets

Jingle Bell

Bell Tree

Castanets

Jingle Bell

Bell Tree

Castanets

C6 84

Mute Surdo

Open Surdo

-----

[EXC6]

Mute Surdo

Open Surdo

-----

[EXC6]

Mute Surdo

Open Surdo

-----

[EXC6]

Mute Surdo

Open Surdo

-----

[EXC6]

187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Drum Set List

-----: No sound.

[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.

JAZZ

GS STANDARD Set

TR-808 Set

DANCE Set

BRUSH Set

-----

Bar Chime

Snare Roll

Finger Snap

High Q

-----

Bar Chime

Snare Roll

Finger Snap

High Q

-----

Bar Chime

Snare Roll

Finger Snap

High Q

-----

Bar Chime

Snare Roll

Finger Snap

High Q

Slap

Scratch Push

Scratch Pull

Sticks

Square Click

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Std Kick 2

808 Bass Drum 1

808 Rim Shot

808 Snare Drum

Hand Clap

Snare Drum 2

808 Low Tom 2

808 CHH

[EXC7]

Scratch Push

Scratch Pull

Dance Snr 1

Square Click

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Kick 1

808 Bass Drum 2

808 Rim Shot

TR-909 Snr

Hand Clap

Dance Snr 2

808 Low Tom 2

808 CHH [EXC1]

808 Low Tom 1

808 CHH [EXC1]

808 Mid Tom 2

808 OHH [EXC1]

808 Mid Tom 1

808 Hi Tom 2

808 Cymbal

808 Hi Tom 1

Ride Cymbal 1

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Bell

Tambourine

Splash Cymbal

808 Cowbell

Crash Cymbal 2

Vibra-slap

Ride Cymbal 2

High Bongo

Low Bongo

808 High Conga

808 Mid Conga

808 Low Conga

High Timbale

Low Timbale

High Agogo

Low Agogo

[EXC7]

Scratch Push

Scratch Pull

Sticks

Square Click

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Std Kick 2

Std Kick 1

Side Stick

Snare Drum 1

Hand Clap

Snare Drum 2

Low Tom 2

Closed Hi-hat 1

Low Tom 1

Pedal Hi-hat 1

Mid Tom 2

[EXC7]

Scratch Push

Scratch Pull

Sticks

Square Click

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Kick 2

Kick 1

Side Stick

Brush Tap

[EXC7]

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Brush Low Tom 2

Closed Hi-hat 2

Brush Low Tom 1

Pedal Hi-hat 2

Brush Mid Tom 2

Open Hi-hat 2

Brush Mid Tom 1

Brush Hi Tom 2

Crash Cymbal 1

Brush Hi Tom 1

Ride Cymbal 1

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Bell

Tambourine

Splash Cymbal

Cowbell

Crash Cymbal 2

Vibra-slap

Ride Cymbal 2

High Bongo

Low Bongo

Mute High Conga

Open High Conga

Low Conga

High Timbale

Low Timbale

High Agogo

Low Agogo

Cabasa

[EXC1]

808 Low Tom 1

808 CHH

808 Mid Tom 2

808 OHH [EXC1]

808 Mid Tom 1

808 Hi Tom 2

808 Cymbal

808 Hi Tom 1

Ride Cymbal 1

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Bell

Tambourine

Splash Cymbal

808 Cowbell

Crash Cymbal 2

Vibra-slap

Ride Cymbal 2

High Bongo

Low Bongo

808 High Conga

808 Mid Conga

808 Low Conga

High Timbale

Low Timbale

High Agogo

Low Agogo

Cabasa

Open Hi-hat 1

Mid Tom 1

High Tom 2

Crash Cymbal 1

High Tom 1

Ride Cymbal 1

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Bell

Tambourine

Splash Cymbal

Cowbell

C3 48

Crash Cymbal 2

Vibra-slap

Ride Cymbal 2

High Bongo

Low Bongo

Mute High Conga

Open High Conga

Low Conga

High Timbale

Low Timbale

High Agogo

Low Agogo

Cabasa

C4 60

Cabasa

808 Maracas

Short Hi Whistle

808 Maracas

Short Hi Whistle

Maracas

Short Hi Whistle

Maracas

Short Hi Whistle

[EXC2]

Long Low Whistle [EXC2]

C5 72

Short Guiro

Long Guiro

808 Claves

High Wood Block

Low Wood Block

Mute Cuica

Open Cuica

Mute Triangle

Open Triangle

Shaker

[EXC3]

Short Guiro

Long Guiro

808 Claves

High Wood Block

Low Wood Block

Mute Cuica

Open Cuica

Mute Triangle

Open Triangle

Shaker

[EXC3]

Short Guiro

Long Guiro

Claves

[EXC3]

Short Guiro

Long Guiro

Claves

[EXC3]

High Wood Block

Low Wood Block

Mute Cuica

Open Cuica

Mute Triangle

Open Triangle

Shaker

High Wood Block

Low Wood Block

Mute Cuica

Open Cuica

Mute Triangle

Open Triangle

Shaker

[EXC4]

[EXC5]

[EXC4]

[EXC5]

[EXC4]

[EXC5]

[EXC4]

[EXC5]

Jingle Bell

Bell Tree

Castanets

Jingle Bell

Bell Tree

Castanets

Jingle Bell

Bell Tree

Castanets

Jingle Bell

Bell Tree

Castanets

C6 84

Mute Surdo

Open Surdo

-----

[EXC6]

Mute Surdo

Open Surdo

-----

[EXC6]

Mute Surdo

Open Surdo

-----

[EXC6]

Mute Surdo

Open Surdo

-----

[EXC6]

188

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Drum Set List

-----: No sound.

[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.

ORCHESTRA Set

GS ROOM Set

GS BRUSH Set

-----

Bar Chime

Snare Roll

Finger Snap

High Q

-----

Bar Chime

Snare Roll

Finger Snap

High Q

Slap

Scratch Push

Scratch Pull

Sticks

Square Click

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Std Kick 2

Bar Chime

Snare Roll

Finger Snap

Close Hi-hat

Pedal Hi-hat

Open Hi-hat

Ride Cymbal

Sticks

Square Click

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Concert BD 2

Concert BD 1

Side Stick

Concert SD

Castanets

Concert SD

Timpani F

Timpani F#

Timpani G

Timpani G#

Timpani A

[EXC1]

Slap

Scratch Push

Scratch Pull

Sticks

Square Click

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Std Kick 2

Std Kick 1

Side Stick

Snare Drum 1

Hand Clap

Snare Drum 2

Room Low Tom 2

Closed Hi-hat 1

Room Low Tom 1

Pedal Hi-hat 1

Room Mid Tom 2

Open Hi-hat 1

Room Mid Tom 1

Room Hi Tom 2

Crash Cymbal 1

Room Hi Tom 1

Ride Cymbal 1

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Bell

[EXC7]

Std Kick 1

Side Stick

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Low Tom 2

Closed Hi-hat 1

Low Tom 1

Pedal Hi-hat 1

Mid Tom 2

Open Hi-hat 1

Mid Tom 1

High Tom 2

Crash Cymbal 1

High Tom 1

Ride Cymbal 1

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Bell

[EXC1]

Timpani A#

Timpani B

Timpani c

Timpani c#

Timpani d

Timpani d#

Timpani e

C3 48

Timpani f

Tambourine

Splash Cymbal

Cowbell

Concert Cymbal 2

Vibra-slap

Tambourine

Splash Cymbal

Cowbell

Crash Cymbal 2

Vibra-slap

Tambourine

Splash Cymbal

Cowbell

Crash Cymbal 2

Vibra-slap

Concert Cymbal 1

High Bongo

Low Bongo

Mute High Conga

Open High Conga

Low Conga

High Timbale

Low Timbale

High Agogo

Low Agogo

Cabasa

Ride Cymbal 2

High Bongo

Low Bongo

Mute High Conga

Open High Conga

Low Conga

High Timbale

Low Timbale

High Agogo

Low Agogo

Cabasa

Ride Cymbal 2

High Bongo

Low Bongo

Mute High Conga

Open High Conga

Low Conga

High Timbale

Low Timbale

High Agogo

Low Agogo

Cabasa

C4 60

Maracas

Short Hi Whistle

Maracas

Short Hi Whistle

Maracas

Short Hi Whistle

[EXC2]

Long Low Whistle [EXC2]

C5 72

Short Guiro

Long Guiro

Claves

[EXC3]

Short Guiro

Long Guiro

Claves

[EXC3]

Short Guiro

Long Guiro

Claves

[EXC3]

High Wood Block

Low Wood Block

Mute Cuica

Open Cuica

Mute Triangle

Open Triangle

Shaker

High Wood Block

Low Wood Block

Mute Cuica

Open Cuica

Mute Triangle

Open Triangle

Shaker

High Wood Block

Low Wood Block

Mute Cuica

Open Cuica

Mute Triangle

Open Triangle

Shaker

[EXC4]

[EXC5]

[EXC4]

[EXC5]

[EXC4]

[EXC5]

Jingle Bell

Bell Tree

Castanets

Jingle Bell

Bell Tree

Castanets

Jingle Bell

Bell Tree

Castanets

C6 84

Mute Surdo

Open Surdo

Applause

[EXC6]

Mute Surdo

Open Surdo

-----

[EXC6]

Mute Surdo

Open Surdo

-----

[EXC6]

189

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SFX Set List

-----: No sound.

[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.

SFX Set 1

SFX Vox Set

-----

Uno

Dos

Tres

Quatro

One

Two

Three

Four

Female Yodel

Male Yodel

Boys Amen

Ole!

-----

High Q

Slap

Scratch Push [EXC7]

Scratch Pull

Sticks

[EXC7]

Square Click

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Guitar sliding Finger

Guitar cutting noise (up)

Guitar cutting noise (down)

String slap of double bass

Fl.Key Click

Laughing

Screaming

Punch

Heart Beat

Footsteps1

Footsteps2

Applause

Door Creaking

Door

C3 48

C4 60

Scratch

Wind Chimes

Car-Engine

Car-Stop

Car-Pass

Car-Crash

Siren

Train

Jetplane

Helicopter

Starship

Ole!

Gun Shot

Machine Gun

Lasergun

Explosion

Dog

Ole!

C5 72

Ole!

Horse-Gallop

Birds

Rain

Thunder

Wind

Ole!

Yeah!

Seashore

Stream

Bubble

Cat

Bird

BabyLaughing

Boeeeen

Yeah!

C6 84

Yeah!

Glass & Glam

Ice Ring

Yeah!

Woo!

Crack Bottle

Pour Bottle

Car Horn

R.Crossing

SL 1

SL 2

Seal

Fancy Animal

Elephant

Woo!

100

101

Bike

Woo!

Ichi

San

Shi

Car Engine 2

Small Club

-----

102

104

103

105

190

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects List

Display

Explanation

Display

Explanation

Applies a light chorus effect with slow

undulations.

Applies both overdrive and chorus

effects.

Overdrive

-> Chorus

GS Chorus 1

GS Chorus 2

GS Chorus 3

GS Chorus 4

Applies a light chorus effect with quick

undulations.

Applies both overdrive and ﬂanger

effects.

Overdrive

-> Flanger

Applies a deep chorus effect with slow

undulations.

Overdrive -> Delay

Applies both overdrive and delay effects.

Applies both distortion and chorus

effects.

Distortion

-> Chorus

Applies a deep chorus effect with quick

undulations.

Applies both distortion and ﬂanger

effects.

Distortion

-> Flanger

GS Feedback

Chorus

A soft sound with a ﬂanger effect.

Distortion -> Delay

Applies both distortion and delay effects.

An effect that sounds like a jet plane’s

ascent/descent.

GS Flanger

Applies a resonance effect when the

damper pedal is depressed.

Sympathetic

Resonance

GS Short Delay

A short echo effect.

Produces a chorus with strong

undulations.

Wave Chorus

2 Band Chorus

Space Chorus

GS Short Delay

(Feedback)

A short echo with many repetitions.

Applies different chorus effects in the

treble and bass bands.

Stereo Chorus

Hexa Chorus

Tremolo Chorus

Space D

A stereo chorus.

A multilayer chorus.

A chorus with extremely small

undulations.

A chorus with a tremolo effect.

A clear chorus.

Chorus -> Flanger

Rhodes Multi

Applies both chorus and ﬂanger effects.

The optimal effect for an electric piano.

Rotary

Adds a rotary-speaker effect.

Delays the sound with a stereo effect.

Applies an effect that combines

compressor, chorus, and delay.

Clean Guitar

Multi 1

Stereo Delay

Adds a wavering effect to the delayed

sound.

Modulation Delay

Triple Tap Delay

Applies an effect that combines Auto

Wah, Equalizer, chorus, and delay.

Clean Guitar

Multi 2

A three-way delay.

A four-way delay.

Tremolo

Produces cyclical changes in volume.

Quadruple

Tap Delay

Makes the sonic position of the sound

move to the left or right.

Auto Pan

Phaser

Adds undulations to the sound.

Adds metallic reverberations.

This effect connect a chorus and a delay

in parallel.

Chorus/Delay

Chorus/Flanger

Rotary Multi

Stereo Flanger

A ﬂanger that varies the pitch in a

stepwise fashion.

This effect connect a chorus and a ﬂanger

in parallel.

Step Flanger

Enhancer

Overdrive

Distortion

Auto Wah

Compressor

Adds modulation to the sound.

Applies an effect that combines rotary,

Equalizer, and overdrive.

Applies soft distortion to the sound.

Applies hard distortion to the sound.

Changes the tone in a cyclical manner.

Suppresses ﬂuctuations in volume.

Applies an effect that combines Ring

Modulator, Equalizer, Pitch Shifter,

Phaser, and Delay.

Keyboard Multi

Cuts off the reverberations before they

fade away completely.

Gate Reverb

Adds two pitch-shifted sounds to the

original sound (two-voice pitch shifter).

2V Pitch Shifter

FB Pitch Shifter

The pitch will change in steps (feedback

pitch shifter).

Applies both enhancer and chorus

effects.

Enhancer

-> Chorus

Applies both enhancer and ﬂanger

effects.

Enhancer

-> Flanger

Enhancer -> Delay

Chorus -> Delay

Flanger -> Delay

Applies both enhancer and delay effects.

Applies both chorus and delay effects.

Applies both ﬂanger and delay effects.

191

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Music Style List (KR-17)

[Pop/Rock]

[Ballad/Acoustic]

[Oldies/Country]

[Gospel/Latin]

[Trad/Kids]

Funky Disco

Strumin'Away

AmericanPop1

AmericanPop2

'60s Feelin'

EZ Listening

Funky Pop

'70s 1

Scat Ballad

Piano Pop

Guitar Trio

6/8 Ballad

Love Songs

Symph.Ballad

SunnyFeelin'

Soft Ballad

Guitar Pop

Pop Ballad

Latin Guitar

Piano Ballad

Soulful Sax

Slow Pop

Rock'n'Roll1

Rhumba 1

Raindrops

Music Hall

Slow Waltz

Kids Shuffle

Kids

Oldies 1

Salsa

Rock'n'Roll2

Cntry Dreams

CountryBalad

HonkyTonkin'

Slow Dance

Twist

Trad. Tango

GospelBallad

Gospel

Soft Gospel

Mambo 1

Latin Festa

ModernChaCha

Gospel Shout

Gospel Pop

P.Gospel

Anthem

Kids Dance

Broadway

Stage Waltz

Fast Waltz

Little Steps

Parade

'70s 2

Surf'fun

Cool Al

Country Gtr.

Slow Oldies

OldtimeCntry

Rock'n'Roll3

JB Soul

Shuffle Pop

ShufleFusion

Contemporary

Asian Pop

Swing Pop

Groovin

MarchingBand

Polka

Revival

March

Piano Night

Swing Ballad

8BeatBallad1

8BeatBallad2

12/8 Ballad

Chapel

Blues

Samba 1

Irish

D Country

Twostep

Samba 2

Tejano

Medium Pop

Michael'sPop

OrchestraPop

Light Pop

BossaNova 1

BossaNova 2

BossaNova 3

Fast Bossa

Slow Bossa

LatinTrumpet

Mambo 2

Rhumba 2

ChaCha 1

ChaCha 2

Son

Celtic

CountrySwing

'50s R&B

Circus

Party Waltz

Vienna Waltz

Musette

Summer Days

Oldies 2

'70s 8-Beat

British Pop

'60s R&B

Crystal

Piano Latin

Piano Waltz

ClasiclPolka

PianoClasic1

PianoClasic2

Guitar Bossa

Gtr.Fast Pop

Guitar Waltz

Harp

Cajun

Scotland

Japan

Train Beat

CountryWaltz

PianoRagtime

Charleston

Bluegrass

Country

Fusion

Ireland

West Coast

Rollin'

Festival

Cinema

Light Fusion

Shuffle Rock

Power Pop

Power Rock

Hard Rock

Heavy Metal

Hip Hop

WesternMovie

Balloon Trip

Black&White

SFX Movie

Western

Calypso

Country Song

P.Country

Gt.Arpeggio

Outlaw

Reggae

Tango

Strings

Plena

P.Pop 1

Bomba

Screen

P.Classic 1

P.Slow Waltz

P.Night

Merengue

Slow Beguine

Beguine

Fanfare

Techno

Waltzing

House Pop

Euro Dance

[Big Band/

Swing]

SimpleMarch1

SimpleMarch2

Simple Waltz

Kids 4/4

P.Bossa Nova

P.Pop 2

Latin Pop

Latin

Smooth Jazz

LooseBigBand

Scat Swing 2

Fast Swing

Jazzy Choir

Organ Swing

Big Serenade

Big Band

P.Ragtime

P.Stride

Asian Rhumba

Kids 6/8

P.Concerto 1

P.Classic 2

P.Ballad 1

P.Ballad 2

P.Swing Pop

P.Rock'nRoll

P.Waltz

Lullaby 4/4

Music Box

Big Band Pop

Medium Swing

A Cappella

Stride Piano

Dixie

P.Concerto 2

P.Concerto 3

P.Swing

P.Shuffle

Jazz Waltz

Dixieland

P.Boogie

P.Slow Swing

P.'50s Rock

P.Latin

Jazzy Brush

Brush Swing

Jazz Quintet

Hula

Hawaiian

Cool Swing

Scat Swing 1

Slow Swing

Piano Jazz

Swing'in

Foxtrot 1

Foxtrot 2

Boogie

Piano Boogie

PianoShuffle

192

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Music Style List (KR-15)

[Pop/Rock]

[Ballad/Acoustic]

[Oldies/Country]

[Gospel/Latin]

[Trad/Kids]

Funky Disco

AmericanPop1

AmericanPop2

'60s Feelin'

EZ Listening

Contemporary

Funky Pop

'70s 1

Scat Ballad

Piano Pop

Guitar Trio

6/8 Ballad

Love Songs

Slow Pop

Rock'n'Roll1

Rhumba 1

Raindrops

Music Hall

Slow Waltz

Kids Shuffle

Kids

Oldies 1

Salsa

Rock'n'Roll2

Cntry Dreams

CountryBalad

HonkyTonkin'

Slow Dance

Twist

Trad. Tango

GospelBallad

Gospel

Soft Gospel

Mambo 1

Latin Festa

ModernChaCha

Gospel Shout

Gospel Pop

P.Gospel

Anthem

Kids Dance

Broadway

Stage Waltz

Fast Waltz

Little Steps

Parade

SunnyFeelin'

Piano Night

Guitar Pop

Latin Guitar

Symph.Ballad

Soulful Sax

Swing Ballad

Pop Ballad

8BeatBallad1

8BeatBallad2

Soft Ballad

12/8 Ballad

Chapel

'70s 2

Surf'fun

Cool Al

Country Gtr.

Slow Oldies

OldtimeCntry

Rock'n'Roll3

JB Soul

Shuffle Pop

ShufleFusion

Asian Pop

Swing Pop

Groovin

MarchingBand

Polka

Revival

March

Blues

Samba 1

Irish

Medium Pop

Michael'sPop

OrchestraPop

Light Pop

D Country

Twostep

Samba 2

Tejano

BossaNova 1

BossaNova 2

BossaNova 3

Fast Bossa

Slow Bossa

LatinTrumpet

Mambo 2

Rhumba 2

ChaCha 1

ChaCha 2

Son

Celtic

Country

Circus

'50s R&B

Party Waltz

Vienna Waltz

Musette

'70s 8-Beat

British Pop

'60s R&B

Crystal

Summer Days

Oldies 2

Piano Latin

Piano Waltz

ClasiclPolka

PianoClasic1

PianoClasic2

Guitar Bossa

Gtr.Fast Pop

Guitar Waltz

Harp

Cajun

Scotland

Japan

Fusion

Train Beat

CountryWaltz

PianoRagtime

Charleston

Bluegrass

CountrySwing

Country Song

P.Country

Gt.Arpeggio

Outlaw

West Coast

Rollin'

Ireland

Festival

Light Fusion

Shuffle Rock

Power Pop

Power Rock

Hard Rock

Heavy Metal

Hip Hop

Cinema

WesternMovie

Balloon Trip

Black&White

SFX Movie

Western

Calypso

Reggae

Strings

Tango

P.Pop 1

Plena

P.Classic 1

P.Slow Waltz

P.Night

Bomba

Screen

Techno

Merengue

Slow Beguine

Beguine

Fanfare

House Pop

Euro Dance

Waltzing

P.Bossa Nova

P.Pop 2

[Big Band/

Swing]

SimpleMarch1

SimpleMarch2

Simple Waltz

Kids 4/4

Latin Pop

Latin

P.Ragtime

P.Stride

Smooth Jazz

LooseBigBand

Scat Swing 2

Fast Swing

Jazzy Choir

Organ Swing

Big Serenade

Big Band

Asian Rhumba

P.Concerto 1

P.Classic 2

P.Ballad 1

P.Ballad 2

P.Swing Pop

P.Rock'nRoll

P.Waltz

Kids 6/8

Lullaby 4/4

Music Box

Big Band Pop

Medium Swing

A Cappella

Stride Piano

Dixie

P.Concerto 2

P.Concerto 3

P.Swing

P.Shuffle

P.Boogie

Jazz Waltz

Dixieland

P.Slow Swing

P.'50s Rock

P.Latin

Brush Swing

Jazz Quintet

Hula

Hawaiian

Cool Swing

Scat Swing 1

Slow Swing

Piano Jazz

Swing'in

Foxtrot 1

Foxtrot 2

Boogie

Piano Boogie

PianoShuffle

193

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chord List

● symbol: Indicates the constituent note of chords.

★ symbol: Chord shown with an “★”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “★” (p. 60).

Cmaj7

C#maj7

C#7

Dmaj7

maj7

Emaj7

Fmaj7

C#m

Cm7

Cdim

C#m7

C#dim

Dm7

Ddim

dim

Em7

Edim

Fm7

Fdim

Cm7 ( 5 )

C#m7 ( 5 )

C#aug

Dm7 ( 5 )

m7 ( 5 )

Em7 ( 5 )

Fm7 ( 5 )

Caug

Daug

aug

Eaug

Faug

Csus4

C7sus4

C#sus4

C#7sus4

C#6

Dsus4

D7sus4

sus4

7sus4

Esus4

E7sus4

Fsus4

F7sus4

Cm6

C#m6

Dm6

Em6

Fm6

194

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chord List

● symbol: Indicates the constituent note of chords.

★ symbol: Chord shown with an “★”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “★” (p. 60).

F#maj7

F#7

Gmaj7

maj7

Amaj7

maj7

Bmaj7

F#m

F#m7

F#dim

F#m7 ( 5 )

F#aug

F#sus4

Gm7

Gdim

Gm7 ( 5 )

Gaug

Gsus4

Am7

Adim

Am7 ( 5 )

Aaug

Asus4

Bm7

Bdim

Bm7 ( 5 )

Baug

Bsus4

dim

m7 ( 5 )

aug

sus4

m7 ( 5 )

aug

sus4

F#7sus4

F#6

G7sus4

7sus4

A7sus4

7sus4

B7sus4

F#m6

Gm6

Am6

Bm6

195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal Song List

Folks

Jazzy

Annie Laurie

Londonderry Air

AmazingGrace

Ave Maria

Preludelight

Bluesky Rag

Secret Agent

Late Night Chopin

Fly Free

Clock

Entertainer

Sun Daze

Greensleeves

Hallelujah!

Keepers Tale

CountOnBlues

OneDown&Easy

A PreludeTo:

BachsBoppin'

HungarianRag

KismetsSalsa

Matthew

Jingle Bells

Les patineurs, Valse

Little Brown Jug

Marchin' In

Silent Night, Holy Night

Stagecoach

RollOverLudwig

EZ Classical

Kids

Air sul G

Fantasie-impromptu op.66

Grande valse brillante

Gymnopedie 1

Liebestraume 3

Mondschein

Frog Song

HoneybeeMarch

Jingle Bell

Little Fox

Little Row

Nocturne 9-2

LondonBridge

Mary Lamb

OldMacDonald

The Cuckoo

Twinkle

Petit chien

Prelude28-15

Traumerei

TurkishMarch

Ungarische Tanze V

196

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal Song List

Practice

Beyer 15

The Hunt

Beyer 21

TenderFlower

Shepherdess

Farewell

Beyer 25

Beyer 29

Beyer 34

Consolation

AustrianDance

Ballad

Beyer 38

Beyer 42

Beyer 46

Sighing

Beyer 51

Chatterbox

Restlessness

Ave Maria

Beyer 55

Beyer 60

Beyer 64

Tarantella

Beyer 67

AngelHarmony

Gondola Song

The Return

The Swallow

KnightErrant

Invention 1

Invention 2

Invention 3

Invention 4

Invention 5

Invention 6

Invention 7

Invention 8

Invention 9

Invention 10

Invention 11

Invention 12

Invention 13

Invention 14

Invention 15

Beyer 73

Beyer 78

Beyer 81

Beyer 90

Beyer 93

Beyer 98

Beyer 103

Czerny100- 1

Czerny100-10

Czerny100-20

Czerny100-30

Czerny100-38

Czerny100-43

Czerny100-60

Czerny100-75

Czerny100-86

Czerny100-96

Openness

Arabesque

Pastoral

SmallGathering

Innocence

Progress

Clear Stream

Gracefulness

197

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal Song List

Masterpieces

→

Song files of this genre corresponds to the included

Standchen

collection of printed music entitled “Roland 60 Classical

Piano Masterpieces.”

Humoreske

Blumenlied

Sonate No.15

Alpenglockchen

Menuett Gdur (Beethoven)

Venezianisches Gondellied

Alpenabendrote

Farewell to the Piano

Brautchor

Liebestraume 3

Etude op10-3

Je te veux

Valse op64-1

Golliwog'sCakewalk

FantaisieImpromptu

Arabesque 1

Waterloo

WienerMarsch

Blauen Donau

Le Coucou

Auf Flugeln des Gesanges

Mazurka No.5

Menuett Gdur (Bach)

Spinnerlied

Gymnopedie 1

Gavotte

Etude op25-1

Heidenroslein

ClairDeLune

ZigeunerTanz

Etude op10-5

Cinquantaine

Dr.GradusAdParnassum

Grande Valse Brillante

La priere d'une Vierge

Course en Troika

ToTheSpring

Csikos Post

Dolly'sDreaming Awakening

La Violette

Frohlicher Landmann

Sonatine36-1 (Clementi)

Sonatine20-1 (Kuhlau)

SonatineNo.5 (Beethoven)

Valse op64-2

RadetzkyMarsch

Traumerei

MomentsMusicaux 3

Prelude op28-15

HarmoniousBlacksmith

Ungarische Tanze 5

purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of

applicable laws.

Turkischer Marsch

(Beethoven)

NocturneNo.2

Fruhlingslied

Praludium

Jagerlied

MenuetAntique

Fur Elise

Turkischer Marsch (Mozart)

198

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Rhythm Pattern List

Patterns That Can Be

Beat

Pattern Name

Pattern Name (Beat) Measures

Selected with the

[Rhythm] Button

8-Beat 6

16-Beat 4

16-Beat 5

Rock 3

Rock 4

4/4 Simple

5/4

Shuffle2(4/4)

Brush (4/4)

Triplet(4/4)

4/4

→

“Playing Rhythm” (p. 56)

March 1(4/4)

March 2(4/4)

Tango 1(4/4)

Tango 2(4/4)

Mambo 1(4/4)

Mambo 2(4/4)

House 1(4/4)

House 2(4/4)

House 3(4/4)

BossaNova(4/4)

Samba 1(4/4)

Samba 2(4/4)

Rhumba (4/4)

Beguine(4/4)

8-Beat4(4/4)

8-Beat5(4/4)

8-Beat6(4/4)

16-Beat4(4/4)

16-Beat5(4/4)

Rock 3 (4/4)

Rock 4 (4/4)

4/4Simple(4/4)

5/4 (5/4)

Beat

Pattern Name

March

5/4

6/4

7/4

3/8

2/2

Swing

6/4

0/4

2/4

Stick

7/4

March

3/8

Country

Samba

Ballad

March

Swing

6/8 Simple

9/8

6/8

Waltz 1

Waltz 2

Waltz 3

9/8

3/4

Country Waltz

Gospel

12/8

Jazz Waltz

3/4 Simple

8-Beat 1

8-Beat 2

8-Beat 3

16-Beat 1

16-Beat 2

16-Beat 3

Rock 1

Patterns That Can Be

Selected with the Edit

Functions

→

“Copying Rhythm Patterns to Create Rhythm

Parts” (p. 137)

Pattern Name (Beat) Measures

March (2/2)

Rock 2

6/4 (6/4)

Swing (2/2)

Swing 1

Swing 2

Shuffle 1

Shuffle 2

Brush

7/4 (7/4)

Stick (0/4)

3/8 (3/8)

March (2/4)

Ballad (6/8)

March (6/8)

Swing (6/8)

6/8Simple(6/8)

9/8 (9/8)

Country(2/4)

Samba (2/4)

Waltz 1(3/4)

Waltz 2(3/4)

Waltz 3(3/4)

CntryWltz (3/4)

Gospel (3/4)

JazzWaltz (3/4)

3/4 Simple (3/4)

8-Beat1 (4/4)

8-Beat2(4/4)

8-Beat3(4/4)

16-Beat1(4/4)

16-Beat2(4/4)

16-Beat3(4/4)

Rock 1 (4/4)

Rock 2 (4/4)

Swing 1(4/4)

Swing 2(4/4)

Shuffle1(4/4)

Triplet

March 1

March 2

Tango 1

Tango 2

Mambo 1

Mambo 2

House 1

House 2

House 3

Bossa Nova

Samba 1

Samba 2

Rhumba

Beguine

8-Beat 4

8-Beat 5

4/4

12/8 (12/8)

CountIn1(4/4)

CountIn2(3/4)

C.InSwing(4/4)

Fill In1(4/4)

Fill In2(4/4)

Fill In3(4/4)

Ending 1(4/4)

Ending 2(4/4)

Ending 3(4/4)

199

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Parameters Stored to Internal Memory

Parameters Stored in the User Program

Parameters Stored in Memory Backup

→

“Saving Performance Settings (User Program)” (p. 122)

→

“Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is Turned Off (Memory

Backup)” (p. 164)

Parameters that switch immediately after the User Pro-

gram name is touched when <Option> on the User Pro-

gram screen is set to “Delayed”

Octave Shift

Tone

Parameters

Effects: On/Off, Type, Depth

Rotary effect (Slow/Fast),

Organ

One-Touch Piano Settings:

Footage (Upper, Lower), Percussion

Lid, Tuning (Tuning, Key, Stretch Tunings),

Resonance (Type, Depth),

Selected

Key Touch,

Right-hand

Tone, Octave Shift,

Tone, Layer

String Resonance (On/Off, Depth),

Hamper Response (On/Off, Depth)

Effect (Type, Depth, On/Off)

Tone,

Left-hand Tone

Metronome: Sound

Count-In: Measures, Sound

Countdown: Sound

Language

Bass Tone, Chord Tone

Part Balance

Keyboard Parts

Melody

On/Off, Type

Intelligent

Opening Message

Split On/Off, Layer On/Off,

Lower On/Off,

Touch Screen

Keyboard Mode

Pedal Settings

Track Assign

System

Keyboard Transpose, Split Point

Parameters

Reverb: On/Off, Type, Depth

Surround: Off/Accomp/Reverb

Functions assigning to the left pedal and

center pedal

Surround:

Style Orchestrator/User Function,

User Function, Phrase,

On/Off for each part, various settings

Performance

Pad Settings

Aux Out Settings

Style Orchestrator values assigning the Pads

CD Volume (Only instruments featuring the

Moving Key function)

Keyboard settings

(One-Touch Piano/ One-Touch Arranger/Others)

Master Volume (Only instruments featuring

the Moving Key function)

Reverb

On/Off, Type, Depth

On/Off, Echo (Type, Depth),

Moving Key On/Off (Only instruments fea-

turing the Moving Key function)

Vocal Effects

Bend Range

Transformer Type, Harmonist Type,

Transformer/Harmonist, Music Files Part

Remote Control’s Setting (Only instruments

featuring the Moving Key function)

MIDI Settings for

User Program

PC Number, Bank Select LSB,

Bank Select MSB, Program Change

Equalizer

On/Off, Each Sliders level, Master Level

Parameters that switch after the User Program name is

touched for a few moments when <Option> on the User

Program screen is set to “Delayed”

Music Style

Tempo

Part Balance

Accompaniment Part

Accompaniment On/Off,

Chord Intelligence On/Off,

Leading Bass On/Off, Original/Variation,

Sync Start On/Off,

Arranger

Settings

<Accomp> setting for

Arranger Configuration,

Style Orchestrator, Division

200

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Music Files That the KR Can Use

What Are Music Files?

■ About the KR Sound Generator

Music Files contain information describing the details of a

musical performance, such as “the C3 key on a keyboard was

pressed for this amount of time, using this amount of force.”

By inserting the floppy disk into the disk drive on the KR, the

performance information is sent from the floppy disk to the

piano, and played faithfully by the piano. This is different

than a CD, since the music file does not contain a recording

of the sound itself. This makes it possible to erase certain

parts, or to change instruments, tempos and keys freely,

allowing you to use it in many different ways.

The KR come equipped with GM 2/GS sound generators.

General MIDI

The General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to

provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs,

and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices.

Sound generating devices and music files that meets the General

MIDI standard bears the General MIDI logo. Music files bearing the

General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI

sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical

performance.

Regarding Copyright

Use of the song data supplied with the Data Disk attached to

this product for any purpose other than private, personal

enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder is

prohibited by law. Additionally, this data must not be

copied, nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without

the permission of the copyright holder.

General MIDI 2

The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 recommendations pick up

where the original General MIDI left off, offering enhanced

expressive capabilities, and even greater compatibility. Issues that

were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations,

such as how sounds are to be edited, and how effects should be

handled, have now been precisely defined. Moreover, the available

sounds have been expanded. General MIDI 2 compliant sound

generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry

either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo.

■ The KR allows you to use the

following music files

In some cases, the conventional form of General MIDI, which does

not include the new enhancements, is referred to as “General MIDI

1” as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2.

● Floppy disks saved on a Roland MT Series, or Roland Piano

Digital HP-G/R and KR Series instrument

● Roland Digital Piano Compatible Music Files

Roland’s original music file is made specifically for practicing the

piano. Some follow an instructional curriculum, allowing for a

complete range of lessons, such as “practicing each hand

separately” or “listening to only the accompaniment.”

GS Format

The GS Format is Roland’s set of specifications for standardizing the

performance of sound generating devices. In addition to including

support for everything defined by the General MIDI, the highly

compatible GS Format additionally offers an expanded number of

sounds, provides for the editing of sounds, and spells out many

details for a wide range of extra features, including effects such as

reverb and chorus. Designed with the future in mind, the GS Format

can readily include new sounds and support new hardware features

when they arrive. Since it is upwardly compatible with the General

MIDI, Roland’s GS Format is capable of reliably playing back GM

Scores equally as well as it performs GS music files (music files that

have been created with the GS Format in mind). This product

supports both the General MIDI 2 and the GS Format, and can be

used to play back music data carrying either of these logos.

● SMF Music Files (720KB/1.44MB format)

SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) use a standard format for music file

that was formulated so that files containing music file could be

widely compatible, regardless of the manufacturer of the

listening device. An enormous variety of music is available,

whether it be for listening, for practicing musical instruments, for

Karaoke, etc.

If you wish to purchase SMF Music Files, please consult the

retailer where you purchased your KR.

SMF with Lyrics

XG lite

“SMF with Lyrics” refers to SMF (Standard MIDI File) that

contains the lyrics. When Music Files carrying the “SMF with

Lyrics” logo are played back on a compatible device (one

bearing the same logo), the lyrics will appear in its display.

XG is a tone generator format of YAMAHA Corporation, that

defines the ways in which voices are expanded or edited and the

structure and type of effects, in addition to the General MIDI 1

specification. XGlite is a simplified version of XG tone generation

format. You can play back any XG music files using an XGlite tone

generator. However, keep in mind that some music files may play

back differently compared to the original files, due to the reduced set

of control parameters and effects.

201

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MIDI Implementation Chart

DIGITAL PIANO

Model KR-17/15

Date : Dec. 1, 2002

Version : 1.00

MIDI Implementation Chart

Transmitted

Recognized

Remarks

Function...

Basic

Channel

Default

Changed

1–16

Default

Messages

Altered

Mode 3

Mode 3, 4 (M=1)

* 2

Mode

**************

Note

Number :

15–113

**************

0–127

True Voice

Note ON

Note OFF

Velocity

8n v=64

After

Touch

Key’s

Ch’s

Pitch Bend

0, 32

Bank select

Modulation

Portamento time

Data entry

6, 38

Volume

Panpot

Expression

Hold 1

Control

Change

Portamento

Sostenuto

Soft

Portamento control

Effect1 depth

Effect3 depth

NRPN LSB, MSB

RPN LSB, MSB

O (Reverb)

O (Chorus)

98, 99

100, 101

Prog

Change

0–127

**************

0–127

: True #

Program number 1–128

System Exclusive

: Song Pos

: Song Sel

: Tune

System

Common

System

Real Time

: Clock

: Commands

O (120, 126, 127)

: All sound off

Reset all controllers

Aux

Message

: Local Control

: All Notes OFF

: Active Sense

: Reset

O (123–125)

* 1 O x is selectable by SysEx.

* 2 Recognized as M=1 even if M=1.

Notes

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO

O : Yes

X : No

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

202

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Main Specifications

KR-17M

KR-15M

KR-15

Keyboard

88 keys (Progressive hammer action keyboard with escapement)

100 levels

Touch Sensitivity

Keyboard Mode

Moving Key

Whole, Split (adjustable split point), Layer, Arranger, Piano Style Arranger, Manual Drums / SFX

Yes - - -

<Sound Generator> Conforms to GM2 / GS / XG Lite

Max. Polyphony

128 voices

Tones (Tone Search by

terms and by letters)

6 groups 691 variations (including 16 drum sets, 2 SFX sets)

Temperament

Stretched Tuning

Master Tuning

Transpose

8 types, selectable tonic

2 types

415.3 Hz–466.2 Hz (adjustable in increments of 0.1 Hz)

Key Transpose (-6–+5 in units of semitone), Playback Transpose (-24–+24 in units of semitone)

Reverb (16 types, 127 levels), Chorus (8 types, 127 levels), Sympathetic Resonance, Rotary and 45 other types,

Advanced 3D with Surround, Physical Damper Simulation (Advanced Resonance)

Effects

Equalizer

5 bands, Master level

Music Styles (Style Search

by terms and by letters)

6 groups 231 styles x 4 types (Style

6 groups 228 styles x 4 types (Style Orchestrator)

Orchestrator)

Music Assistant (Search

by terms and by letters)

Over 140 sets x 4 presets

Programmable Music

Styles

Style Converter, Style Composer

24 types

Melody Intelligence

Start/Stop, Intro/Ending (2 types for each style), Sync. Start, Fill In (Variation, Original), Arranger Reset,

Countdown, Count-in, Melody Intelligence, Break, Leading Bass, No Chord, Fade-in, Fade-out, Half Fill In

(Variation, Original), Chord Intelligence, Style Orchestrator

Control

Internal

Floppy Disk

Max. 99 sets

<Rhythm Partner> Metronome, Rhythm

Tempo

Quarter note = 20–250

Beat

2/2, 0/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 7/4, 3/8, 6/8, 9/8, 12/8

Volume

10 levels

11 patterns

8 types

Metronome Pattern

Metronome Sound

Rhythm Pattern

Tracks

59 patterns

5 tracks / 16 tracks

Song

1 song

Note Storage

Resolution

Recording Method

Edit

Approx. 30,000 notes

120 ticks per quarter note

Realtime (Replace, Mix, Auto Punch In, Manual Punch In, Loop, Tempo), Step (Chord Sequencer), Beat Map

Copy, Quantize, Delete, Insert, Erase, Transpose, Part Exchange, Note Edit, PC Edit

Song Select, Reset, Play/Stop, Rec, Bwd, Fwd, All Song Play, Random Play, Track Select, Count-in,

Countdown, Playback Balance, Marker Set, Repeat, Tempo Mute

Control

Touch the Notes, Replay, Select Various Tones, Song Stylist, Session Partner, Wonderland/Game, Quick Tour,

Audition, Panel Lock

Other Functions

203

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Main Specifications

KR-17M

<Disk Drive / Disk Storage> 3.5-inch Micro Floppy Disk

KR-15M

KR-15

Disk Format

Files

720 K bytes (2DD), 1.44 M bytes (2HD)

Max. 99 songs, Max. 99 User Styles, Max. 99 User Program Sets

Approx. 120,000 notes (2DD), Approx. 240,000 notes (2HD)

Song: Standard MIDI Files (Format 0/1), Roland Original Format (i-Format)

Music Style: MSA, MSD, MSE

Note Storage

Playable Software

Save

Song: Standard MIDI Files (Format 0), Roland Original Format (i-Format)

Music Style: MSE

CD Drive

Read Only, Playable Disc: Audio CD (CD-DA), Data CD (SMF)

- - -

Internal Songs

(Song Search by terms

and by letters)

Over 170 songs

User Memory

Rated Power Output

Speakers

Max. 200 songs on Favorites, Max. 99 User Styles, Max. 99 User Program sets

70W x 4

70W x 2

20 cm x 2, 16 cm x 2, 8 cm x 2, 5 cm x 2

20 cm x 2, 5 cm x 2

Display

Bouncing Beat Indicator, Graphic Color LCD 320 x 240 dots (backlit LCD)

Grand staff / G Clef staff / F Clef staff, with note name / lyrics / chords / ﬁngering

English / Japanese / Germany / French / Spanish

Score

Languages

Lyrics

Yes (built-in, external display, MIDI output)

Control

Volume, Brilliance, Volume Balance, Contrast, Mic Volume

One Touch Piano, One Touch Arranger

One Touch Program

Damper Pedal (half-pedal recognition), Soft Pedal (half-pedal recognition, 36 functions assignable),

Sostenuto Pedal (36 functions assignable)

Pedals

Vocal Effects

Echo, Voice Transformer, Vocal Keyboard, Harmonist

Output jacks (L/Mono, R), Aux Output jacks (L/Mono, R), Input jacks (L/Mono, R), Mic Input jack, Phones

jack (Stereo) x 2, MIDI In connector, MIDI Out connector, Computer connector, Pedal connector (8-pin DIN

type), Expression Pedal jack, Ext Display connector (15-pin D-Sub type)

Connectors

Power Supply

AC 117 V / AC 230 V / AC 240 V

Power Consumption

330 W

260 W

180 W

1502 (W) x 1580 (D) x 1000 (H) mm

59-3/16(W) x 62-1/4(D) x

39-3/8(H) inches

Dimensions (including the

piano stand)

1465 (W) x 938 (D) x 912 (H) mm

57-11/16(W) x 36-15/16(D) x 35-15/16(H) inches

1502 (W) x 1580 (D) x 1773 (H) mm

59-3/16(W) x 62-1/4(D) x

69-13/16(H) inces

1465 (W) x 938 (D) x 1431 (H) mm

57-11/16(W) x 36-15/16(D) x 56-3/8 inches

Including the music stand

Weights (including the

piano stand)

230 kg / 507 lbs

130 kg / 287 lbs

110 kg / 243 lbs

Quick Start, Owner’s Manual,

Roland 60 Classical Piano

Masterpieces, AC cord,

Quick Start, Owner’s Manual, Roland 60 Classical Piano Masterpieces,

CD (Music Data Disc with vocals), AC cord, Maintenance Kit,

Key Cover, Remote Control, Dry-cell Batteries

Accessories

Maintenance Kit, Key Cover

* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.

204

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Clef R .................................................................................90

Compatibility ...................................................................118

Composer MIDI Out ........................................................175

Computer .........................................................................178

Computer Connector .......................................................178

Computer Switch .............................................................178

Connected

Numerics

16-Track Sequencer ..........................................................127

AC Inlet .............................................................................20

Access Indicator .................................................................14

Accompaniment

Start and Stop ...............................................................66

Sync Start .....................................................................66

Advanced 3D .....................................................................38

Arranger Config ..............................................................159

As SMF ............................................................................118

Audio Equipment ............................................................176

Auto Punch-In/Out .........................................................133

Automatic Accompaniment ...............................................58

Aux Jack ....................................................................14, 177

Expression Pedal ........................................................172

Connecting

Audio Equipment ......................................................176

Computer ...................................................................178

External Speaker ........................................................177

MIDI device ...............................................................172

Contrast .............................................................................24

Contrast knob ....................................................................24

Copy (Song Edit) .............................................................136

Copying

Balance ..............................................................................75

Songs ..........................................................................120

User Program .............................................................125

User Styles .................................................................151

Count In .............................................................................98

Countdown ........................................................................68

Settings .......................................................................161

Count-In

Balance Knob .....................................................................75

Bank Select LSB ...............................................................175

Bank Select MSB ..............................................................175

Basic Screen .......................................................................24

Basic tempo .....................................................................142

Bass Tone ...................................................................6 7 , 159

Beat

Settings .......................................................................160

Metronome ..................................................................53

Rhythm ........................................................................56

Beat Indicator ..................................................................164

Beat LED ..........................................................................164

Beat Map ..........................................................................141

Bend Range ......................................................................159

Blank Recording ..............................................................132

[Brilliance] knob ................................................................22

[Bwd] button .....................................................................78

Damper pedal ....................................................................21

Delete (Song Edit) ............................................................138

Deleting

A song ........................................................................119

User Style ...................................................................150

Disc Tray ............................................................................14

Disk Drive ........................................................................114

Divisions ............................................................................58

Drum Set List ...................................................................186

DRUMS ..........................................................................QS 5

Drums .................................................................... QS 14, 28

Calibration .......................................................................165

CD .............................................................................8 3 , 171

CD Drive ...........................................................................82

CD Settings ......................................................................171

Chord Finder .....................................................................61

Chord Intelligence .............................................................60

Chord List ........................................................................194

Chord Sequencer .............................................................134

Chord Tone ................................................................67, 159

Chord type .........................................................................60

Chords .........................................................................60, 90

Clef L .................................................................................90

Echo ...................................................................................44

Editing .............................................................................135

Effects ................................................................................42

Effects List .......................................................................191

Eject Button

CD Drive ......................................................................14

Eject button

Floppy Disk Drive ......................................................114

Emergency eject hole ...................................................14, 82

“QS **” refers to the page number in Quick Start.

205

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Ending .........................................................................5 8 , 67

Equalizer ............................................................................40

[Equalizer] button ..............................................................40

Erase (Song Edit) .............................................................139

Erasing

Insert (Song Edit) .............................................................138

Internal Song List .............................................................196

Intro .............................................................................58, 66

[Intro/Ending] button .......................................................66

Intro/Ending Type ................................................................... 66

Performance on specific tracks ...................................112

Recorded performance ...............................................112

Error Messages ................................................................183

Export ................................................................................91

Expression Pedal .............................................................172

Expression Pedal jack ........................................................14

Ext Display connector ........................................................23

External Display ........................................................2 3 , 163

Karaoke ..............................................................................51

Key .....................................................................................90

Key Template .................................................................QS 3

Key Touch ........................................................................155

Language .........................................................................162

Layer ..................................................................................30

Layer Set ......................................................................Q S 14

Layer tone ..........................................................................30

Leading bass ....................................................................158

Local Control ...................................................................174

Loop Recording ...............................................................132

Lower Tone ........................................................................73

Lyrics .........................................................................90 , 170

lyrics ..................................................................................25

Factory Reset ...................................................................165

Factory Setting

Touch Screen ..............................................................165

User Memory .............................................................165

Favorites ....................................................................8 0 , 116

Registering ...................................................................80

Removing .....................................................................81

Fill In .................................................................................69

Fill In To Original ..............................................................58

Fill In To Variation ............................................................58

Finger Numbers .................................................................90

Footage ........................................................................QS 15

Floppy Disk .....................................................................114

Format

Manual Punch-In/Out .....................................................133

Marker .....................................................................100 , 160

Erasing .......................................................................101

Moving .......................................................................101

Placing .......................................................................100

Repeat ........................................................................102

Master Tuning .................................................................162

Melody Intelligence ...........................................................72

[Melody Intelligence] button .............................................72

Memory Backup ..............................................................164

Metronome ........................................................................52

Animation ....................................................................55

Beat ..............................................................................53

Pattern ..........................................................................55

Sound ...........................................................................54

Volume .........................................................................54

[Metronome] button ..........................................................52

MIC ................................................................................QS 5

Mic In jack .........................................................................22

[Mic Volume] knob ............................................................22

Microphone .......................................................................22

MIDI ................................................................................172

MIDI Connector ...............................................................172

MIDI Devices ...................................................................172

Floppy disk ................................................................114

Functions .................................................................1 52 , 155

[Fwd] button ......................................................................78

GAME ............................................................................Q S 5

General MIDI ...................................................................201

General MIDI 2 ................................................................201

GS ....................................................................................201

GS Format ........................................................................201

Hammer Response ..........................................................154

Harmonist ....................................................................4 6 –47

Harmony ...........................................................................72

Headphones ......................................................................22

Icon ....................................................................................25

i-format ............................................................................118

Input Jacks .......................................................................176

“QS **” refers to the page number in Quick Start.

206

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

MIDI Ensemble ................................................................173

MIDI Settings ...................................................................174

Minus One .........................................................................99

Mix Recording .................................................................131

Moving Key .............................................................1 68 –169

Multitrack Recording .......................................................127

[Music Assistant] button ..............................................Q S 10

Music Files ...................................................................4 9 –50

Music Holder .....................................................................19

Music Style ........................................................................58

On Disk ........................................................................63

Rhythm Pattern ............................................................65

Music Style Buttons ...........................................................62

Music Style List .......................................................192–193

Mute ..........................................................................99, 128

Pedal Settings ..................................................................157

Percussion ..........................................................................28

Performance Pad ..................................................7 0 –71 , 157

Phones jack ........................................................................22

Phrase ................................................................................71

[Phrase] button ..................................................................71

Piano ..................................................................................26

Piano Screen ......................................................................24

Pickup ..............................................................................113

Pitches ................................................................................90

Play Mode ........................................................................169

[Play/Stop] button .......................................................78 , 84

Playing ...............................................................................77

All of the internal songs ...............................................78

At a fixed tempo (Tempo Mute) ...................................97

In random ....................................................................78

Repeat ........................................................................102

Song on CD ..................................................................83

Song on floppy disk .....................................................77

Power On and Off ..............................................................21

[Power] switch ...................................................................21

Practice Function ...............................................................92

Preset .................................................................................62

Program Change ..............................................................175

Protect tab ........................................................................114

PU (Pickup) .....................................................................113

Punch-in Recording .........................................................133

New Song ........................................................................106

N.C. (No Chord) ..........................................................Q S 13

Note Edit (Song Edit) .......................................................140

Octave Shift .......................................................................32

One Note ...........................................................................93

One Touch Program [Arranger] button .............................59

One Touch Program [Piano] button ..................................26

One Touch Settings ..........................................................156

One-Touch Arranger .........................................................59

Settings ......................................................................155

One-Touch Piano ...............................................................26

Settings ......................................................................152

Opening Message ............................................................162

Organ ...........................................................................QS 14

Original .............................................................................58

[Original] button ................................................................69

Output (Aux) Jacks ..........................................................176

Output Jacks ....................................................................176

Output jacks (Aux) ............................................................14

Quantize (Song Edit) .......................................................137

Quick Tour

Automatically starting ...............................................166

Rec Mode .................................................................112 , 130

Record/Playback Buttons ..................................................78

Recording ........................................................................105

16-Track Sequencer ....................................................129

A new song ................................................................106

Along with a Song ......................................................110

Redoing recordings ....................................................111

Track buttons .............................................................111

With Accompaniment ................................................108

Remote Control ....................................................85–86, 167

Repeat ..............................................................................102

Replace Recording ...........................................................131

Replay ................................................................................88

[Reset] button ....................................................................78

Panel Lock .......................................................................166

Part Balance .......................................................................75

[Part Balance] button .........................................................75

Part Exchange (Song Edit) ...............................................140

PC Edit (Song Edit) ..........................................................141

Pedal ..................................................................................21

Pedal Cable ........................................................................21

Pedal connector .................................................................21

Pedal EX ......................................................................QS 14

“QS **” refers to the page number in Quick Start.

207

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Resonance ........................................................................152

Restoring the Factory Settings .........................................165

Reverb ...............................................................................33

[Reverb] button ..................................................................33

Rhythm ..............................................................................56

Beat ..............................................................................56

Volume ........................................................................57

[Rhythm] button ................................................................56

Rhythm Partner .................................................................52

Rhythm Pattern List ........................................................199

Right-hand tone .................................................................30

Root note ...........................................................................60

Rotary effect ....................................................................158

Rec Mode screen ........................................................131

Rename screen ...........................................1 17 , 122 , 149

Reverb screen ...............................................................33

Rhythm screen .............................................................56

Save Song screen ........................................................116

Save Style screen ........................................................149

Save User Program screen ..........................................123

Score screen ..................................................................88

Song Edit screen .........................................................135

Song File screen ..........................................................115

Song Search screen .......................................................79

Song Selection screen .............................................77, 83

Style Composer screen ...............................................145

Style Converter screen ...............................................147

Style Search screen .......................................................64

Style Selection screen ...................................................62

Surround Accomp screen .............................................35

Surround Reverb screen ...............................................37

Tone search screen .......................................................29

Tone selection screen ...................................................27

Transpose screen ........................................................103

User Program screen ..................................................122

Vocal Effects screen ......................................................43

Write User Program screen ........................................122

Saving ..............................................................................116

Compatibility .............................................................118

User Style ...................................................................149

Score ..................................................................................88

Saving as image data ...................................................91

Settings ........................................................................90

[Score Display] button .......................................................88

[Score Display] button ............................................. QS 8, 74

Screens

16-track Sequencer screen ..........................................127

Advanced 3D screen ....................................................38

Basic screen ............................................................2 4 , 59

Chord Sequencer screen .............................................134

Copy Song screen .......................................................120

Copy Style screen .......................................................151

Copy User Programs screen .......................................125

Count In settings screen ...............................................98

Countdown settings screen ..........................................68

Delete Song screen .....................................................119

Delete Style screen .....................................................150

Delete User Program screen .......................................125

Effect screen .................................................................42

Equalizer screen ...........................................................40

Functions screen ........................................................161

Genre Selection screen .................................................77

Load User Program screen .........................................124

Marker screen ............................................................100

Melody Intelligence screen ..........................................72

Metronome screen .......................................................52

MIDI Setting Screen ...................................................174

Part Balance screen ......................................................75

Piano screen ...........................................................24, 26

Program Change Screen .............................................174

Music Style ...................................................................64

Song .............................................................................79

Tone .............................................................................29

[Select Various Tones] button ......................................Q S 14

[Select/Listen to a Song] button ........................ QS 6, 77 , 83

[Session Partner] button ...............................................Q S 18

SFX ..................................................................... QS 5, QS 14

SFX Set List ......................................................................190

SMF ..................................................................................201

SMF Music files ...............................................................201

Soft pedal ...........................................................................21

Solo ..................................................................................128

Song Information ...............................................................78

SONGS ...........................................................................QS 5

Song Number ...................................................................... 78, 84

Song Search .......................................................................79

[Song Stylist] button ....................................................QS 16

Sostenuto pedal .................................................................21

Sound Effects .....................................................................28

Sound Generator ..............................................................201

Split ....................................................................................74

Split Point ........................................................................156

Split Set ........................................................................QS 14

“QS **” refers to the page number in Quick Start.

208

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

[Start/Stop] button ............................................................66

Stretch Tuning .................................................................153

String Resonance .............................................................154

Style Composer ...............................................................144

Style Converter ................................................................146

Style Orchestrator ..............................................................70

[Style Orchestrator] button ................................................70

Style Search .......................................................................64

Surround ...........................................................................35

Accomp ........................................................................35

Reverb ..........................................................................37

[Surround] button ..............................................................38

Sympathetic Resonance .....................................................21

Sync ...................................................................................66

Undo (Song Edit) .............................................................136

User Functions .................................................................157

User Image Display .........................................................163

User Memory ...................................................................149

Formatting .................................................................165

User Program ...................................................................122

Calling up ..................................................................123

Copying .....................................................................125

Deleting ......................................................................125

Loading ......................................................................124

Registering .................................................................122

Saving ........................................................................123

Transmitting PC Numbers .........................................126

User Style ...................................................................63 , 144

Copying .....................................................................151

Deleting ......................................................................150

Saving ........................................................................149

Tap Tempo ........................................................................96

Temperament ..................................................................153

Tempo ................................................................... 53 , 65 , 95

Tempo [-] [+] buttons .........................................................95

Tempo marks .....................................................................53

Tempo Mute ......................................................................97

Tempo Recording ............................................................142

TONES ...........................................................................Q S 5

Tone Buttons ......................................................................27

Tone List ..........................................................................184

Tone Search .......................................................................29

Tone Set ...........................................................................129

Touch EX .....................................................................Q S 14

Topslip ...............................................................................18

Topsticks ............................................................................18

Touch Screen .............................................................2 4 , 165

Touch the Notes ...........................................................8 9 , 93

Track Assign ....................................................................170

Track Buttons .................................................... 99 , 107 , 109

Transformer .......................................................................45

Transpose ........................................................................103

Transpose (Song Edit) ......................................................139

[Transpose] button ..........................................................103

Troubleshooting ..............................................................180

Tuning .............................................................................153

Tuning Curve ..................................................................153

Tutor ..................................................................................92

Tutor screen .......................................................................92

Tx Channel ......................................................................174

Variation ............................................................................58

[Variation] button ..............................................................69

Vocal Count-In ...................................................................48

Vocal Effect ........................................................................43

[Vocal Effect] button ..........................................................43

Vocal Keyboard .................................................................48

Vocal Tap Tempo ...............................................................97

Volume

CD ................................................................................87

Metronome ...................................................................54

Microphone ..................................................................22

Overall .........................................................................22

Rhythm ........................................................................57

[Volume] knob ...................................................................22

Wonderland ...................................................................QS 5

XG lite ..............................................................................201

“QS **” refers to the page number in Quick Start.

209

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Information

When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland

distributor in your country as shown below.

PHILIPPINES

COSTA RICA

TRINIDAD

ITALY

ISRAEL

AFRICA

G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue

Makati, Metro Manila 1200,

PHILIPPINES

JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos

Musicales

AMR Ltd

Roland Italy S. p. A.

Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons

Ltd.

Ground Floor

Viale delle Industrie 8,

20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY

TEL: (02) 937-78300

EGYPT

Al Fanny Trading Office

9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany

Street,

ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,

Cairo 11341, EGYPT

TEL: 20-2-417-1828

Maritime Plaza

Barataria Trinidad W.I.

TEL: (868)638 6385

Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237,

San Jose, COSTA RICA

TEL: 258-0211

8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St.

Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL

TEL: (03) 6823666

TEL: (02) 899 9801

NORWAY

Roland Scandinavia Avd.

Kontor Norge

Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95

Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo

NORWAY

SINGAPORE

Swee Lee Company

150 Sims Drive,

SINGAPORE 387381

TEL: 6846-3676

URUGUAY

Todo Musica S.A.

Francisco Acuna de Figueroa

1771

C.P.: 11.800

Montevideo, URUGUAY

TEL: (02) 924-2335

CURACAO

Zeelandia Music Center Inc.

Orionweg 30

Curacao, Netherland Antilles

TEL:(305)5926866

JORDAN

AMMAN Trading Agency

245 Prince Mohammad St.,

Amman 1118, JORDAN

TEL: (06) 464-1200

REUNION

Maison FO - YAM Marcel

25 Rue Jules Hermann,

Chaudron - BP79 97 491

Ste Clotilde Cedex,

TEL: 2273 0074

DOMINICAN REPUBLIC

Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez

Calle Proyecto Central No.3

Ens.La Esperilla

Santo Domingo,

Dominican Republic

TEL:(809) 683 0305

KUWAIT

EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI

& SONS CO.

Abdullah Salem Street,

Safat, KUWAIT

CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE LTD

Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,

#02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980

TEL: 6243-9555

POLAND

MX MUSIC SP.Z.O.O.

UL. Gibraltarska 4.

PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND

TEL: (022) 679 44 19

VENEZUELA

Instrumentos Musicales

Allegro,C.A.

Av.las industrias edf.Guitar

REUNION ISLAND

TEL: (0262) 218-429

TAIWAN

ROLAND TAIWAN

ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.

Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung

Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei,

TAIWAN, R.O.C.

SOUTH AFRICA

That Other Music Shop(PTY)Ltd.

11 Melle St., Braamfontein,

Johannesbourg,

SOUTH AFRICA

TEL: (011) 403 4105

TEL: 243-6399

import

PORTUGAL

Roland Iberia, S.L.

Portugal Office

Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto

4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL

TEL: 22 608 00 60

LEBANON

Chahine S.A.L.

Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine

Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-

5857

Beirut, LEBANON

TEL: (01) 20-1441

#7 zona Industrial de Turumo

Caracas, Venezuela

TEL: (212) 244-1122

ECUADOR

Mas Musika

Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma

Guayaquil - Ecuador

TEL: (02) 2561 3339

FAX: (011) 403 1234

TEL:(593-4)2302364

EUROPE

THAILAND

Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd.

17 Werdmuller Centre,

Main Road, Claremont 7708

SOUTH AFRICA

ROMANIA

FBS LINES

Piata Libertatii 1,

535500 Gheorgheni,

ROMANIA

EL SALVADOR

OMNI MUSIC

75 Avenida Norte y Final

Alameda Juan Pablo II,

Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,

EL SALVADOR

Theera Music Co. , Ltd.

330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2,

Bangkok 10100, THAILAND

TEL: (02) 2248821

AUSTRIA

Roland Elektronische

Musikinstrumente HmbH.

QATAR

Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio &

Stores)

P.O. Box 62, Doha, QATAR

TEL: 4423-554

TEL: (021) 674 4030

Austrian Office

VIETNAM

Saigon Music

Suite DP-8

40 Ba Huyen Thanh Quan Street

Hochiminh City, VIETNAM

TEL: (08) 930-1969

Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8,

A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA

TEL: (0512) 26 44 260

TEL: (266) 364 609

TEL: 262-0788

ASIA

RUSSIA

MuTek

3-Bogatyrskaya Str. 1.k.l

107 564 Moscow, RUSSIA

TEL: (095) 169 5043

SAUDI ARABIA

aDawliah Universal

Electronics APL

Corniche Road, Aldossary

Bldg., 1st Floor, Alkhobar,

SAUDI ARABIA

GUATEMALA

BELGIUM/FRANCE/

HOLLAND/

LUXEMBOURG

Roland Central Europe N.V.

Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel

(Westerlo) BELGIUM

CHINA

Roland Shanghai Electronics

Co.,Ltd.

5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road

Shanghai 200090, CHINA

TEL: (021) 5580-0800

Casa Instrumental

Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11

Ciudad de Guatemala

Guatemala

SPAIN

TEL:(502) 599-2888

Roland Iberia, S.L.

Paseo García Faria, 33-35

08005 Barcelona SPAIN

TEL: 93 308 10 00

AUSTRALIA/

NEW ZEALAND

AUSTRALIA/

NEW ZEALAND

Roland Corporation

Australia Pty.,Ltd.

38 Campbell Avenue

Dee Why West. NSW 2099

AUSTRALIA

P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952

SAUDI ARABIA

TEL: (03) 898 2081

HONDURAS

Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V.

BO.Paz Barahona

3 Ave.11 Calle S.O

San Pedro Sula, Honduras

TEL: (504) 553-2029

TEL: (014) 575811

Roland Shanghai Electronics

Co.,Ltd.

(BEIJING OFFICE)

10F. No.18 Anhuaxili

Chaoyang District, Beijing

100011 CHINA

CZECH REP.

K-AUDIO

Kardasovska 626.

CZ-198 00 Praha 9,

CZECH REP.

SYRIA

Technical Light & Sound

Center

Rawda, Abdul Qader Jazairi St.

Bldg. No. 21, P.O.BOX 13520,

Damascus, SYRIA

SWEDEN

Roland Scandinavia A/S

SWEDISH SALES OFFICE

Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.

S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN

TEL: (0)8 702 00 20

MARTINIQUE

Musique & Son

Z.I.Les Mangle

97232 Le Lamantin

Martinique F.W.I.

TEL: 596 596 426860

TEL: (2) 666 10529

TEL: (010) 6426-5050

DENMARK

TEL: (011) 223-5384

Roland Shanghai Electronics

Co.,Ltd.

(GUANGZHOU OFFICE)

2/F., No.30 Si You Nan Er Jie

Yi Xiang, Wu Yang Xin Cheng,

Guangzhou 510600, CHINA

TEL: (020) 8736-0428

Roland Scandinavia A/S

Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,

DK-2100 Copenhagen

DENMARK

SWITZERLAND

Roland (Switzerland) AG

Landstrasse 5, Postfach,

CH-4452 Itingen,

SWITZERLAND

TEL: (061) 927-8383

TURKEY

Ant Muzik Aletleri Ithalat Ve

Ihracat Ltd Sti

Siraselviler Caddesi

Siraselviler Pasaji No:74/20

Taksim - Istanbul, TURKEY

TEL: (0212) 2449624

For Australia

Tel: (02) 9982 8266

For New Zealand

Tel: (09) 3098 715

Gigamusic SARL

10 Rte De La Folie

97200 Fort De France

Martinique F.W.I.

TEL: 596 596 715222

TEL: 3916 6200

FINLAND

Roland Scandinavia As, Filial

Finland

Elannontie 5

FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND

TEL: (0)9 68 24 020

UKRAINE

TIC-TAC

Mira Str. 19/108

P.O. Box 180

295400 Munkachevo,

UKRAINE

TEL: (03131) 414-40

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

Service Division

22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen

Wan, New Territories,

HONG KONG

CENTRAL/LATIN

AMERICA

U.A.E.

Zak Electronics & Musical

Instruments Co. L.L.C.

Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,

No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai,

U.A.E.

MEXICO

Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.

Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar

de los Padres 01780 Mexico

D.F. MEXICO

ARGENTINA

Instrumentos Musicales S.A.

Av.Santa Fe 2055

(1123) Buenos Aires

ARGENTINA

TEL: (011) 4508-2700

GERMANY

Roland Elektronische

Musikinstrumente HmbH.

Oststrasse 96, 22844

Norderstedt, GERMANY

TEL: (040) 52 60090

TEL: 2415 0911

TEL: (55) 5668-6699

UNITED KINGDOM

TEL: (04) 3360715

Parsons Music Ltd.

Roland (U.K.) Ltd.

Atlantic Close, Swansea

Enterprise Park, SWANSEA

SA7 9FJ,

NICARAGUA

Bansbach Instrumentos

Musicales Nicaragua

Altamira D'Este Calle Principal

de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida

1 Cuadra al Lago.#503

Managua, Nicaragua

8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39

Chatham Road South, T.S.T,

Kowloon, HONG KONG

TEL: 2333 1863

NORTH AMERICA

BARBADOS

A&B Music Supplies LTD

12 Webster Industrial Park

Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados

TEL: (246)430-1100

GREECE

STOLLAS S.A.

Music Sound Light

155, New National Road

Patras 26442, GREECE

TEL: 2610 435400

UNITED KINGDOM

TEL: (01792) 702701

CANADA

Roland Canada Music Ltd.

(Head Office)

5480 Parkwood Way

Richmond B. C., V6V 2M4

CANADA

INDIA

Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.

409, Nirman Kendra

Mahalaxmi Flats Compound

Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road,

Mumbai-400011, INDIA

TEL: (022) 2493 9051

TEL: (505)277-2557

BRAZIL

Roland Brasil Ltda

Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B

Parque Industrial San Jose

Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL

TEL: (011) 4615 5666

MIDDLE EAST

PANAMA

SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.

Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,

Panama City, REP. DE

PANAMA

HUNGARY

BAHRAIN

Moon Stores

No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,

P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,

State of BAHRAIN

TEL: 211 005

TEL: (604) 270 6626

Roland East Europe Ltd.

Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83

H-2046 Torokbalint,

HUNGARY

INDONESIA

PT Citra IntiRama

J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150

Jakarta Pusat

INDONESIA

TEL: (021) 6324170

Roland Canada Music Ltd.

(Toronto Office)

170 Admiral Boulevard

Mississauga On L5T 2N6

CANADA

TEL: 315-0101

CHILE

Comercial Fancy II S.A.

Rut.: 96.919.420-1

Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor

Santiago - Centro, CHILE

TEL: (02) 688-9540

TEL: (23) 511011

PARAGUAY

Distribuidora De

Instrumentos Musicales

J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira

Asuncion PARAGUAY

TEL: (595) 21 492147

IRELAND

Roland Ireland

G2 Calmount Park, Calmount

Avenue, Dublin 12

Republic of IRELAND

TEL: (01) 4294444

CYPRUS

Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.

17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,

CYPRUS

TEL: (905) 362 9707

KOREA

U. S. A.

Cosmos Corporation

1461-9, Seocho-Dong,

Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA

TEL: (02) 3486-8855

Roland Corporation U.S.

5100 S. Eastern Avenue

Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,

U. S. A.

COLOMBIA

Centro Musical Ltda.

Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9

Medellin, Colombia

TEL: (022) 66-9426

PERU

Audionet

Distribuciones Musicales SAC

Juan Fanning 530

Miraflores

IRAN

MOCO, INC.

No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,

Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad

Tehran, IRAN

TEL: (323) 890 3700

MALAYSIA

BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD

140 & 142, Jalan Bukit Bintang

55100 Kuala

Lumpur,MALAYSIA

TEL: (03) 2144-3333

TEL: (574)3812529

Lima - Peru

TEL: (511) 4461388

TEL: (021) 285-4169

As of August 20, 2004 (ROLAND)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

For EU Countries

This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.

For the USA

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION

RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential

installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee

that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or

television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

–

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.

This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.

For Canada

NOTICE

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

AVIS

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This owner’s manual is printed on recycled paper.

03126190

’04-12-6N

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quantum Data Portable Generator 700, 701 User Guide
Radica Games Games 73048 User Guide
RCA Clock Radio RC105 User Guide
RCA Tablet RCT6691W3 User Guide
RCA Universal Remote RCR6473R User Guide
Remington Electric Shaver BHT 2000 User Guide
Remington Electric Shaver MS3 1000 User Guide
RIDGID Carpet Cleaner K 2000 User Guide
Roland Electronic Keyboard HP103 User Guide
Runco Flat Panel Television CX 47HD User Guide